




Pass ~PC4-\\\ 


Rnnk 5 4- 2 L 

Co]?fiight U?_- 

coraRiGra DSPOBu^ 


-s .i..';. 















I 

P 




/ 






' •(, . 




•' ‘K -I 


«% 



- 













. 0 ' 

. ■, ■ .. .'•■ 7 '^. 


'^- 1 . 




m 


• ^ iV' ■ ''-.vi^ 

_L_^_' _• .:^>Jssifc,.5 ;?•*'■ 

r'ii '9 ■ •* " 

fOj,'••»¥" 11 

sTs ■' «■ 'hA 






tSKl'' ■ 19^ ‘ ■;/ 'I ; ■ r .;• ■ ngair 

•r^'- ■ ^--, 4 / 7 ; m*""- ■ ^-. 



5ri' /W ' •^ •' '. 4- ’ • 




M" - -v^v-.^. 

4^*- ••*• -i' ^aS? V. n Mi cy.. w 

C'K ■* *' • , ’ • • *#.»»*- 








* •* 



' A,.' 

7 . * 







^'^:'i:t§^ -'■-•■ A'I,' 

!!t^. :■• ■ •: l.'^/,..v , . ';!• . 

r- icf. ■■■ v', 




j>^ 



Vv.s 




La Catedral de Lima 
Vista de una antigua iglesia 












ibcatb’s fiDo&ern Xanguage Scries 


ALTERNATE 

SPANISH EEYIEW GRAMMAE 

AND COMPOSITION BOOK 

WITH EV FRY DAY IDIOM DRILL 
AND CONVERSATIONAL PRACTICE 


BY 

ARTHUR ROMEYN SEYMOUR 

Professor at Florida State 
College for Women 

' ' AND 

DAVID HOBART CARNAHAN 

Professor at the University 
OF Illinois 




D. C. HEATH AND COMPANY 

BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO LONDON 
ATLANTA DALLAS SAN FRANCISCO 






TC A-\a.'\ 


Copyright, 1923 and 1928, 
By D. C. Heath and Company 

218 


) 


PRINTED IN U.S.A, 


QGT19’28 

©Cl A 163 


PREFACE 


The purpose of this book is to furnish, in an in¬ 
teresting form, material for a thoroughgoing review of the 
essentials of Spanish grammar in the second year of College 
or the third year of High-School work. It may be studied 
either to begin the grammar review course or to alternate 
with the authors’ Short Spanish Review Grammar, with which 
it is identical in regard to the scope and treatment of gram¬ 
matical principles and the study of idiomatic constructions. 

The subject-matter of this book has been chosen with the 
aim of supplementing the reading sections of the previous 
Review Grammar. The latter presented a trip through Spain; 
the present book deals, in turn, with the Spanish-American 
countries. The two books thus offer in this respect not only 
a rounded whole but suitable material for annual alternation. 

Practical suggestions for overcoming the difficulties of the 
irregular verbs, tense by tense, are conveniently furnished 
near the beginning of the book. The Appendices contain a 
complete outline of the regular and irregular verbs, as well 
as reference lists of the irregular verbs and of those which 
govern an infinitive with or without certain prepositions. 

Since the book is for intermediate students, the arrange¬ 
ment of the grammatical material differs frequently from 
that of elementary grammars. 

The Spanish-English and English-Spanish vocabularies in 
synoptic form are an important element of the book. The 
arrangement of both on the same page affords a considerable 
saving of time. 

It is to be noted, finally, that*the present book offers a 
variety of exercises and furnishes abundant opportunity for 
the many devices of Direct-Method teaching. 

iii 


IV 


PREFACE 


SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS 

The book may be finished in one semester by allowing 
two classroom periods a week to each of the fifteen lessons, 
but better results will be obtained by devoting more time 
to each lesson. 

The authors are of the belief that there is no method 
which applies equally well to all conditions, and make the 
following suggestions with due reserve. In order to meet 
the necessities of different’institutions, the following plans 
are proposed: 

Plan I (Two class periods to one lesson). 

First day: Grammar section, Spanish reading, first half 
of Section C. 

Second day: Sections A and B, the last half of C, and 
Sections D and E. 

Plan II (Three class periods to one lesson). 

First day: Grammar Section, Spanish reading. 

Second day: Sections A and B, first half of C. 

Third day: Last half of C, Sections D and E. 

Plan III (Four partial class periods to one lesson). 

To be used in a mixed course of literature and composition. 
Devote the first 20-30 minutes of the period to this book, 
using the rest of the period for literary work. 

First day: Grammar Section. 

Second day: Spanish reading. Section A. 

Third day: Section B, first half of C. 

Fourth day: Last half of C, Sections D and E. 

Plan IV (For advanced classes). 

One classroom period to one lesson. 

Omit one or more sections, subject to the conditions of 
the class. 


PREFACE 


V 


The authors wish to acknowledge their indebtedness to 
Professor E. C. Hills of the University of California, to 
Professor John Van Horne of the University of Illinois, to 
Miss Adelaida Smithers formerly of the University of Illinois, 
and to Dr. Alexander Green of D. C. Heath and Company 
for their valuable help in the preparation of this book. 

A. R. S. 

D. H. C. 


April, 1928 







CONTENTS 


Preface . iii 

Suggestions to Teachers . iv 

Classroom Expressions and Grammatical Terms ... xi 

EXERCISE PAGE 

I. The Articles (I): Use of Definite and Indefinite 

Articles. 3 

Use of haber and tener. 5 

Verbs: haber and tener . 6 

Idioms: haber que, tener que, tener calor, 
frio, etc. . .. 7 

Los EXPLORADORES ESPANOLES. 8 

Supplement to Exercise I: 

Verb Formation: 

A. Radical-Changing Verbs. 12 

B. Orthographic-Changing Verbs .... 13 

C. Drill on Verb Forms. 14 

D. General Suggestions . 15 

II. The Articles (II): Definite and Indefinite Articles 

not Required. 18 

Use of ser and estar. 19 

Verbs: ser and estar . 20 

Idioms: acabar de, tratar de, cerca de . . . 21 

La civilizacion antigua de Mejico. 21 

III. Plural of Nouns. 25 

Inflection, Agreement and Position of Adjectives . 25 

Verbs: hacer and decir. 27 

Idioms: haga Vd. el favor de, tenga Vd. la 
bondad de, sirvase Vd., hacer {+ period 
of time), hacer calor, frio, etc., haber polvo, 
hacer or haber sol. 28 

El diario de un viajero en Me.jico. 29 

vii 




















CONTENTS 


viii 

EXERCISE PAGE 

IV. Gender of Nouns. 32 

Negation. 33 

Interrogation. 34 

Direct Object with a. 35 

Verbs: querer and poner. 35 

Idioms: querer decir, a menudo, gustar a 
(uno). 36 

La industria bananera. 36 

V. Tenses of the Indicative Mood . 40 

Imperative. 42 

Verbs: ir and andar. 42 

Idioms: poco a poco, a la vez, al (a lo, por lo) 
menos. 43 

La CANA DE AZUCAR EN CuBA. 43 

VI. Numbers, Seasons, Months, Days, Time, Money . 47 

Verbs: poder and venir. 50 

Idioms: no poder mas, no poder menos de 
(+ infinitive) y por eso (por lo tanto, por 
consiguiente). 50 

Una visita a Puerto Rico. 51 

VII. Personal Pronouns. 55 

Verbs: saber, dar, and volver. 58 

Idioms: volver a (+ infinitive), de vez 
(cuando) en cuando, cosa de, poco mas o 
menos. 59 

\ 

En Venezuela. 59 

VIII. Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs. 63 

Formation of Adverbs. 65 

Verbs: ver, pensar, and traer. 66 

Idioms: en vez (lugar) de, ser aficionado a, 
cuanto antes, tan pronto como sea posible . 66 

En Colombia. 67 

IX. Possessive Adjectives and Pronouns ...... 71 

Verbs: salir, reir, and sentir. 73 

Idioms: dejar de infinitive), en cuanto a, 
de repente. 74 

En Panama. 75 





























CONTENTS 


IX 


EXERCISE PAGE 

X. Demonstrative Adjectives and Pronouns .... 78 

Para and Por. 80 

Verbs: pedir, servir, and vestir. 81 

Idioms: en seguida, al instante, tardar en 

(+ infinitive), a pesar de. 82 

En el Ecuador. 82 

XI. Relative and Interrogative Pronouns, Adjectives 

and Adverbs . 86 

Verbs: seguir, morir, and conocer. 89 

Idioms: echar de menos, dar con, mientras 
tanto, entretanto. 90 

En el Peru. ’ . 91 

XII. Reflexive Verbs. 94 

Mismo. 96 

Passive Voice. 96 

Verbs: acostarse, conducir, and jugar. ... 96 

Idioms: tratarse de', prestar atencion, de buena 
(mala) gana. 97 

En Chile. 98 

XIII. The Subjunctive (I).101 

The Subjunctive in Noun Clauses.101 

Verbs: caer, oir, and valer.103 

Idioms: hacer falta a (uno), valer la pena, 

de antemano.104 

Sequence of Tenses .104 

Atravesando LOS Andes.106 

XIV. The Subjunctive (II) . ..109 

The Subjunctive in Adjective Clauses .109 

The Subjunctive in Adverbial Clauses.110 

The Subjunctive in Conditional Sentences .... Ill 

Verbs: caber, dormir, and enviar.112 

Idioms: deshacerse de, darse cuenta de, 
hacerse cargo de, de proposito.113 

En la Argentina.114 


























X 


CONTENTS 


EXERCISE PAGE 

XV. Infinitives. 117 

Present Participles ... . 119 

Past Participles.120 

. Verbs: huir, asir, and oler.120 

Idioms: hacer efectivo, al contado, al por 
mayor (menor)..121 

En el Uruguay. 121 

Appendix A. Accentuation and Syllabication.127 

Appendix B. Verb Formation . 130 

1. The Regular Conjugations .130 

2. The Compound Tenses.133 

3. The Orthographic-Changing Verbs . . 134 

4. The Radical-Changing Verbs.137 

Appendix C. Reference List of Irregular Verbs .... 139 

Appendix D. List of Verbs Governing the Direct Infini¬ 
tive or Requiring Various Prepositions 142 

Vocabularies, in Synoptic Arrangement . 147 

Index .*..177 















CLASSROOM EXPRESSIONS 


1. Buenos dias, senor profesor. 

2. Buenas tardes, senorita. 

3. Buenas noches, senora. 

4. ^Como esta Vd. ? 

5. Muy bien (bueno), gracias, 

iy Vd.? 

6. Sin novedad. 

7. Adios. 

8. Hasta luego (manana). 

9. Voy a pasar lista. 

10. ^Que leccion tenemos hoy ? 

11. Tenemos la leccion quince. 

12. ^En que pagina ? 

13. iQue linea (renglon) ? 

14. La lectura empieza en la pa¬ 

gina veinte. 

15. Esta es la leccion para ma¬ 

nana. 

16. A1 principio de la pagina. 

17. En el medio de la pagina. 

18. A1 pie de la pagina. 

19. Sirvase Vd. hacerme pre- 

guntas. 

20. Se debe decir. 

21. Abra Vd. el libro. 

22. Cierre Vd. el libro. 

23. Lea Vd. el espanol. 

24. Siga Vd. leyendo. 

25. Principle Vd. la traduccion. 

26. Traduzca Vd. al espanol. 

27. Repitalo Vd. 

28. iComo se dice eso en espanol ? 

29. ^Como se llama esto ? 

30. iQue quiere decir esto ? 

31. No se lo que quiere decir. 

32. Fijese Vd. en eso. 

33. Esta bien. 

84. Esta en el vocabulario. 

35. Pase Vd. a la pizarra (al pi- 

zarron). 

36. No hay tiza. 

37. Aqui esta el cepillo. 

38. Borre Vd. lo escrito. 

39. Corrija Vd. las oraciones, 

40. Copie Vd. el ejercicio. 

41. Escribalo Vd. en el cuademo. 

42. iComo se escribe esa pala- 

bra ? 


Good morning, professor. 

Good afternoon. Miss. 

Good evening. Madam. 

How are you ? 

Very well, thank you. And how 
are you ? 

As usual. 

Goodbye. 

See you later (to-morrow). 

I am going to call the roll. 

What lesson do we have to-day ? 
We have lesson fifteen. 

On what page ? 

What line ? 

The reading begins on page 
twenty. 

This is the lesson for to-morrow. 

At the beginning of the page. 

In the middle of the page. 

At the bottom of the page. 

Please ask me questions. 

You must say. 

Open the book. 

Close the book. 

Read the Spanish. 

Go on reading. 

Begin the translation. 

Translate into Spanish. 

Repeat it. 

How do you say that in Spanish ? 
What is the name of this ? 

What does this mean ? 

I don’t know what it means. 

Pay attention to that. 

All right, it is correct. 

It is in the vocabulary. 

Go to the blackboard. 

There is no chalk. 

Here is the eraser. 

Erase what is written. 

Correct the sentences. 

Copy the exercise. 

Write it in your notebook. 

How is that word written 
(spelled) ? 

:si 


GRAMMATICAL TERMS 


adjetivo m. 
adverbio m. 
complemento m. 
directo 
indirecto 
conjugacion /. 
conjuncion /. 
genero m. 
masculino 
femenino 
neutro 
gerundio m. 
infinitivo m. 
interjeccion /. 
mo do m. 
imperativo 
indicativo 
subjuntivo 

nombre (sustantivo) m. 
numero m. 
singular 
plural 

partes de la oracion /. pi. 
participio pasivo m. 
persona /. 
primera 
segunda 
tercera 
preposicion /. 
pronombre 
demostrativo 
interrogativo 
personal 
posesivo 
relativo 
sujeto m. 
tiempo m. 
condicional 
futuro 
imperfecto 
perfecto 

pluscuamperfecto 

presente 

preterite 

preterite perfecto 
verbo TO. 
auxiliar 
refleidvo 


adjective 

adverb 

object 

direct 

indirect 

conjugation 

conjunction 

gender 

masculine 

feminine 

neuter 

present participle 
infinitive 
interjection 
mood 

imperative 
indicative 
subj unctive 
noun 
number 
singular 
plural 

parts of speech 
past participle 
person 
first 
second 
third 

preposition 

pronoun 

demonstrative 

interrogative 

personal 

possessive 

relative 

subject 

tense 

conditional 

future 

imperfect 

perfect (present perfect) 
pluperfect 
present 
preterite 
past anterior 
verb 

auxiliary 

reflexive 


ALTERNATE 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 



Mapa de America espa:nola 






















































ALTERNATE 

SPANISH KEVIEW GEAMMAR 


EXERCISE r 


The Articles (I) — Haber and Tener 


1. Definite and indefinite articles. — The following is 
the table of definite and indefinite articles: 


Masculine 

Singular Plura.l 
Definite: el los 

Indefinite: un unos^ 


Feminine 

Singular Plural 

la 2 las 

una unas 


Neuter 

Singular 
l0 3 


(a) de + el becomes del {of the, from the) 
a + el becomes al (^o the, at the, etc.) 

2. Agreement. — Articles must agree with their nouns in 
gender and number, and are ordinarily repeated before each 
noun to which they refer. 

Las universidades de los Estados Unidos son grandes. 

The universities of the United States are large. 

El te, el cafe, y la leche estan en la mesa. 

The tea, coffee and milk are on the table. 

El (Un) hombre y la (una) mujer estan en el automovil. 

The (A) man and woman are in the automobile. 


^ For discussion of teaching methods, see Preface. 

2 El is used instead of la before a feminine noun beginning with stressed 
a or ha, unless an adjective intervenes. El agua, the water. 

But: La buena agua, the good water. 

3 The neuter article, lo, is used chiefly before adjectives and past parti¬ 
ciples used as nouns, and occasionally before adverbs. Lo bueno y lo 
malo, good and evil. Lo escrito, what is written. A lo lejos, in the distance. 
See § 26 . 

* The forms unos and unas mean some, a few. Algunos, -as may also 
be so used. j 


3 



4 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


3. Use of the definite article. — The definite article is used 
in Spanish when it is not required in English:^ 

1. Before a noun used in a general or inclusive sense 
(collective and abstract nouns, etc.). 

El hierro es duro. Iron is hard. 

Todo el mundo desea la Everybody desires liberty, 
libertad. 

2. Before infinitives used as verbal nouns. 

El comer es necesario. Eating is necessary. 

A1 encontrarme, me saludo Upon meeting me, he greeted 
cortesmente. me courteously. 

But: Es necesario comer. It is necessary to eat. 

3. Before the names of the days of the week, the seasons, 
and with expressions of time when modified by proximo, 
pasado, etc. 

Saldra de Tampico el lunes. He will leave Tampico on^ 

Monday. 

Llueve mucho en la primavera. It rains much in spring. 

Mi hermano vino la semana My brother came last week, 
pasada. 

4. Before titles ^ preceding proper names, except in direct 
address. 

El general Moreno esta en General Moreno is in Lima. 
Lima. 

El senor Garcia lo dijo. Mr. Garcia said so. 

But: Buenos dias, senor Garcia. Good morning, Mr. Garcia. ^ 

5. Before the names of geographical divisions (continents, 
countries, etc.) when modified by an adjective or adjectival 

1 For the use of the definite article instead of the possessive adjective, 
see § 97; instead of the demonstrative pronoun, see § 111. 

2 For the omission of on before the days of the week, see § 60 , 1, foot¬ 
note 1. 

* The titles don and dona (used before given names only) do not require 
the article before them. Don Roberto y dona Maria estan aqui, Mr. Robert 
and Miss Mary are here. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


5 


phrase. The names of certain countries and cities regularly 
require the article, such as: el Brasil, el Canada, el Peru,^ 
la Coruna. Unmodified names, with the exception of the 
last mentioned group, ordinarily do not require the article. 


La Espana antigua tiene una 
historia interesante. 

But: Espana es interesante. 

Jorge esta en la America del 
Sur. 

El Peru tiene muchas minas 
de plata. 

Salgo de Cuba para Espana. 


Ancient Spain has an interest¬ 
ing history. 

Spain is interesting. 

George is in South America. 

Peru has many silver mines. 

I am leaving Cuba for Spain. 


6. Before the name of a language. However it is not 
used directly after hablar,^ nor ordinarily in phrases begin¬ 
ning with de or en. 


El espanol es un idioma muy 
musical. 

Hablamos espanol en la clase 
de espanol. 

Escribi una carta en espanol. 


Spanish is a very musical 
language. 

We speak Spanish in the 
Spanish class. 

I wrote a Spanish letter. 


7. Before nouns of weight and measure, instead of the 
indefinite article. 

Costo' tres pesos el metro. It cost three dollars a meter. 

Pagare dos pesos la libra. I shall pay two dollars a pound. 


4. Haber, — The verb haber is used: — 

1. As an auxiliary in order to form the compound tenses.® 

He comprado ^ una bicicleta. I have bought a bicycle. 

Habian escrito las cartas. They had written the letters. 

1 Other American countries, the names of which require the article are: 

el Ecuador, las Guayanas, el Paraguay, el Uruguay, (la) Argentina, los 
Estados Unidos. 

2 El Castellano, sometimes used instead of espanol with the meaning of 
Spanish language, requires the article even after hablar. 

3 In compound tenses with haber the past participle does not vary in 
ending. See § 170 . 

^ Note also that, differing from English and French usage, no word may 
come between forms of haber and the past participle, except a personal 



6 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


2. As an impersonal verb {in the third 'person singular 
only) with the meaning of there is, there are, there was, there 
were, etc. The special form hay is used in the present 
indicative. 

Hay cubanos en la clase. There are Cubans in the 

class. 

Habra bastante tiempo ma- There will be plenty of time 
nana. to-morrow. 

5. Tenet. — The verb tener^ ordinarily means to have, in 
the sense of to possess. 

Tuvimos muchos libros. We had many books. 

I Tiene Vd. mi paraguas ? Have you my umbrella? 

VERBS2 

6. Haber, to have 

Pres. Part, habiendo; Past Part, habido. 

Pres. Ind. he,^ has, ha, hemos, habeis, han. 

Pres. Subj. haya, hayas, haya, hayamos, hayais, hayan. 

Impf. Ind. habia, etc.; Put. Ind. habre, etc.; Cond. habria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. hube, hubiste, hubo, hubimos, hubisteis, hubieron. 
Impf. Subjs. hubiese, etc. ; hubiera, etc. ; Put. Subj. hubiere, etc. 

7. Tener, to have 

Pres. Part, teniendo; Past Part, tenido. 

Pres. Ind. tengo, tienes, tiene, tenemos, teneis, tienen. 

pronoun object when used after the infinitive or present participle of 
haber. No he leido nunca la re vista, I have never read the magazine. Ha- 
biendonos visto, salio, Having seen us, he went out. 

1 Tener may be followed by the past participle used adjectively to 
indicate a state or condition of affairs, rather than an action. Tengo 
abierta la ventana, I have the window open (condition). But: He abierto 
la ventana, I have opened the window (action). 

2 For rules of verb formation, see Supplement to Exercise I, and 
Appendix B. 

3 Note that the infinitives and the irregular forms are in black-faced 
type. _ 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


7 


Pres. Subj. tenga, tengas, tenga, tengamos, tengais, tengan. 
Impf. Ind. tenia, ete.; Put. Ind. tendre, etc.; Cond. tendria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. tuve, tuviste, tuvo, tuvimos, tuvisteis, tuvieron. 
Impf. Subjs. tuviese, etc.; tuviera, etc.; Put. Subj. tuviere, etc. 
Imperatives ten, tened. 


IDIOMS 


8. Haber que ( + infinitive). 

Hay que ir a Mejico. 

9. Tener que ( + infinitive). 
Tengo que escribir una carta. 

10. Tener in other idioms: — 

Tener color ^ To be warm 
Tener frio To be cold 
Tener hambre To be hungry 
Tener sed To be thirsty 
Tener razon To be right 
No tener razon To be wrong 

Tener las manos Mas, etc. 

Tener mucho gusto en 
Tenemos mucho Mo en el 
invierno. 

I Cuantos anos tiene Vd. ? 

Tuvo miedo de caer. 

Tengo los ojos cansados. 

Tuvimos mucho gusto en 
hacerlo. 


To be necessary (used 
impersonally) 

It is necessary to go to Mexico. 

To have to, must 
I have to (must) write a letter. 

To be sleepy 
To be. . .years old 
To be afraid (of) 
To be careful (of) 
To feel like, be 
desirous (of) 

To have cold hands, etc. 

To be very glad to 

We are very cold in winter. 

How old are you.? 

He was afraid of falling. 

My eyes are tired. 

We were very glad to do it. 


Tener sueho 
Tener ...anos 
Tener miedo {de) 
Tener cuidado {de) 
Tener gana{s) {de) 


1 This list of idioms is used with persons and animals but not with 
things. 



8 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


LOS EXPLORADORES ESPANOLES 

La America del Norte y la America del Sur quedaron 
deseonocidas a los europeos hasta los viajes de los explora- 
dores espanoles. El viajar por mar era muy peligroso en 
aquellos dias. A1 salir de los puertos de Espana y al ver a 
5 lo lejos la costa, todo el mundo tenia miedo de lo descono- 
cido. Sin embargo, al volver Cristobal Colon a Espana, 
otros exploradores se decidieron a viajar al oeste en busca 
de oro y de otros tesoros. En el otono del ano siguiente 
volvio a salir de Espana el Almirante Cristobal Colon con 
10 una flota de diecisiete navios. En esta expedicion habia 
doce misioneros, que tenian muchas ganas de propagar la 
fama de la iglesia. Declararon que era necesario ensenar el 
espanol a los indios y convertirlos al cristianismo. En los 
viajes siguientes el Almirante Colon visito varios puntos de 
15 la America Central y de la America del Sur. 

Los exploradores volvieron a Espana con cuentos mas 
maravillosos que los que se habian contado de la Espana 
antigua. El amor de las aventuras y el afan de la riqueza 
impulsaron a muchos al nuevo mundo. Decian que tenian 
20 que conquistar todas aquellas regiones en nombre de los 
reyes de Espana. El Capitan Vasco Nunez de Balboa, al 
avanzar por las aguas del Oceano Pacifico declaro que ane- 
xaba al reino de Espana todas las tierras que aquel mar 
tocase. En la primavera de 1513 Ponce de Leon fue a buscar 
25 en la Florida la fuente de la vida en la cual le habian contado 
que era posible banarse para hacerse joven. 

El Capitan Hernan Cortes, saliendo de Cuba, llego a la 
costa mejicana, donde desembarco el viernes santo, 21 de 
abril de 1519. Pronto comprendio lo maravilloso de aquella 
30 tierra. Con la ayuda de una esclava India, Dona Marina, 
que sabia hablar espanol, gano la amistad de los indios de 
la costa. Hubo que veneer muchos peligros para penetrar 
al interior, del cual habian oido cuentos fabulosos. Durante 
el verano y el otono pasaron los espanoles por muchos reinos 



Hernan Cortes 

















« . ti 



VA‘“\ • Jjl' • '*i'' 

5V 

o, . ^ , , 




i-w 




1 


^■: S' 

. ’ . . ■ •» - . 



.irvi.'’" 



t ■» . • 

• V ■ . % ■ vJ** .« • * s 




L I A* 


'.•V :• 



L*- 


. .;‘-i ' -'■’^ ^ y 

j * i* t ■•“■** • - - * .A.® ,* ." 

‘l ¥A .■> *Ti. .** ' . f^-‘ 'r-fc'^. , V-. >s^ip^ ■*'•••■ 

'Sf^a 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


9 


de indios, y al fin en noviembre entraron en la gran capital 
de los aztecas, Tenochtitlan, donde esta ahora la ciudad de 
Mejico. Al llegar los espanoles, ya los indios tenian buen 
sistema de agricultura, hacian vestidos de algodon y de 
plumas, fabricaban ornamentos maravillosos de oro y de 5 
plata, y aun tenian bibliotecas. 

Algunos afios despues de la conquista de Mejico, Francisco 
Pizarro vencio a los incas del Peru, los cuales ya habian 
alcanzado una civilizacion adelantada. Dentro de unos 
afios los espanoles conquistaron los territories que mas tarde 10 
formaron los paises de Venezuela, Colombia, el Ecuador, 
el Peru, Chile, Bolivia, la Argentina, el Uruguay, y el 
Paraguay. 

A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 

guientes: 

1. Las Americas desconocidas. 2 . El miedo de los via- 
jeros. 3. Cristobal Colon. 4. Los misioneros. 5 . El amor 
de las aventuras. 6. La fuente de la vida. 7. La conquista 
de Mejico. 8. Los espanoles en la America del Sur. 

B. Ponganse articulos donde se necesitan en lugar de las 

rayas: . / 

1. Luis habla - espanol. 2 . — ^ espanol es muy 

musical. 3. Ha escrito una carta en - espanol. 4. Salie- 

ron de-Espana. 5.-Mejico antiguo tiene una 

historia interesante. 6. - viajar ahora no es dificil. 

7. Es necesario- viajar. 8. Viaja^mos por Pern 

y - Chile. 9. Costo un peso — '— metro. 10. - 

amor de —^ aventuras nos hace viajar. 11. —^ verano 
es muy caluroso. 12. -4^ Capitan Hernan Cortes des- 
embarco. 


C. Traduzcase al espanol: 

John Clark and Louis Aliller are seniors in the University. 
John is twenty-five years old; Louis is twenty-one. They studied 












10 SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 

Spanish last year in Professor Navarro’s classes,^ and in the summer 
they traveled in Spain, Italy and France. After the examinations 
they intend to ^ visif Mexico,^ Central America and South America. 
Louis has an uncle and aunt who live in Louisiana, and who speak 
5 Spanish and French fluently. His uncle has offered to pay the 
expenses of Louis’ trip.^^ 




10 live.’ 


'~~LoiJmi^awning and stretching himself). — John, my eyes are 
tired, and I feel like eating ® something. Let’s go and ® buy ^4and- 
wich and a glass of milk. ^^Eating and drinking are necessary to ^ 
Besides, studying in spring isn’t good for ^ the health. 
There will be plenty of time next week before ^ the examinations. 
History is hard and Spanish is easy. 

John. — You always feel like eating, Louis, but we have to 
study now. It isn’t easy to know Spanish well. History is hard, 
15 but it is interesting, especially Mexican history. Haven’t you 
read General Lew Wallace’s novel. The Fair^God? It is the story 
of Captain Hernan Cortes, who through "Jove of adventures and 
money conquered ^ King Montezuma and the ^ Aztecs. 

Louis. — You talk like Mr. Henderson, my history professor.® 
I have had too much history in times past; I want to learn 
Spanish now. Besides, next summer, upon our arrival in ' 
Mexico we shall have to-read history and visit old ruins every 
day. 

John. — You know Spanish pretty well already. Didn’t you 
25 have private lessons all last summer on Tuesdays and Thursdays ? 
Louis. — Yes, that is true, and I paid two dollars a lesson. 
However, I didn’t learn much because I had to play footba^ll jn 
the afternoons and go to the movies in the evenings. ' 

i y 

D. Haganse oraciones con les frases siguientes: 


20 




u 



1. tener cuidado de. 2. a lo lejos. 3. al volver. 4. otra vez. 
5. hay. 6. en la primavera. 7. pronto. 8. al fin. 9. el ano 
pasado. 10. el comer. 


the classes of Professor Navarro. ^ No preposition. ^ gge §38. ^ pay 

to Louis his trip expenses. ^ Infinitive. ® Vamos a. ^ para. ® antes de. 
® professor of history. al llegar nosotros a. pague. ja. al. 
por. 







AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


11 


Los verbos irregulares haber y 
Traduzcanse: 

' ,|V . TU. 


tenery y los modismos. 


It twill be necessary to talk. 2. ydb were right. 3. They 

lilrfi crriintT /L T'tioiT- ciTf» Viiinrfr-iT- ^ trk ^ 




will^ot feel like going. 4. They are hungry. 5. They have to 
eat. 6. He is ten years ol(^. 7. They have been afraid.' 8^ Had vou ^ 
read the history ? 9. I B3fusf‘learn the lesson. 10. 
be tired. 11. You #ould not be careful. 12. We were very glad 
to buy something. 13. I shall not be sleepy. 14. They were 








12 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


SUPPLEMENT TO EXERCISE I (VERB 
FORMATION) 

A. RADICAL-CHANGING VERBS 
Class I {-ar and ~er verbs) 

Stressed Syllable 

. f Pres. Ind. 1st, 2d, 3rd sing., 3rd pi. 
e >ie I Subj. 1st, 2d, 3rd sing., 3rd pi. 

o >ue 1^ Imperative 2d sing. 

Typical verbs: pensar — pienso, etc.; contar — cuento, etc.; perdei 
— pierdo, etc.; volver — vuelvo, etc. 

(a) Initial o>ue>hue: oler — huelo, etc. 

Initial e>ie>ye: errar — yerro, etc. 

Class II (-zr verbs) 


Stressed Syllable 
{Same changes as in Class I) 
Pres. Ind. 1st, 2d, 3rd 
sing., 3rd pi. 

Pres. Subj. 1st, 2d, 
3rd sing., 3rd pi. 

I Imperative 2d sing. 


e >ie 
o >ue 


e >1 
0 >u 


Typical verbs: sentir — siento, etc. 
sentir — sintiendo, etc.; dormir — durmiendo, etc. 


Unstressed Syllable 
Pres. Part. 

Pres. Subj. 1st, 2d pi. 
Pret. Ind. 3rd sing., 
3rd pi. 

-se Impf. Subj. 1 all 
-raimpf. Subj. > six 
Put. Subj. J forms 
dormir — duermo, etc.*. 


Class III (- 

Stressed Syllable 
(Same forms changed as in 
Class 7, hut the charige is different) 
Pres. Ind. 1st, 2d, 3rd 
sing., 3rd pi. 

e >i Pres. Subj. 1st, 2d, 
3rd sing., 3rd pi. 
Imperative 2d sing. 
Typical verb: pedir — pido, etc.; 


zr verbs) 

Unstressed Syllable 
Pres. Part. 

Pres. Subj. 1st, 2d pi. 
Pret. Ind. 3rd sing., 
3rd pi. 

e >i -se Impf. Subj. 1 all 
-ra Impf. Subj. [ six 
Put. Subj. j forms 
pedir — pidiendo, etc. 






AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


13 


B. ORTHOGRAPHIC-CHANGING VERBS 

L Changes which preserve the consonantal sound found in 
the infinitive. 1 


1. Before e (o/ ending) 

-car Oqu Pret. Ind. 1st sing, 

“gar g>gu 

-guar gu>gu Pres. Subj. 

-zar z > c 



2. Before a or o {of ending) 

ing. 

ing. 



Typical verbs: (1) tocar — toque, etc.; pagar — pague, etc.; 
averiguar — averigiie, etc.; gozar — goce, etc.; (2) veneer — venzo, 
etc.; esparcir — esparzo, etc.; conocer — conozco, etc.; lucir — luzco, 
etc.; coger — cojo, etc.; dirigir — dirijo, etc.; distinguir — distingo, 
etc.; delinquir — delinco, etc. 

II. Y and I changes. 

1. In -uir verbs (not -guir and -quir) y is inserted at the 
end of the stem. (In 1st, 2d, 3rd sing., 3rd pi. of the Pres. 
Ind. and Pres. Subj., and in the Imperative 2d sing.). Huir — 
huyo, etc. 

2. The i of the regular endings -ie and -io becomes y when the 
stem of the verb ends in a . vowel. (In Pres. Part., 3rd sing., 
3rd pi. Pret. and all of the forms of the -se Impf. Subj., -ra 
Impf. Subj., and Put. Subj.). Leer — leyendo, etc. (But 
-ii becomes i. Reir — riendo, etc.). 

3. The i of the regular ending is lost when the stem ends in 
11, n, and j. (In Pret. Ind. 3rd sing., 3rd pi. and all forms of 
the -se Impf. Subj., -ra Impf. Subj., and Put. Subj. Also^ 
in 11 and n verbs in Pres. Part.) Bullir — bulleron, etc.; renir 
— rineron, etc.; decir — dijeron, etc. 


1 With the exception of the c — zc group. 



14 



SPAN^H REVIEW GRAMMAR 

C. DRILL ON VERB FORMS 

Radical Changes 

The following verbs are used in the exercise below: pensar, think ;i con- 
tar, count; perder, lose; Volver, return; sentir, feel; dormir, sleep; pedir, 
ask. Translate into Spanish:^ / ^ ^ 


1, He feels. 2. TKfey askeo. 3, Glet khem sleep ifpres. subj.). 
4''^We count, a. That they return subj.). 6. She is 

^^>>*losing. 7. Letu^nmk (presitubj.). 8. She felt. 9. That they 



might ask (impf. subj.). 


He' slept. 


think 
14. Let him 


That you (pi.) may 
.peralive sing.). 



(jjdA 


{pres. pub§.}. i telt. W 

16., You (p/.'k fdt. 

17. Let ^ Al^^p,‘^(pre5.^ |^. 49. She thiii^^' 

20. ^That I may icsk 21 . It^e. 22 . That they 

rhight sleep {impf^ subj,).. .23. You Tbturn.. 24. I cb^lnt. 
25. That I migh^^^e? (tm^. subj.). 26. Relum.y 27.,, I thinjr. ' 
28. That tEey may lose {pres, sjildi). ^9. That he-'ifefay le^l {pres, 
subj.). slept. 31. Let hi 46tiifn {pr 

{pi.) count. 33. I^e lose. 34. We think. J 




wQJi 



wes. subj.). 32. You 

k- . 


T ^ 




j 


¥ 


Orthographic Change^d^"^ 

1. The following verbs are us^ in^he exerc^ below: tocar, touch; 
pagar, pay; averiguar, ascertain;/' gozar, enjoy; veneer, conquer; esparcir, 
scatter; conocer, know; lucir, slyine; coger, catch; dirigir, direct; distinguir, 
distinguish; 6.e\inqmr, transgress. , Translate into Spanish: r 

1. I ascertain. 2. Lht ihern ^catter {pres. /subj.). That I 
' ’ 'may pay {pres. subj.). 4. He co^Uer^. 5. Let enjoy {pres. subj.). 
f touched. 7.^ That it may shine {pres. j subj.). 8. I knowM^ 

9. ThaJ^^^ipay conquer (pre5. 5 w 5J.). 10. Tney transgress. 11. J 
'es. sptbj.)' 12. AV^'^mh.'l.ilS. ^ I asfert^ed. , 

_ IdiMJ^MG. ip|f^47l W^toueh." 18. That 

^^may catch {pre^ scatter. 20. We direct. ^21. I 

^enjoyed. 22. She^^Mstm^tsnl^. 23. That'we niay'kriow tjpres. 
subj.). K 24. , I ^conquer, p 25. Tl^ Enjoyed. 26. I ,,c,aught. 

27. They l:iiow. 28. Yoii^ ‘Mattered. 29. We ascertain. 

30. You direct. 31. E distinguished. 32. That they may pay-^ 
{pres. subj.). 33. Let us touch (pre5. subj.). 34. We enjoy. 

A \ M/.-’ j / y V'. ■ 


him distin^ui'sM^j 
A lA'-HH: shines. M5. 






"(YVfL' 




15 



->. 


35. Let them know {^pres. suhj.). 36. Th^ 
{pres, subj.). 37. luet us ^irect^ (^^res^ubj .). 


:now {pres. subj.). 


Th^t they may ascertain 


38. 


We cpnquer 

- 


II. The following verbs are used in the exercise below: hufr, ^ee; leer, 



I. Present indicative. 


1. When the first person singular present indicative has a con¬ 
sonantal change in the stem (also, with dar and saber), the 
remaining forms of the tense are regular. 

Hacer — hago, haces, hace, hacemos, haceis, hacen. 


(a) The following verbs are' exceptions: decir, oir, tener, 
venir. 

2. The first and second persons plural of 'the present indica¬ 
tive are regular in all verbs except ser — somos, sois; ir — 
vamos, vais; haber — hemos. * 

II. Present subjunctive. 

When the first person singular present indicative of any verb 
has a consonantal change in the stem, the present subjunctive 
has the same change in all six forms. 

Hacer — haga, hagas, haga, hagamos, hagais, hagan. 

III. Imperative. ^ 

1. The imperative singular is the same as the third person 
singular present indicative. The following verbs are excep- 



16 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


tions: poner — pon; salir — sal; tener — ten; venir —ven; 
valer — val(e); hacer — haz; decir — di; ir — ve; ser — se. 

2. The imperative plural may be obtained by changing the 
-r of the infinitive ending to -d. Venir — venid. (No 
exceptions,) 

IV. Imperfect indicative. 

This tense is regular in all verbs except ser — era, etc.; 
ir — iba, etc.; ver — veia, etc. ^ 

V. Future and conditional indicative. 

These tenses are regular in most verbs. The verbs which 
are irregular in these tenses are: 

1. Those that lose the vowel of the infinitive ending: 

haber — habre, habria; caber — cabre, cabria; poder — 
podre, podria; querer — querre, querria; saber — sabre, 
sabria. 

2. Those that lose the vowel of the infinitive ending and 
insert d; poner — pondre, pondria; salir — saldre, saldria; 
tener — tendre, tendria; valer — valdre, valdria; venir — 
vendre, vendria. 

3. Two verbs: decir — dire, diria; hacer — hare, haria. 

VI. Preterite indicative. 

All six forms of this tense are irregular in the following 
verbs: 

1. Verbs in -ar: andar — anduve; dar — di; estar — 
estuve. 

2. Verbs in -er: caber — cupe; haber — hube; hacer — 
hice; poder — pude; poner — puse; querer — quise; saber — 
supe; tener — tuve; ser — fui. 

3. Verbs in -ir; decir — dije; (-)ducir — (-)duje; venir — 
vine; ir — fui.i 


1 With the exception of the verbs dar, ser and ir, all the verbs having 
irregular preterites have an unstressed -e in the first person singular and 
an unstressed -o in the third person singular. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


17 


VII. -se and -ra imperfect subjunctive and future subjunctive. 

These tenses may be obtained by adding to the stem of 
the third person^ingular o:^ plural of the preterite the following 
endings: -se Impf., -iese, etc.; -ra Impf., -iera, etc. Put., 
-iere, etc. Example: quiso, quis-iese, etc. 

(a) Exceptions without -i in the ending: decir — dijese, 
etc.; (-)ducir — (-)dujese, etc.; traer — trajese, etc.; ser — 
fuese, etc.; ir — fuese, etc. 

VIII. Past participle. 

1. Verbs in -ir and -er which are irregular in the past 
participle only : abrir — abierto; cubrir — cubierto; escribir — 
escrito; imprimir — impreso; prender — preso; romper — 
roto. 

2. Other verbs having irregular past participles: decir — 
dicho; hacer — hecho; morir — muerto; poner — puesto; 
solver — suelto; ver — visto; volver — vuelto. 


EXERCISE II 


The Articles (II) — Ser and Estar 

11. Articles not required. — The definite and indefinite 
articles are not required before nouns in parenthetical 
apposition.^ 

Lima, capital del Peru. Lima, the capital of Peru. 

Alfonso X, rey de Espana. Alfonso X, the (a) king of 

Spain, 

12. The indefinite article is not required: — 

1. Before an unmodified predicate noun expressing 
nationality, occupation, profession, etc. 

No es cubano, es mejicano. He is not a Cuban, he is a 

Mexican. 

Soy medico, no soy ingeniero. I am a doctor, I am not an 

engineer. 

But: Es unbuenmedico {modified). He is a good doctor. 

2. Before ciento, a {one) hundred, mil, a {one) thousand, 
otro, another, cierto, a certain, after que, what a, in excla¬ 
mations, and after tal, such a. 

Mil ciento veinte. One thousand one hundred 

and twenty. 

i Que caballo hermoso ! What a beautiful horse ! 

Tal cosa me sorprenderia. Such a thing would surprise 

me. 


13. Ser, — Uses of the verb ser ^: — 


1 The definite article is used, nevertheless, with nouns in apposition, 
when they are used for the sake of identification. Mi hermano, el medico, 
ha llegado, My brother, the doctor, has arrived. 

2 por the use of ser in the passive voice, see § 133 . 

18 



SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


19 


1. With adjectives to express an inherent or characteristic 
quality (including age, appearance, character, and financial 
condition), 

Aquel senor es viejo. That gentleman is old. 

La nina es bonita. The girl is pretty. 

Estos hombres son buenos, These men are good, but 
pero no son ricos. they are not rich. 


2. With a predicate 

Era carpintero. 

Es ella. 


noun or pronoun. 

He was a carpenter. 
It is she. 


3. In impersonal expressions. 

Es verdad. It is true. 

Es necesario hablar despacio. It is necessary to speak 

slowly. 


4. To express origin, ownership, and material. 


Los comerciantes son de Pa¬ 
nama. 

La guitarra es de mi prima. 
Las corbatas eran de seda. 


The merchants are from 
Panama. 

The guitar is my cousin’s. 
The neckties were silk. 


5. To express the time of day. 

I Que hora es ? — Son las tres. What time is it ? It is three 

o’clock. 


14. Estar. — Uses of the verb estar: — 

1. With adjectives to express a temporary state or 
condition.^ 


i Como esta Vd.?—Estoy 
bueno,2 gracias. 

La taza estaba llena. 

El agua esta fria. 

But: El hielo es frio. 


How are you ? I am well, 
thank you. 

The cup was full. 

The water is {tem'porarily) 
cold. 

The ice is {inherently) cold. 


1 Certain adjectives have one meaning when used with ser, and another 
‘meaning when used with estar. Esta bueno, he is well; es bueno, he is 
good. Esta malo, he is ill; es malo, he is had. Esta cansado, he is tired; 
es cansado, he is tiresome. 

2 Bien may also be used, especially in the expression muy bien. 



20 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


2. To express location (permanent as well as temporary), 

Mi casa esta en el campo. My house is in the country. 

Sus hermanos estuvieron en His brothers were in the 
la tienda. store. 

3. With the present participle to express continued or 
progressive action. 

Nuestra hermana estuvo estudiando toda la tarde. 

Our sister was (or kept) studying all the afternoon. 

4. With the past participle used as an adjective to 
express a state or condition of affairs, rather than an action. 
In this usage the past participle varies for gender and 
number. 

Las puertas estan cerradas. *The doors are closed.^ 
VERBS 

15. Ser, to be 
Pres. Part, siendo; Past Part. sido. 

Pres. Ind. soy, eres, es, somos, sois, son. 

Pres. Subj. sea, seas, sea, seamos, seais, sean. 

Impf. Ind. era, eras, era, eramos, erais, eran. 

Put. Ind. sere, etc.; Cond. seria, etc. 

Pret. Ind. fm, fuiste, fue, fuimos, fuisteis, fueron. 

Impf. Subjs. fuese, etc.; fuera, etc.; Fut. Subj. fuere, etc. 
Imperatives se, sed. 

16. Estar, to be 
Tres. Part, estando; Past Part, estado. 

Pres. Ind. estoy, estas, esta, estamos, estais, estan. 
PREa^sSuBj. este, estes, este, estemos, esteis, esten. 

Imrf. IKp. estaba, etc.; Fut. Ind. estare, etc.; Cond. estaria, 
etc. \ f 

Pret. lND.\estuve, estuviste, estuvo, estuvimos, estuvisteis, 

estuvieron/'^.^_ .— —- ^^ 

Impf. Subjs. estuviese, etc.; estuviera, etc.; Fut. Subj. 

estuviere, etc. 

Imperatives esta, estad. 





AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


21 


IDIOMS 


17. Acabar de { infinitive) ^ 
Acaban de comprar imas flores. 

18. Tratar de {-\- infinitive) 

Trataban de aprender los modis- 
mos. 

19. Cerca de 
Estuvimos cerca de la puerta. 


To have just ( + past par¬ 
ticiple) 

They have just bought some 
flowers. 

To try to 

They were trying to learn the 
idioms. 

Near 

We were near the door. 


LA CIVILIZACION ANTIGUA DE MEJICO 

Hay en Mejico muchas ruinas antiguas de edades an- 
teriores a la epoca de los conquistadores espafioles. Las 
piramides son los monumentos mas notables de otra edad. 
Las piramides mas famosas son la del Sol y la de la Luna, 
que estan cerca del pueblo de San Juan Teotihuacan, no 5 
muy distante de la ciudad de Mejico. Son niuy grandes, y 
la del Sol tiene mas de doscientos pies de altura. Es dificil 
saber quienes las construyeron, pero es evidente que no - 
fueron los aztecas, porque son de una epoca mas antigua. 
Eran maravillosos aquellos arquitectos antiguos. Gerca de lo 
estas piramides hay mas de otros cien monteiles de ruinas, 
entre las cuales esta cierto tCmplo del dios Quetzalcoatl, 
nombre que significa « serpiente adornada de plumas ». 

La mayqr parte de un lado de este templo esta todavia casi 
entera. Segun las leyendas, Quetzalcoatl es el que dio a los 15 
indios las artes ylas ciencias. Todo el tiempo los mejicanos 
estan explorando las ruinas y estan descubriendo objetos 
de gran valor historico. Algunos son de piedra-o barro, y 
otros son de plata. Ya esta reconstituida cierta parte de 
las ruinas. Han tratado de hacerlo segun el plan original. 20 


1 This use of acabar is restricted to the present and imperfect tenses. 




22 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


En el Museo Nacional de la ciudad de Mejico esta la 
famosa Piedra del Sol, calendario azteca. Es una prueba 
visible de que los antiguos eran muy buenos astronomos. 

El ano estaba dividido en dieciocho meses, cada mes era 
5 de cuatro semanas, y cada semana era de cinco dias. Se 
conoce que su numeracion es de un sistema basado en el 
cuerpo humano. El numero usado para expresar cinco sig- 
nifica « mano cerrada », es decir, los cinco dedos. Tenian un 
mes de veinte dias, es decir, el numero de todos los dedos 
10 de las manos y los pies. A1 fin del ano tenian cinco dias 
llamados « inutiles », dias en que no trabajaban. No cabe 
duda de que su calendario es mas exacto que el de los euro- ^ 
peos en la epoca de la conquista. Tenian tambien otro ano —^ 
de 584 dias, ano basado en la revolucion sinodicarde^enus. 

15 Sesenta y cinco anos^venusianos corresponden exactamente 
a ciento cuatro anos del sol. Su siglo era de ciento cuatro 
anos. i Que ciencia maravillosa es la de aquellos astronomos ! 
i Que lastima que los conquistadores hayan destruido las 
.bibliotecas de los indios ! Los mayas^de Yucatan y Guate- 
20 mala tienen escrita su historia desde mas. de mil quinientos 
anos antes de la conquista. 

Muy cerca de la ciudad de Mejico acaban de descubrir en 
anos recientes unos restos de varias civilizaciones muy 
antiguos sepultados debajo de una capa de lava como lo ha 
25 estado la ciudad de Pompeii en Italia. Aunque tal idea 
sorprendera a muchos, es evidente que mas de mil anos antes 
de la era cristiana habia en el valle de Mejico una civilizacion 
bast ante adelantada. 


A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 
guientes: 

1. Las piramides de Mejico. 2. El templo de Quetzal- 
coat 1. 3. El calendario de piedra. 4. Los meses del 
ano. 5. Los dias inutiles. 6. El ano venusiano. 7. La his¬ 
toria de los may as. 8. Las civilizaciones debajo de la lava. 





bAiciisARio kinu a ?mM oci $ai. 
I - m tx^ms m mmmm% m aM m 

I Ai ^aijitjeASStiAJiiVttAeigif ii mm 
I c«?cfiSA&s m u nj^ is*At^ m mu unui. 
I rm stsc«»ts un wsuattrs rceiactss 
I »csws Ai Pit 0E u t^mt mmmiht sc u 
I cifetcssAi pm tt oac n. i*<«(E:NTc 
I St pmti tsfi A R St tmti ASS a cstt mm 






La Piedra del Sol 




















J 



\ 



La Pikamide dcl Sol 














































AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


23 


B. Completense las oraji^nes siguientes con el verbo con- 
veniente, sW o estar^ en los tiempos siguientes del in-” 
dicativo: (a) presente; (b) preterite; (c) future: 

Juan y Luis — ^ sent ados. 2. La vent ana 


1 . 




abiert^. 
liora — 


Mi liermano 
5. Yo no 


/ 


trabajando todo el dia. 
primes y yo —contentos. 

10. Siempre buseando algo. 


y yo 

- rieo. 

7. Yo 

9. (J Donde 


mMicos. 4. (j Que 


6^L os earpinteros 


en 


casa. 8. Mis 
los ninos ? 


C. Traduzcase al espapol: 








John and Louis have'^passed their spring examin^ions an d%r*e^ ^ 
now travelingjii the south of thf^United States/,./Th^ Lave traveled f “ 
already^about’^a thousand iXifesA^hey ar-^'^ealed hi a train 
has just l^ft ^ San Antoni^ ^^‘^uferesting city in 2JTe:^as. They 
are^^ing to Galveston. lipSti krfivfkg in ^hat my they will take 
a boat to ^ Vera Cruz, 


an important 1 j^ft of Mexico. It is five 


Louis is seated near the window. 


He 


A^i\ 


ifig 'a Terrj^\gmde/’^ok ).—wondertu 
is ! It is inter^iy^^ j(o ^thdy such an teciefit 10 
Terry says rnar’scientists^^rh^^ working in its ruins 


15 


o’clock in ^ the afternoon, 
warm and is tr^n^j:p sle< 

j0HN^(zc/?0 IS r 

^ountn^‘"idfexico 
O^biv^ization 

and are .diseoyermg'' e^rjMay objects of historical value 
• r are of st^imand ® cla^^iitthere ^e others which ^are of gold and ^ 

■ silver. Don’t you want to read this descrip^Toil of the National 
j Museum, Louis ? ^ 

Louis. — j- Many /fehanks, my friend, ® but Ij prjfefer to sleep. 

^JL ^^Tvaveling ^Aailroad in summer isn’^^eafi'M^ I am always warm 
and mitsty, but I am afraSiB^'^'rfrinjfthe water on ^ the Train. My 
uncle, who i^ doctor, says i^"^ cold, but usually it is not^good. 

JoHisr. — Ynun uncle is not a good doctor if he says such-^Miing! 20 
The watems'^gob^Ckbd all doctors say that it is good ^ for ^ the 
health |;q drink it a great deal./^Y^ are warm because the window 
near yoCrHs closed, j Why don’^ you"open it Then you .would 
to sleep, and I cj^!aYe^^in peace. ^ 

Louis. — You are Mways ^ajlb'gr i W course before reaching * 2.' 




r'u 




South America you J^ave to know everything about ^ Venezuela, C 


ir 


1 salir de. 2 de. ^ a. ^ para. ^ Insert de. ^ dmigo mio. ^ Masculine, 
llegar a. \ 


V 













24 ^ i SPAN^H REVimW GRAMAIAR 

Colombia, Ecuador^teru, Chile^^rgentina^^AJruguay and the 
other countries. 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

1. es dificil. 2. buen medico. 3. cerca de. 4. es interesante. 
5. de plata. 6. el agua. 7. tener anos. 8. agua buena. 

E. Los verbos irregulares ser y estar^ y los modismos. Tra- 

duzcanse: 

Si m was near the window. 2. The windows were not clo^d. 
3. They nad just seen the houses. 4. It was true. 5. It would 
be necessary to write. 6. I am trying to^be good. 7. The water 
'2^ill be cold. 8. They hav^^een in Mexico. 9. Shall yocHbe 
ynear the library ? 10. I have just discovered the flowers. 11. I 

r shall be studving. 12. It is fo'fir o’dock. 13. I a4n from IV^xico. 
14. He used be an A^nmn^er. 15. They will try to'^^^rome. 
16. We have just been in thp city. 17. You will be near our 
friends. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


25 


EXERCISE III 

Plural of Nouns — Inflection, Agreement, and Position 
of Adjectives 

20. Plural of nouns.^ — 1. Nouns ending .in unstressed 
vowels add -s. 

Casa {house) —casas {houses) cuarto {room) —cuartos {rooms). 

2. Nouns ending in consonants, and in y, commonly add 

-es. 

Vapor {steamer) —vapores {steamers); ley {law) —leyes {laws). 

(а) Final z becomes c, and final c becomes qu^ in form¬ 
ing the plural. 

Vez {time) —veces {times); frac {dress coat) —fraques {dress coats). 

(б) Nouns ending in unstressed -es and -is, also com¬ 
pounds in -s, do not change. 

Jueves ( Thursday) — jueves ( Thursdays) ; sinopsis {synopsis) — 
sinopsis {synopses); paraguas {umbrella) —paraguas {umbrellas). 

21. Plural of adjectives. — Adjectives form their plural 
the same as nouns. 

Bueno — buenos, good; facil — faciles, easy; andaluz — andaluces, 

Andalusian. 

22. Feminine of adjectives. — 1. Adjectives which end 
in -0 in the masculine singular change -o to -a to form the 
feminine. 

Bueno — buena, good; bianco — blanca, white. 


1 The plural of certain masculine nouns may include both genders. 
Los hermanos, the brothers, or the brother{s) and sister{s) ; los padres, the 
fathers or the parents; los reyes, the kings or the king{s) and queen{s), 

2 This consonantal change is made to preserve the smnd. 



26 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


2. Adjectives which do not end in -o in the masculine 
(i.e., those which end in -e or a consonant) remain unchanged 
in the feminine. 

Fuerte — fuerte, strong; azul — azul, blue. 

(a) Adjectives of nationality which end in a co nsonant , 
and other adjectives which end in -an, -on, and -or (not 
comparative), add -a to the masculine to form the feminine. 

Espanol — espanola, Spanish; holgazan ^—holgazana, lazy; pre- 
gunton ^ — preguntona, inquisitive; hablador — habladora, talkative. 
But: mejor m.—mejor/., better. 

23. Adjectives, and past participles used adjectively, agree 
in gender and number with the nouns to which they refer. 

Los cuadros hermosos. The beautiful pictures. 

Los libros escritos en espanol. The books written in Spanish. 

Las casas son pequenas. The houses are small. 


24. Position of adjectives. — There is considerable free¬ 
dom in the sentence position of adjectives. A descriptive 
adjective follows its noun, if it distinguishes one object 
from others of its kind; it precedes, if it denotes an inherent 
quality. 

1. After their nouns .— Adjectives of nationality, long 
adjectives, adjectives modified by adverbs, and past parti¬ 
ciples used as adjectives most commonly follow their nouns.^ 


Las frutas cubanas. 

Un nino holgazan. 

Un hombre muy fuerte. 
Una ventana abierta. 


The Cuban fruits. 

A lazy child. 

A very strong man. 
An open window. 




2. Before or after their nouns. — Certain adjectives may 
precede or follow their nouns. They follow when they 


1 For the treatment of the written accent, see Appendix A. 

2 If two or more adjectives follow a noun, y, and, is placed between the 
final two. Una leccion larga y dificil, a long, difficult lesson. 

3 For the sentence position of superlative forms, see § 82, footnote 2. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 27 


have their literal meaning; they precede when they express 


inherent qualities or are used 

After 

El nino pobre, the 'poor (not 
rich) child. 

Un hombre grande, a lafge man. 

La casa blanca, the white house. 

Una noticia cierta, a reliable 
piece of news. 


in a figurative sense. 

Before 

El pobre nino, the poor (to be 
pitied) child. 

Un gran hombre, a great man. 
La blanca nieve, the white 
snow. 

Cierta ciudad, a certain city. 


25. Apocopation of adjectives.^ — The following adjec¬ 
tives drop their final -o when they precede a masculine 
noun or adjective in-the singular: bueno, malo, uno, alguno, 
ninguno, primero, tercero, and postrero. 

El buen muchacho, the good hoy; algun dia, some day; ningun otro 
iapiz, no other pencil. 


26. Adjectives are often used as nouns: — 

El cojo, the lame man; la joven, the young woman; los pobres, the 
poor people; el grande y el pequeno, the large one ^ and the small one 
lo bueno y lo malo, good and evil. 


VERBS 

27. Hacer, to make, do 

PuES. Part, haciendo; Past Part, hecho. 

Pres. Ind. hago, haces, hace, hacemos, haceis, hacen. 

Pres. Subj. haga, hagas, haga, hagamos, hagais, hagan. 

1 (a) Grande usually becomes gran before a singular noun of either 
gender, the full form grande being occasionally retained for oratorical 
effect. El gran capitan, the great captain. But: Una grande desgracia, 
a great misfortune, (b) Santo becomes San before a masculine name, 
unless the name begins with To or Do; San Juan; San Antonio; San 
Francisco. But: Santo Domingo, (c) Ciento becomes cien before the 
noun it modifies, even if an adjective intervenes. However ciento is used 
in numerals above one hundred. Cien buenos automoviles, one hundred 
good automobiles. But: Ciento quince estudiantes, one hundred and fifteen 
students. 

2 The. English word one in the above use is not expressed in Spanish. 



28 


SPANISH. REVIEW GRAMMAR 


Impf. Ind. hacia, etc.; Fut. Ind. hare, etc.; Cond. haria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. hice, hiciste, hizo, hicimos, hicisteis, hicieron. 
Impf. Subjs. hiciese, etc.; hiciera, etc.; Fut. Subj. hiciere, etc. 
Imperatives haz, haced. 


28. Decir, to say 

Pres. Part, diciendo; Past Part, dicho. 

Pres. Ind. digo, dices, dice, decimos, decis, dicen. 

Pres. Subj. diga, digas, diga, digamos, digais, digan. 

Impf. Ind. decia, etc.; Fut. Ind. dire, etc.; Cond. diria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. dije, dijiste, dijo, dijimos, dijisteis, dijeron. 
Impf. Subjs. dijese, etc.; dijera, etc.; Fut. Subj. dijere, etc. 
Imperatives di, decid. 


29. 


IDIOMS 


I Hag a Vd. el favor de { + infinitive) 
[ Hagan Vds. 

{ Tenga Vd. la bondad de ( + infinitive) 
I Tengan Vds. 

J Sir vase Vd. ( + infinitive) 

1 Sirvanse Vds. 


Please 


Haga Vd. el favor de or Tenga Please open the door. 
Vd. la bondad de or Sirvase Vd. 
abrir la puerta. 


30. Hacer ( + period of time) {Period of time) ago 
Hace ocho dias. A week ago. 


{Invisible phenomena) 

31. Hacer calor, to be warm Hacer viento, to be windy 
Hacer frio, to be cold Hacer buen {mat) tiempo, 
Hacer fresco, to be cool to be good (bad) weather 

Hace frio, it is cold. Hacia viento, it was ’ windy. 

{Visible phenomena) 

32. Haber polvo, to he dusty Haber to be moonlight 

Hay polvo, it is dusty. Habra luna, it will be moonlight. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 29 

(Hacer or haber) 

33. Hacer or haber sol To be sunny, the sun is 

shining 

Hacia (habia) sol. It was sunny (The sun was 

shining). 

EL DIARIO DE UN VIAJERO EN MEJICO 

Ciudad de Mejico, 
8 de julio de 19—. 

Hace dos dias que llegue a esta hermosa ciudad, capital 
del pais, despues de una travesia desagradable del Golfo de 
Mejico hasta Vera Cruz y una jornada encantadora en el 
tren hasta la ciudad de Mejico. Hacia tanto viento en el 
golfo que el senor Valdes, capitan del vapor, tenia miedo 
de no poder llegar al puerto. En Vera Cruz hacia tanto calor 
que no quise permanecer alii ni siquiera el dia de mi llegada. 
Cierto amigo me habia dicho que en las montanas del in¬ 
terior hace fresco aun en el verano, y desde el tren vi la 
blanca nieve de las montanas mas alt as. Aqui en esta 
ciudad no hay nieve, y todo es agradable. 

Estoy escribiendo esta tarde sentado cerca de una de 
las vent anas grandes de mi cuarto. Muchas veces miro 
por las ventanas abiertas, porque hay escenas interesantes 
en la calle. En mi primer paseo por la ciudad fui por l a Ala- 
meda, parque muy atractivo con sus fuentes hermosas, sus 
ar botes magnificos, y una estatua grande del gran patriot a, 
Benito Juarez. Esta estatua fue puesta alii al celebrar en 
1910 cien anos de independencia. Muchas leyes mejicanas ex- 
presan las ideas de Juarez. Ningun otro hombre ha conocido 
tan bien su patria. 

Cuando miraba la estatua de Juarez, una nina pobre se 
acerco diciendome — « Senor, tenga la bondad de comprar 
mis flores. Tengo flores encarnadas, blancas, y azules; ^ no 
quiere Vd. algunas ? » — Las flores eran tan preciosas que 


5 

10 

15 

20 

25 




30 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


con mucho gusto compre a la pobre nina todas las mejores. 
Algun dia tengo que ir a Xochimilco, pueblo indio proximo 
a la ciudad, de donde envian muchas flores a la capital. Me 
dijo un amigo mejicano que es otra Venecia, donde cada 
5 dia los indios adornan las gondolas con flores frescas. \ Que 
vista maravillosa sera la que se descubra al navegar entre 
islitas de jardines de flores, sobre todo si es de noche y si hay 
luna llena ! 

Esta manana pase por el gran edificio del Teatro Nacional, 
10 una de las construcciones mas imponentes de la ciudad. Es 
de marmol, y ha costado millones de pesos. Despues entre 
en la gran Avenida del Cinco de Mayo, que conduce al 
Zocalo, plaza central, alrededor de la cual estan la catedral 
de arquitectura’ espanola, el Palacio Nacional, y otros edi- 
15 ficios grandes. Muchas veces han sucedido en esa plaza 
^ acontecimientos de gran importancia en la historia de Mejico. 

He escrito bastante esta vez. Manana ire a ver el parque 
y el Castillo de Chapultepec, residencia oficial del presidente 
de la republica. Hay tantas cosas interesantes e historicas 
20 que visitar. 


A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 
guientes: 

1. En el Golfo de Mejico. 2. El calor de Vera Cruz. 
3. El frio de las montanas. 4. Benito Juarez. 5. La nina 
que vendia flores. 6. El pueblo de Xochimilco. 7. El 
Teatro Nacional. 8. Los edificios del Zocalo. 9. Cha¬ 
pultepec. 



Ponganse al plural los verbos, sustantivos, articulos, y 
adjetivos de las oraciones siguientes: 

1. Es la montafia mas alta. 2. Era faciL la leccion. 
Veo al buen muchacho. 4. El graii patriota sufrio mucho. 
5. La ley mejicana expresa la idea. 6. Esta vez me vendio 
la mejor flor. 7. He visto el arbol grande del paseo. 






3 






V 

\ 




4 


4 










ft 






fc,- 


• ■i 

'f 





El Castillo de Chapultepec 


















; -vL.' 

AND COMPOSITION BOOk 


31 


(2) Traduzcanse los adjetivos y pdnganse en el lugar con- 
veniente: 


Una 


1. {cfosed) Una ventan? 
3. {certain) Amigas niiestr£ 


4. 


T 

2. {great) El capijkan. 
{some, other) Ire en vapor. 


5. {large) Las puertas. {good) Un nino. 7. {white) Dos 
caballos. 8. {cold) Xm pais. 9. {charming) Esta ninaii/v\ 
10. {lazy) Los carpinterosN 11. {many, blue) Hay flores.,--’ 
12. (eac/i) Parque. 




C. QTraduzcase al espanolr j 

. . . ' A. 

’'^izabeth, the ^ster of Louis Aliller, has just arrived in Alexico 
(^ity. She is visiting ^ a friend, Mary Anderson, a student 
summer school of the university. Elizabeth has blue eyes, is 
pretty, Jive^ and charming. ^Alar^is^'older and more serious. 
Alajy l^*^ ni a large house on ^.*Eawrenc^’'*^reet near the church 5 
f of St. Doming The two girls are in Mary’s room seated in com- 
^^fortable chairs near the open windows. Upon a little rouncf^tabfe 
in the centei^f the room are various objects: a Mexican fan, two 
; sm^li^^hains with ^ikw^ses on t^em, ^^Q^^ellow’^ncijs, s^me 
linen mndherchiefs, a pair silh gloved a very^ large box of^aiidj", 10 
ah3^slever^books written in Spanish. 

Elizabeth {with much enthusiasrr^.— a prett^jiouse ! 

No other hpu^ that I have seen has sudna charmihg courl^^ with 
tk beautiful kuhtam, its magnificenUTrees^ and all those red, 
white and yellow flowers. I like also ^e entird^ city. There are 15 
so maiiy interesting historical thing^to^^ee, and the tCeather is 
so fine. ^, 

true that life is pleasant here, but sometimes / 
it is^^ weamer. The^Kird day that I was ^ here, when I went out p 
I ir/ an automobile ® the first time, it Was^4'indy and'clusty, and ^ I’20 
^ -taught cold. I am afraid of catching cold right now. I don’t 
want to have a^rei^l^se when John and Louis arrive.^ Please 
close the window. ^ 

Elizabeth. — What a pity ! There are so many interesting 
things in the street. The boys will'd^ here to-morrow. Louis 25 

1 Use personal a (§ 38}. 2 street of Saint Lawrence. ^ a court so charm¬ 
ing. ^ que-h infin. estar. e por. 7 la. sPres. subj. 



32 ^ ( SPANISH REVIEW grammar 

wrote me that two days ago they reached Vera Cruz, an important 
city of Alexico. 


D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

1. alrededor de. 2. hacer mal tiempo. 3. tener la bondad de. 
4. blancas y rojas. 5. con mucho gusto. 6. muchas veces. 
(I WV. ojos negros. 8. lastima. 9. tratar de. 10. algun dia. 


y hacer, 


E. Los verbos irregulares decir 
rM/l ^ it, IS not dusty. 


y los modismos. 
Mary said that it 


was sunny. 3. Pleafee p^j: the pretty flowers on the taUe. 4. What 
was she doing? A w§ek hgo^'sh^ was trW^i^. 5.^jQier hsu^g 
done it, they said that it was "easy. 6. IpKnot ts^indy, but it is 
cold. 7. I say again that the'§^ did it. 8. They fear that she will 
ell {pres, subj.) it. 9. ylt'' was hot moonlight last night. 10. By 
sa^nng it he did welL^J^ f lease do il^Key have said. 12. I d^ 
not believe that it willbe (pres, subj.) bad weather. 13. She v^lf“ 
^ not say what she/^uld do. 14. I doubted that they sqfid (impf. 


subj.) much. 







EXERCISE IV 


Gender of Nouns — Negation — Interrogation — Direct 
Object with a 

34. Masculine gender M — 1. Names of male beings, 
days, months, rivers, oceans, mountains, and infinitives 
used as nouns. 

El hombre, the man; el lunes, Monday; febrero, February; el 
Amazonas, the Amazon; el Atlantico, the Atlantic; los Andes, the 
Andes; el hablar, speaking 


^ Some nouns have two genders with different meanings: 


el capital, the capital (money) 
el guia, the guide (man) 
el parte, the message 


la capital, the capital (city) 
la guia, the guide (book) 
la parte, the part 



33 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 

I 

2. Nouns ending in -o, and many nouns ending in -1, -r, 
and -mad 

El libro, the book; el angel, the angel; el azucar, the sugak; el idioma, 
the language. 


35. Feminine gender: ^ — 1. Names of female beings, 
letters of the alphabet, and most cities. 

La mujer, the woman; la j (jota), j; la Habana, Havana. 

2. Nouns ending in -a, -ion, -d, -umbre, and -ie.^ 

La mesa, the table; la cancion, the song; la ciudad, the city; la 
costumbre, the custom; la serie, the series. 


^ ^ 6. Negation. — Negation is usually expressed by no 
J^laced before the verb (before the auxiliary in compound 
/ tenses). Nothing but object pronouns may intervene 
between no and the verb. 


No tienen jardines. 
No ban venido. 

No los hemos visto. 


They do not have gardens. 
They have not come. 

We have not seen them. 


1. Certain negative words, ninguno,^ nada, nadie, nunca, 
jamas, ni and tampoco require no before the verb when 
they follow it; ^ when they precede the verb (/or emphasis) 
or when they stand alone, no is not used. 

No viene ninguno de mis None of my friends is coming, 
amigos. 

No ha dicho nada. He has not said anything. 


^ Common exceptions: la mano, the hand; la sal, the salt; la col, the 
cabbage; la miel, the honey; la catedral, the cathedral; la flor, the flower; 
la pluma, the pen; la plataforma, the platform. 

2 Common exceptions: el dia, the day; el mapa, the map; many nouns 
in ma; el gorrion, the sparrow; el sarampion, the measles; el sud, the 
south; el pie, the foot. 

3 Alguno may be used with negative value, if no precedes the verb. 
No tuvo cosa alguna, he had nothing. Alguien and algo (opposites of nadie 
and nada) may not be used negatively. 

^ In contrast to English and French, ' no negative word may come 
between the auxiliary and the past participle in Spanish. See § 4, 1, foot- 
tiote 4. No le he visto nunca, I have never seen him. 




34 SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 

Nadie ira. Nobody will go. 

Nunca (jamas) le vere. Never shall I see him. 

Ni el tampoco vendra. Nor will he come either. 

2. But, as a conjunction, is most commonly pero (occa¬ 
sionally ^nas). But, after a negative verb, is sino, when 
no^werb follows, or when the following verb is in the 
mfimtiveA 

Escribe el espanobv.pero no lo He writes Spanish, but he 
habla. - does not speak it. 

No voy a Santiago, sino a> I am not going to Santiago, 
Buenos Aires. but to Buenos Aires. 

Juan no quiere jugar, sin^ John does not want to play, 
estudiar. but to study. 

(a) The word only {nothing hut) may be expressed by 

no . . . sino or no . . . mas que.^ 

No bebemos sino (mas que) We drink only (nothing but) 
agua. water. 

37. Interrogative sentence order. ^— In interrogative, as 
in declarative sentences, the word order is quite flexible 
in Spanish. A common order in questions is (I) verb, 
(2) noun object or predicate adjective, (3) subject. How¬ 
ever, if the noun object with its modifiers is longer than the 
subject, the subject precedes.^ 

I Es buena el agua ? Is the water good ^ 

I Tiene agua Carlos ? Does Charles have any water ? 

I Tiene Carlos agua muy fria? Does Charles have very cold 

water ? 


1 But is usually sino que, when the first verb is negative, and the 
second, in contrast, is different, and affirmative, and ffoCm^he infinitive. 
Luis no estudia, sino que juega, Louis is not studying, hut {on the contrary) 
he is playing. 

2 Only may also be expressed by solo or solamente. Bebemos solo 
(solamente) agua, We drink only water. 

2 An inverted interrogation point must be placed at the beginning of 
a question. 

^ For the sentence position of pronoun objects, see § 74. 




AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


35 


38. Direct object with a.^ — The preposition a (not to be 
translated) is used before the direct object, when the direct 
object is: (1) a definite personal noun, (2) a geographical 
proper name, and (3) a pronoun (excep t _a conjunctive 
pro nou iL-and the relative que) referring to a person.^ 

Buscabamos a Carlos. We were looking for Charles. 

Visitaremos a Caracas. We shall visit Caracas. 

No he visto a nadie. I have not seen anybody. 

VERBS 

39. Qiierer, to wish 

Pres. Part, queriendo; Past Part, querido. 

Pres. Ind. quiero, quieres, quiere, queremos, quereis, quieren. 
Pres. Subj. quiera, quieras, quiera, queramos, querais, quieran. 
Impf. Ind. queria, etc.; Put. Ind. querre, etc.; Cond. querria, 
etc. 

Fret. Ind. quise, quisiste, quiso, quisimos, quisisteis, quisieron. 
Impf. Subjs. quisiese, etc.; quisiera, etc.; Put. Subj. quisiere, 
etc. 

Imperatives quiere, quered. 


40. 


Poner, to put 


Pres. Part, poniendo; Past Part, puesto. 

Pres. Ind. pongo, pones, pone, ponemos, poneis, ponen. 
Pres. Subj. ponga, pongas, ponga, pongamcs, pongais, pongan. 
Impf. Ind. ponia, etc.; Put. Ind. pondre, etc.; Cond. pondria, 


etc. 


Pret. Ind. puse, pusiste, puso, pusimos, pusisteis, pusieron. 
Impf. Subjs. pusiese, etc.; pusiera, etc.; Put. Subj. pusiere, 
etc. M 


Imperatives pon, poned. 





^ When the verb 
the direct object 


as a direct (personal) object and an indirect object , 
not take a. Envio su hijo al^corrgo, fie sent Ms son 
to the post office. A ' . 

2 With nouns not designated in the above list a may be used to avoid 
doubt as to the direct object. Ve el toro al caballo, The hull sees the horse. 
Ve al toro el caballo, The horse sees the bull. 







36 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


IDIOMS 


41. Querer decir 

I Que quiere decir eso ? 

42. A menudo 

Viene a verme a menudo. 


To mean 

What does that mean? 
Often 

He often comes to see me. 


43. Gustar a (uno) 
Me gusta el sombrero. 


To please (one), like 
I like the hat (the hat pleases me). 


LA INDUSTRIA BANANERA 

Se dice a menudo que no hay ninguna fruta de los tropicos 
mas conocida en los Estados Unidos que la banana o el 
platano. Sin embargo, los habitantes de los paises pro- 
ductores no exportan nunca la mayor parte de las nume- 
5 rosas variedades, sino que se las comen ellos mismos. A1 
buscar en el mapa esos paises, es evidente que los que pro- 
ducen platanos tienen puertos en el Mar Caribe o en el 
Golfo de Mejico. Asi es facil enviar este producto por esos 
mares y por el Atlantico a los Estados Unidos o a Europa. 

10 Un platanal ofrece una escena interesante a los que no 
han visto nunca platanos sino en el mercado o en la mesa 
de su casa en clima frio. Si les gusta visitar a Costa Rica, 
por ejemplo, veran cultivadores que tienen mucho cuidado 
de la produccion de esta fruta. Nadie visitara esa region 
15 sin admitir lo cientifico de la agricultura y del comercio 
del dia presente. La mat a del platano necesita no solo im 
suelo favorable, sino tambien Iluvia regular y frecuente, lo 
que quiere decir que las vegas cerca de las costas son ge- 
neralmente los terrenos mejores. Para permitir la mejor 
20 distribucion del calor, de la luz, y del aire, hay que plantar 
las matas a una distancia de cinco metros poco mas o menos, 
En algunos distritos les gusta a los cultivadores plantar, en 
el intermedio de las matas cafetos o arboles de cacao, que 
reciben la sonibra de las hojas del platano. El platano 


La industria bananera en Costa Rica 





m ^ Jr 


ivfl^ 


Mt-s ^ ^ 









AND COMPOSITION BOOK "^’^37 

crece muy rapidamente, pero una mata no/produce mas 
que iin racimo de f rut as. A1 cortar el racim^ se quit a tam- 
bien toda la mata para dejar crecer el renuevo que esta al 
lado. El sabor y el aroma de la fruta dependen no solo 
de la variedad de la planta, sino tambien del cuidado del 5 
cultivador. 

Hay mucho capital invertido en la industria bananera. 

El llevar esta fruta con exito a las ciudades norteamericanas 
es un gran problema. Hay lineas de vapores que no llevan 
de cargamento nada mas que esta fruta. La refrigeracion y lo 
la ventilacion de la fruta durante el viaje quedan bajo la 
direccion de empleados peritos. Todos los racimos tienen 
que pasar una inspeccion rigida al ponerse en el vapor. ^ Ha 
recibido cierto racimo un lev^'^golpe ? el inspector no permite 
que se ponga a bordo. Es mas pequeno que lo deseado ? 15 
tampoco lo deja pasar. Esta una banana un poco ama- 
rilla ? jamas el inspector acepta aquel racimo. Las ba¬ 
nanas parecen tener la costumbre humana de seguir en 
los vestidos la moda mas reciente de colores. | Si una fruta 
esta un poco amarilla, todas las vecinas se po&n pronto 20 
del mismo color, lo que da por resultado una perdida con¬ 
siderable antes de llegar al destino. 

A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 
guientes: 

1. Los paises que producen platanos. 2. Los platanales 
de Costa Rica. 3. Lo que necesita el platano. 4. Las 
plantas que dan sombra al platano. 5. El cortar del racimo. 

6. La transportacion de los cargamentos a los mercados. 


B. 


(I) Pongase el articulo determinado conveniente con cada 
sustanRvo: , 

2^canci6n. 3^^q)aises. / .4. parte (^art). 
CUv costumbre. jJy aire. Sr'' poemas. 9^ culti 


dias. 

5^11uvia. 


vador. 10^'distrito. 
4. angeles. 


f] 

ILR aroma. 


poemas. 
manos. 

M' 


IS.^ies. 


38 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


(2) Traduzcanse las negaciones, y ponganse en debida 


forma en lugar conveniente: 


Elios lo' 


^0^\nohody) dijo. 2. {nei^er) 

querran. 3. {nevfryLo puse con los platanos. 4. {nothing) 
Me dijo. 5. {none) De las plant as murio. 6. {not) Los 
ban recibido. 




(3) Cambiense estas oracioims en preguntas 
1. El platano necesita Iluvia. 2. iJais entra con su 
hermana. 3. No ban* visto la catedral. 4. Maria tenia . 
flo^s. 5. Ma^^a tenia mucbas flores en el canasto. 6. Vd. 
busca a Isabel. ^ V 

C. Traduzcase al espanoi: ^ 

Elizabeth is seated in her roorp in^the large house in which she 
lives. Mary is not with her, but at the University. Elizabeth is 
tired and homesick. her friends (/.) li^^l^ome to see her, 

and she has nothing to do. Often^^he goes to the window, but 
.5 sees nobody. {There is a knock ^ at the door.) 

Elizabeth. — Who is it ^ Cpm'^in.' 

^ ^ Louis {entering ). — lAha^is matter with you ? Why are youj 

staying here alone ? Eli^Ose |^h6'don’t talk Spanish cin^o not^l^ 
else than stay in their hotel, 1^' ^ou talk Spanish well. Why 
10 don’t you go and visit the National Museum and the churches ? 






Isn’t there ^^map of the cjtyj. 
ELizABETH/-^9What a 


tMiLguide bog 
A V 

question ! V 

DTdn’^ ^b^promis 


Z Oc^ 

hat do jou mean ? 
V go^qh me this 




I never saw man 

afternoon to visit, ^jhimilco, the town of flower^bkl: "Uolonei 
15 Lindbergh liked sb much when he visitecE^exico ? Mary told 
me two days ago that there is nothing/more beautiful in this ^art 
of Mexico. Men^ always forget their ^^ise^ women ^ hbve^M^ 
Lou^s. — I dj^dn’t foi^gtjU ^ I have be^ fer^ bad\p 

^^trip to Hie^^o^t, and I^^pjled at a banana"'plantatioh 
' 20 from which ® tbey^s'^id fruit to this city. Let’s go at once, and 


y,^,4.-4i-^=^hile we are on the way, I shall tell you some things about the 


ff1 





psiness. 
A42 - 


Nothing interests me more. 


que. 2 se llama, 
se reflexive. 


3 See § 3,1. 4 Omit. 


no se me olvido. « del cual. 
/ 







AND COMPOSITION/BOOK 39 

Elizabeth. — No one has told me it, I 

know that I have never seen in the United Stages so^an^^in^^'^-"^ 
of delicious bananas. I like ^pepially;/ the tiny ones ^ that are conT^'^ 
Tnonh^^led “fii^dred iif^ilm n^outfl.” But do not think that I 
havi^^ so r^hy' in my ^ mouth at^nce. Don’t tarantulas live in 
'%u?iaies of bananas ? I shdulcHnoPfife^b^ve'^^^^ a banana plan 

tation where I might see ^ them often. / 

2cl4 ^ 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: C 

1, — elmiapa. 2. antes de^ -87 tener miedojie. 4. tal,/ 5. cansa 
dos. 6 . habia luna. 7. ni yo tampoco. 8 . acabar de. 


E. 


Los verbos irregulares poner y 
Traduzcanse: 


querery y los modismos. 





[^re did he put £he ^ap ? 2 . He did ^^t^waxi^vreterite) 

him to put it {im'pf. subj.) with the books. 3. What m3(he^^ 
when he said that ? 4.1 used to like the things th^.^ JilEa^T^dT He 
does not often say what he mean^ 6 . We wis!^ to see her. 

7. I do not {o put tl^e things here. ' 

8 . What willA:he^^ut in"^y automobile 9. b£ inap^ 

m my rooi^.^ 1 ^. Do/ydU like this city ? 11 . We do mot like it4 
12 . He did hbV^ what I meant. 13. He often asks me questions. 
14. He wanted us to put {im'pf. subj.) the music in the library. 




nada. '^Omit. y® Pres. perf. subj. ^ ^ Def. art. ^ Impf. subj. 








40 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


EXERCISE V 

Tenses of the Indicative Mood — Imperative 

44. Present, future, and conditional. — The present ^ 
and future tenses in Spanish are usually employed as in 
English. The conditional {yastfuture) in Spanish is expressed 
in English by should ^ or would ^ followed by the infinitive.^ 

Juan compra recuerdos. John buys (is buying) sou¬ 

venirs. 

Comprara un automovil. He will buy an automobile. 

Dijo que comprana una casa. He said that he would buy 

a house. 

45. The future tense may express a probable present 
state or action, and the conditional {yast future) a probable 
past one. 

I Que hora es ? — Seran las What time is it ? It is prob- 
dos. ably (possibly) two o’clock, 

or. It must be two o’clock. 

I Que hora era? — Serian las What time was it,? It was 
once. probably (possibly) eleven 

o’clock, or. It must have 
been eleven o’clock. 

46. Action or state which began in the past and is still 
continuing in the present, indicated in English by the 
present perfect, is expressed in Spanish by the present tense 
with hace ... que. 

Hace diez dias que estoy aqui. I have been here for ten 

days. 


1 For the progressive construction, see §§ 14 , 3 and 169 . 

^ The words will and would, when they mean to wish or to he willing, 
are expressed in Spanish by forms of querer. The word should, when it 
means ought, is expressed in Spanish by forms of deber. 

I Quiere Vd. darme cinco pesos? Will you (are you willing to) give 

me five dollars? 

I Querrfa Vd. ir conmigo manana ? Would you go with me to-morrow? 
Debemos hablar despacio. We should (ought to) speak slowly. 

3 See uses of the imperfect (jpast) subjunctive, §§ 151 , 153 . 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


41 


47. Imperfect. — The imperfect {past descriptive) tense 
is used to describe (I) continued or habitual past action or 
state, and (2) to express an action or state of affairs when 
something else happened. 

Hablabamos espanol cuando We used to speak Spanish 
viviamos en Mejico. when we lived in Mexico. 

Jugaban cuando llegamos. They were playing when we 

arrived. 


48. Action or state beginning in the past and continuing 
up to a certain stated time in the past, indicated in English 
by the pluperfect {past perfect) ^ is expressed in Spanish by 
the imperfect {past descriptive) with hacia . . . que. 


Hacia dos meses que estabamos en Montevideo cuando llego. 

We had been in Montevideo two months when he arrived. 

49. Preterite. — The vreterit^^vaM^'^dbsolute) tense ex- 


presses a completed definite past action or state. 


Luisa vino 

Estuvo enfermo dos meses. 


Louise came yesterday. 
He was ill two months. 






50. Present Perfect. — The present perfect expresses 
(1) a past action not re ferring to any definite time; '(2) a past 
action which still affects the present condition of affairs. 
Its use corresponds to that of the English present perfect. 


He estado en Chile. I have been in Chile. 

Dice que han llegado. He says that they have 

arrived. 


51. Pluperfect. — The pluperfect {past perfect) in Spanish 
generally corresponds in use to the English pluperfect {past 
perfect). The past anterior {second past perfect) indicates 
an action that took place immediately before another past 
action. It follows such conjunctions of time as asi que, ^ 
luego que, tan pronto como, as soon as, apenas, hardly, 

Habian vivido en San Juan. They had lived in San Juan. 

Luego que hubieron llegado As soon as they had reached ; 

a Santiago, buscaron sus Santiago they looked for 
baules. their trunks. 

.'•5 




42 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


52. Imperative. — 1. In familiar speech ^ the distinctively 
imperative forms are used in affirmative commands; in 
negative commands, the present subjunctive {second person 
sing, and pi.) must be used. 



Habla 
No hables 


), hablad (pL). 
{sing.), no hableis 


{pi.). 


Speak. 

Do not speak. 


2. In formal speech,^ both affirmative and negative com- 
mands are expressed by the present subjunctive {third 
person sing, and pi.) with usted and ustedes. 



Hable Vd. {sing.), hablen Vds. {pL). 

\ No hable Vd. (szn^.), no hablen Vds. {pL). 

VERBS 


Speak. 

Do not speak. 


53. Ir, to go 

Pres. Part, yendo; Past Part. ido. 

Pres. Ind. voy, vas, va, vamos, vais, van. 

Pres. Subj. vaya, vayas, vaya, vayamos, vayais, vayan, 
Impf, Ind. iba, ibas, iba, ibamos, ibais, iban. 

Put. Ind. ire, etc.; Cond. iria, etc. 

Pret. Ind. fui, fuiste, fue, fuimos, fuisteis, fueron. 

Impf. Subjs. fuese, etc.; fuera, etc.; Put. Subj. fuere, etc. 
Imperatives ve, vamos, id. 

54. Andar, to go 

{With no idea of definite destination or purpose.) 

Pres. Part, andando; Past Part, andado. 

Pres. Ind. ando, andas, anda, andamos, andais, andan. 
Pres. Subj. ande, andes, ande, andemos, andeis, anden. 
Impf. Ind. andaba, etc.; Put. Ind. andare, etc.; Cond. andaria, 
etc. 

Pret. Ind. anduve, anduviste, anduvo, anduvimos, anduvisteis, 
anduvieron. 

Impf. Subjs. anduviese, etc.; anduviera, etc.; Put, Subj. 
anduviere, etc. 

Imperatives anda, andad. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


43 


IDIOMS 


55. Poco a poco 

Vamos aprendiendo poco a poco. 

56. A la vez 
Trabajan y hablan a la vez. 

57. Al menos 1 

A lo menos > 

Por lo menos J 

Hemos hecho al menos (a 
lo mas necesario. 

We have done at least wh 


Little by little, gently 

We are learning little by little. 

At the same time 

They work and talk at the same 
time 

At least 

menos) (por lo menos) 

is most necessary. 


LA CANA DE AZUCAR EN CUBA 


El que dio a la isla de Cuba el nombre de la Perla de las 
Antillas tuvo mucha razon. Ale parece la isla una verdadera 
perla en el clima, los productos agricolas, y la hospitalidad. 
He ido a visitar varias partes agradables de este mundo, 
pero ninguna me parece mas amena. Hace mas de veinte 
dias que vivo aqui en Ja Habana con una familia cubana. 
La familia consta del Sr. Ordonez y su seiiora con tres hijos, 
un joven de veintidos anos y dos ninos meh^res. No hacia 
mas que cuatro dias que estaba en la ciudad, cuando me. 


encontre coi^^Aianuel Ordonez, a quien conoci mientra^'^1 
estudiaba en los Estados Unidos. Este amigo no quiso 
permitir que yo me quedase en un hotel, sino que me llevo 
consigo a casa de su padre. Desde entonces me encuentro 
aqui como en mi propia familia; asi voy a apreciar mejor 
la vida cubana. Poco a poco hemos explorado la ciudad y a 15 
la vez hemos visto a muchos amigos de Alanuel. Los parques 
y los paseos me gustan mucho, sobre, todo los que tienen 
palmas reales o flores tropicales. ^ 

El senor Ordonez es dueno de un ingenio de azucar en esta 


44 


SPANISH^ REVIEW GRAMMAR 




provincia, y el martes pasado Manuel me pregunto: — ^No 
quiere Vd. ir conmigo a ver nuestro ingenio en donde acaban 
de empezar la molienda de la cana de azucar ? — Hacia 
mucho tiempo que deseaba visi'tar los canaverales, y le dije 
5 que iria con mucho gusto. Hacia varios dias que el padre 
de Manuel estaba alii para inspeccionar las preparaciones 
para la molienda. 

Ayer serian las siete de la manana cuando salimos de casa. 
Desde el tren vimos paisajes muy amenos, y al bajar en la 
10 estacion de A., vimos el automovil del senor Ordonez que 
nos estaba esperando. En el camino el chofer nos dijo que 
^ h uzafra es muy buena este ano, y que estaran moliendo de 
dia y de noche sin parar. Vimos a muchos hombres que 
cortaban la cana con machetes y a otros que la ponian en 
15 carretas grandes que iban al tren que esperaba en la via 
del ferrocarril. En estos canaverales hay g,l menos cien 
kilometres de via. , 

Al acercarnos al ingenio, un tren de cana acababa de 
llegar y estaban ocupados en descargarla. Apenas hubimps 
20 bajado del automovil, acudio el padre de Majluel. Queria 
explicarme todo lo que hacian. La maquinaria hacia tanto 
ruido que casi nos aturdio. Manuel trataba de hablarme, 
pero yo no podia entenderle. Su padre le dijo: — No hables 
tan rapidamente; tambien habla mas alto para que tu amigo 
25 te entienda. — Les interrumpi diciendo: — Hagan el favor 
de no decirme nada hasta andar mas adelante donde habra 
menos ruido. Asi lo hicieron, y poco a poco comprendi 
todo el procedimiento. La cana pasa por entre varios cilin- 
dros que la estrujan de modo que el zur^l5''c"^' en deposifos 
30 inferiores de donde corre a unas calderas en las cuales se 
calienta para sacar de la superficie las impurezas. Mas 
tarde pasa el zumo por una serie de maquinas de filtracion, 
concentracion y cristalizacion. La mayor parte del azucar 
obtenido se exporta a los Estados Unidos. 

35 Una hermosa puesta de sol, encanto caracteristico del dia 
cubano, nos proporciono gran placer al regresar a la ciuda i. 


Una central puertorriquena 







La CASa DE AZtjCAR EN CuBA 

















AND COMPOSITION BOOK 45 

A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 
guientes: 

1. Cuba, la Perla de las Antillas. 2. La familia del 
Sr. Ordonez. 3. Manuel Ordonez lleva al viajero a la casa 
de su padre. 4. El plan de visitar el ingenio de azucar. 
5. El viaje al ingenio. 6. Los trabajadores en los campos. 
7. Los Irenes de cana. 8. La molienda. 


B. (1) Ponganse los verbos en parentesis en el (a) presente; 
(b) preterite: (c) future: a 

(bajar) Manueldel tren^/^ 4ir) Mi madre y yo 

-en automov^^^^ (estar) Yo Cuba. L/(hacer) 

Los cubanos lo^ ^u*:^ ^ 5.,'^d^ir) Alaria no — nada. 
6. (andar) Luis yjuan por. las calles. 7. (aprendeLK 
jNosotros-el espanol poco a poco. 

(2) Ponganse los infinitives en parentesis en el tiempo 
conveniente: 

(vivir) Hace d 9 s^ anos que Juan y Luis^^-aqui. 


1. (vivir) Hace d 

2. (aprender) Luego - - el ingles, se fueron a los Esta- ^ 

dos Unidos. 3. (estar) Hacia cuatro dias que Luis ^ ‘ 
aqui, cuando compro una maleta. 4. (ir) jJace un ano que 
ella^^^^=2<al Peru. 5. (cortar)Los 
los vimos. 6. (poner) Cuando las . 

(hacqr) Mi padre lo -^%*"^^^anana. 

C. Traduzcase 

come in 


en la mesa, salieron. 7-. . xxxcxxxcxxx^. 

^p^anol: ^ ^ ^ 

Emzabeth. - -sSo^’ iijji tiie doorway, Louis; -- 

andsit do^pi. I nave been waiting for you a long^^time. Open 
the windo^ first. I am not i^^fy warm, but I am*%ie|py. Hurry 
up and tell me the|name ^of ^ that good-lookingliia^ m the red 
automobile in front of hotel. 5 

Louis. — He is a Cuban^ and his name is Ordonez. He was 
student at the University last year. Before ^ th^ he had been 
working^ in his father’s^gar mill and at the /Same time had beeiT 
learni^ English liHl^by little. His father ^lad promised to send 


i^mo se llama. ^ ^ antes de. ^ ^ ha^ worked. 

h ‘ h ^ 














46 


him to the United States as soon as h 
visited him two weeks ago. 




SPANISH REVIEW , GRAMMAR 

coulp ^ speak English well. ^ 

^ ifi£c Cy 

>y i Elizabeth. — Tell him to come in and ^troduce^him to me. 

a pity that Mary isn’t^^^^®- is ipromllly at the Uni- 

5 versity. She does nothing oiiCstudy. Did vou^have a good time ^ 

^L(^p. ^ Yes^/certainly. His parents were vei^y hospitable. 

I nm^^arcS^^^gof^n down froai the train when I sSW Hts father in 
an automdlbae near th^J^atibfi^ They have a very fel^^^iu’^r‘ 

10 plantation^ There werem lea^T^e jaimclte^ men who were cutting^ 






t 


sugar U&-%. tl^^elds. 
this week. I nad/ 
been six o’clock 

Elizabeth. — You 


They ar^ '^'tiM^ly still griilking the caneP^ 


V€ 




u 


Dtp ^et up early when I was there^^It ffiuslf 
m^th^^^n^ning^hen we, us^^^eav^TKe h^s* 
'T^.gel up sp e&ly at home. But 
rne He^^s^fee^ sitting there 

^for^^ffan hour. 


down at once and 


"wt'-rL , 

- 

im come 

Perhaps he will ask ^ me to. take a ride with him 




D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 


1. gustar a. 2. sir vase. 3. las Antillas. 4. tener ganas. 
5. a menudo. 6. poco a poco. 7. la puesta de sol. 8. al 
bajar del tren. 






E. Los verbos irregulares zr y andar y los modismos. Traduz- 
canse: / 


1. I si 


go abdut the city. 




,whe^ they^Wi^ij. '^3. j' J.et us ^o aD,least?bnce. 4. Little by little 
tney Vere going to travel thrdjigh t^ l^and. 5. f.We have at least 


ey ’were going 
seen mapy 


thrdpgh- -- 

6. I want them to gS^^pM^subj .) often. 

the 
thre^ 

times. 10. Louis wished us to go^mpf. subj.) when it was cooLr^ 
11. We had gone when theyjcai^. 12. He fearecJ^thM we might 
go {impf. subj.). ''T i 


1 Impf. subj. of sa]^r,(§’'t50). 2 Pres. subj. (§ 140, 2). 3 divertirse. 

< Pres. subj. Ju/i\AMAft^ 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


47 


EXERCISE VI 


Numbers — Seasons — Months — Days — Time — Money 

58. Cardinal numbers . — The table of cardinal numbers 
is as follows: 


0 . 

cero 

14 

catorce 

80 

ochenta 

1 

uno,^ una 15 

quince 

90 

noventa 

2 

dos 

16 

diez y seis ^ 

100 

ciento ^ 

3 

tres 

17 

diez y siete 

101 

ciento uno ^ 

4 

cuatro 

18 

diez y ocho 

110 

ciento diez 

5 

cinco 

19 

diez y nueve 

116 

ciento diez y seis 

6 

seis 

20 

veinte 

200 

doscientos, -as 

7 

siete 

21 

veinte y uno ^ 

300 

trescientos, -as 

8 

ocho 

22 

veinte y dos 

400 

cuatrocientos, -as 

9 

nueve 

30 

treinta 

500 

quinientos, -as 

10 

diez 

40 

cuarenta 

600 

seiscientos, -as 

11 

once 

50 

cincuenta 

700 

setecientos, -as 

12 

doce 

60 

sesenta 

800 

ochocientos, -as 

13 

trece 

70 

setenta 

900 

novecientos, -as 



1,000 = 

mil 3; 1,000,000 

= un 

millon 


69. Ordinal numbers through tenth: — 


primero,^ first 
segundo, second 
tercero,^ third 
cuarto, fourth 
quinto, fifth 


sexto, sixth 
septimo, seventh 
octavo, eighth 
noveno (nono), ninth 
decimo, tenth 


(a) The ordinal numbers vary in ending for gender and 
number like adjectives ending in -o.^ 


1 For the apocopated forms un, cien, primer and tercer, see § 25 and 
25 , footnote 1. 

2 The following forms may also be used: dieciseis, diecisiete, dieciocho, 
diecinueve, veintiuno, veintidos, etc. Such contracted forms are found 
rarely in the thirties and not at all in the higher tens. 

2 Counting by hundreds is not done above nine hundred in Spanish^ 
beginning with ten hundred, mil is used. Mil novecientos veinte y cinco, 
nineteen hundred and twenty-five. 

4 §§21, 22,1. 



48 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


60. Use of ordinal numbers. ■— The use of ordinals is 
more limited in Spanish than in English. 

1. Days of the month, except the first, are expressed by 
the cardinal numbers.^ 

El primero de mayo. The first of May. 

El dos de agosto. The second of August. 

2. With titles of sovereigns and popes, the ordinal 
numbers are used through tenth; after that, cardinal numbers 
are used. 

Carlos quinto. Charles Fifth. 

Pio nono. Pius Ninth. 

Alfonso trece. Alphonso Thirteenth. 

3. With chapters, pages, volumes, paragraphs, etc., both 
cardinal and ordinal numbers are used through ten; above 
ten, only cardinals are commonly used. 

La tercera pagina. The third page. 

Pagina tres. Page three. 

Pagina catorce. Page fourteen. 

61. Fractions through tenth have a cardinal number as 
numerator, and an ordinal as denominator; after tenth, the 
denominator is an ordinal in -avo, formed on the corre¬ 
sponding cardinal. 

|^=tres cuartos,^ |^=cinco sextos; j^ = dos trezavos. 

(a) Half is expressed by medio as an adjective, and by 
mitad as a noun. Third is expressed by tercio. 

Dos libras y media. Two pounds and a half. 

La mitad de la manzana. One half of the apple. 

Dos tercios de la pagina. Two thirds 9! the page. 


1 The word on is not expressed in Spanish before the days of the week 
and the days of the month. Vino el lunes, he came on Monday. Vino el 
echo de julio, he came on the eighth of July. 

2 The word parte may also be used to express fractional numbersi 
f = tres cuartas partes. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


49 


62. Arithmetical signs: — 

(+) mas or y ( x ) (multiplicado) por ^ ( = ) es, es igual a, 
(—) menos ( : ) dividido por son, son 

iguales a 

63. Seasons, months, days are rendered as follows:— ' 

1. Seasons: — el invierno, winter; la primavera, spring; 
el verano, summer; el otono, autumn. 

2. Months : — enero, January; febrero, February; marzo, 
March; abril, April; mayo. May; junio, June; julio, 
July; agosto, August; septiembre, September; octubre, 
October; noviembre, November; diciembre, December. 

3. Days: — domingo, Sunday; lunes, Monday; martes, 
Tuesday; miercoles, Wednesday; jueves, Thursday; mernes, 
Friday; sabado, Saturday. 

64. Time of day. — The hour of day is expressed by the 
cardinal number preceded by the feminine article and 
followed by y or menos with the number of minutes or the 
fraction of the hour. 

I Que hora es ? 

Es la una y media. 

Son las tres^ cuarto. 

Son las tres menos veinte. 

Son las tres menos cuarto. 

Son las tres en punto. 

I A que hora ? 

A las siete de la manana.^ 

A las dos de la tarde.^ 

A las ocho de la noche.^ 


What time is it ? 

It is half past one. 

It is a quarter past three. 

It is twenty minutes to three. 
It is a quarter to three. 

It is exactly three o’clock. 
At what time ? 

At seven a.m. 

At two P.M. f 

At eight P.M. 


^ Veces, times, is also used. Tres veces nueve son veinte y siete, three 
times nine are twenty-seven. Once is expressed by una vez, twice by dos 
veces. 

2 Por la manana, por la tarde, and por la noche are used when the hour 
of the day is not expressed. In some cases en may be found. Iremos por 
la manana (tarde, noche), we shall go in the morning {afternoon, evening). 



50 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


65. Money. — In Spain the peseta is the monetary unit 
with a value of about twenty cents. 100 centimos = 1 peseta. 
In many Spanish American countries the peso is the mone¬ 
tary unit. 100 centavos = 1 peso. The exchange rate 
varies according to the country concerned. The Mexican 
peso is worth about fifty cents. 


VERBS 


Poder, to he able, can 


66 . 


Pres. Part, pudiendo; Past Part, podido. 

Pres. Ind. puedo, puedes, puede, podemos, podeis, pueden. 
Pres. Subj. pueda, puedas, pueda, podamos, podais, puedan. 
Impf. Ind. podia, etc.; Fut. Ind. podre, etc.; Cond. podria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. pude, pudiste, pudo, pudimos, pudisteis, pudieron. 
Impf. Subjs. pudiese, etc.; pudiera, etc.; Fut. Subj. pudiere 
etc. 

Imperatives {lacking). 

67. Venir, to come 

Pres. Part, viniendo; Past Part, venido- 
Pres. Ind. vengo, vienes, viene, venimos, venis, vienen. 
Pres. Subj. venga, vengas, venga, vengamos, vengais, vengan, 
Impf. Ind. venia, etc.; Fut. Ind. vendre, etc.; Cond. vendria, 
etc. 

Pret. Ind. vine, viniste, vino, vinimos, vinisteis, vinieron. 
Impf. Subjs. viniese, etc.; viniera, etc.; Fut. Subj. viniere, etc. 
Imperatives ven, venid. 


IDIOMS 


68 . No poder mas 


Not to be able to endure (stand) 
more, be worn out 


No puedo mas. 


I cannot endure (stand) any 
more, I am worn out. 


69. No poder menos de To do no less than, cannot 
, ( + infinitive) help ( -1- present participle) 










Vista encantadora en Puerto Rico 




















































































\ 



J 

1 

n 


I 

J 


El Ayuntamiento de San Juan 






















AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


51 


No pudo menos de venderlo. 

70. Por eso 
Por lo tanto 
Por consiguiente 

No veo bien, por eso (or por 
tengo que ponerme anteojos. 
I do not see well, accordingly ] 


He could do no less than sell 
it, or. He could not help sell¬ 
ing it. 

Accordingly, therefore 

lo tanto or por consiguiente) 

have to put on glasses. 


UNA VISITA .^UERTO RICO 

Vine a San Juan el sabado pasado para descansar unos dias. 
Hacia ocho dias que estaba viajando por varias partes de 
esta isla encantadora, algunas veces por tren, otras en auto- 
movil o a caballo. No podia mas, y aunque hoy es lunes, 
todavia estoy cansado. Por la tarde me quedo en casa, y 5 
por eso puedo escribir ahora algo de mis viajes, 

Primero, fui por tren hasta Mayaguez. J Que viaje tan 
ameno ! a veces cerca del Atlantico, o atravesando vegas 
desde donde podiamos divisar a lo lejos vistas encantadoras 
de montanas cubiertas de verdura. Aunque estamos en lo 
el invierno, parecia la primavera, porque todo el paisaje 
era verde. Pespecto de la temper at ur a, el invierno no es 
muy diferente del verano. Se puede decir que aqui el ano 
no consta mas que de dos estaciones, la Iluviosa y la seca. Es 
verdad que llueve a veces en la estacion seca, pero alguien me 15 
dijo que las dos terceras partes de las Iluvias caen durante la 
estacion Iluviosa, que dura desde agosto hasta diciembre. 

Eran las cuatro y media de la tarde cuando llegue a 
Mayaguez, por Id tanto me decidi a quedarme en la ciudad 
hasta la manana del dia siguiente. Los rayos del sol me 20 
despertaron a las seis y me prepare a pasear a caballo por 
el campo porque me gusta andar mas despacio que en auto- 
mo vil. Poco a poco subi un camino hacia el interior. No 
podia menos de detenerme a menudo para examinar algun 
arbol desconocido o unas f rut as nuevas. Lo que me intereso 25 



52 


SPANIsk REVIEW GRAMMAR* 


■/ 




Parecia que el burro no 
No espere mucho, sino 


mas fue un cafetal \ donde estaban recogiendo la cosecha. 
Los cafetos eran her^osos con sus bay as de color rojo obs- 
curo. Los recogedoFcs parecian estar muy contentos 
su trabajo. Un burrp con la cabeza baja esperaba al lado 
5 del camino con su carro en el cual ponian los canastos llenos 
de bay as para llevarlas al molino. 
podia mas, aunque no hacia nadai 
que me fui sin tardar al molino para ver el metodo de separar 
las dos mitades de las bayas, es (iecir, los granos de cafe, 
10 de la pulpa de las bayas, secarlos y piilirlos para ir al mercado. 
Es un procedimiento que necesita mucho cuidado para con- 
servar el aroma del cafe. 

Fui de Mayagiiez a Ponce por ferrocarril y de alii a 
San Juan en automovil, viaje muy pintoresco que arranco 
15 de los viajeros muchos grit os de entusiasmo. Otro dia hice 
un viaje a una plantacion de pinas, fruta puertorriquena que 
me gust a mucho. 

Esta manana estaba demasiado cansado para salir, por 
consiguiente me puse a leer una historia de Puerto Rico. 
20 Parece que Colon en su segundo viaje vino a la costa de la 
isla el diecisiete de noviembre de 1493. El primer goberna- 
dor fue Juan Ponce de Leon que llego el doce de agosto de 
1508. San Juan, capital de la isla, es la primera ciudad que 
se establecio y se llamo primero Puertorrico, nombre que se 
25 aplico mas tarde a la isla entera, mientras que la ciudad re- 
cibio el que lleva hast a estos dias. l Para que escribir aqui 
la historia cuando esta bien escrita en mi libro Es suficiente 
por hoy. 




A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asimtos si- 
guientes: 

1. Los modos de viajar en Puerto Rico. 2. Las vistas 
hasta Mayaguez. 3. Las estaciones del ano. 4. El paseo 
a caballo desde Mayaguez. 5. El cafetal. 6. El viaje 
desde Ponce a San Juan. 7. Colon en Puerto Rico. 8. El 
primer gobernador. 9. El nombre de Puerto Rico. 





V < 


/ 


H 


V: 

iJ 


^AND 


' V 
V 

■■■ ^ ^ V - V 

Bj^(l) EscrilAilse OT palabr^l^siguitotBy (^’* 

23a; 515;S46743749; il,919; lV,682; 105,'^12; 6x7 
28 '2;'Y2 = 16; T^T - 325 = 422, 62|_ 

Escribanse respuestas a las pregun^s sigmentes: 


,.^74 

ITION 


53 






= 42; 


t 23i = 86; 




( 2 ) 







is away/ 


1. ({ Como se llaman los meses del ano ? 2. ^ Como se 

llaman los dias de la semana ? S. ^ Cuantas boras hay en 
el dia ? 4. (i Como se llaman las estaciones del ano ? 

5. ^ Cuantas personas hay en gu clase de espanol ? 6. ^ Cuan- 
tos anos tiene Vd. ? 7. ^ A que hora tiene Vd. la clase de | 

espanol ? 8. A que hora se levanta Vd. ? 9. A que 
hor^ se acuesta ? 1^ 4 Que dia del mes tenemos hoy ? 

Traduzcase al espanol; ; 

Elizabeth. — ^v. Ordonez has s^id<that he will take usywith 
him ^ in Tiis^'apfomobile to-morrow to a ^lightful little hot^el in 
the mounta^ ^out ^oiie hundred and twenty-five m 
W^shM l^ve at half past seven or eight mxhe mori^g. There 
j^^^j^!j^ore we^^all have to get up ^ at least a quarter af ter^| fe and^.b reak7 
fast at ^ quarter of seven. It is early, but we coi|Tdil’t^do any less 
than a^^pt the invitation. Besides, we both like ^ him very much. 

Tell me something about him. How old is he ? Are his'^arents 
rich? ^ 

Louis.— r He is pii^bably 'jtweuty-t^Y^ years-old. His mother is 10 
English and his father has jjTt^dp^'rt^&t only in Cuba but^T^ in 
' Porto Rico. He spent |:he summers of 192^a«fd 1925 in Por^ 

^ico aj: ^s^thei^ . He tol^me a' few Rays ago^*^ 

ira)[r^th^6|^ ® into tw^^' hffves ln& 

cm bafqre sendii^ them to 15 4 ^ 
things aboncThej^dcess^^buri^^ 

- "■•y ' 

I am 






iy 




4 


that tkey^^!ve to 
at the same time dry'^Kem^ndl 
i/ ot 


^(^Iti^arket.j rie tried to tell ni/c 

had a ®"^adache aiid |hSm ftand n^^hi^^e. f]^ 
Elizabeth. — Here is a book abom^the , West 


Ia 



^omg to tp^ to read it. I^fortunately one ^ k^Kof the first pages 
of chapte^4iu*ee whic^'4ie?Lls wfth Porto Rico are torn out.^ I 20 
remember that Professor Henderson told us in our history class 


^ consigo (§71, footnote 3). ^ at a distance of. ^ levantarnos. ^ nos 

gusta a los dos. “ berries of coffee. ® Omit. ^ la. * se han roto (§ 131, 4). 




r'ti^s oj cc 








V / t" 

si 

54 Danish review grammar 

/ / that Christopher\!olutnbus ^^tit to Porto Rico in November, 1493. 
It was during the reign of Ferdinand Fifth, king of Aragon and 
Castile from 1479 to 1^16. He ma:^ied Isabella, the daughter of 
John Second of Aragon in 1469, an^hey were called the “ Catholic 
5 King and Queen.” 

i; don’t 


/ 


4 ^ 


Louis. — My goodness; 


tell 


91 ^^ any m(j)re history. 


have been reading it for two weeks; I can’t stand any more . . . 


I hope you h^W\ good ti^ to-morrow. If it doesn\t rain it will 
' Cii^;>^he hot and dusty, but the mountains are beautiful in |he month of 

10 July well as in autumn and winter. 

x/wy ^L- 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 




1. la mitad. 2. el 25 de diciembre. 3. por la manana. 
4. cien pesos. 5. es evidente. 6. mas despacio. 7. al lado de. 
8. a la vez. 9. Alfonso XIII. 10. querer decir. 


E. Los verbos irregulares poder y venir, y los modismos. 
Traduzcanse: 

1. The girls came yesterday. 2. When shall you come 3. I 
cannot say when I shall come. 4. We cannot help staying there. 
5. Accordingly, do not go at once. 6. He used to come when he 
could. 7. We were afraid that they would not come {impf. subj.). 
8. Come now. 9. I do not believe that she will be able {pres, 
subj.) to endure it. 10. Therefore we shall not be able to see her. 
11. I am coming soon. 12. Can you {pi.) go in our automobile ? 
13. They did not go away, and I am worn out. 


; 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


55 


EXERCISE VII 
Personal Pronouns 


71. The table of personal pronouns is as follows: — 





Conjunctive 


Disjunctive or 



{used as subject or object of 

a verb) 

Prepositional 




Indikect 

Direct 

(used as object oj 



Subject 

Object 

Object 

a preposition) 


1. 

yo 

me 

me 

mi 3 


2. 

tu 

te 

te 

ti3 



' el 

le 

le, lo2 

el 



ella 

le 

la 

ella 

Singular 

3. < 

usted 

le 

le, lo, la 

usted 



ello 1 

(wanting) 

lo 1 

ello 



(wanting) 

se 

se 

SI 3 


1. 

nosotros, 

-as nos 

nos 

nosotros, -as 


2. 

vosotros, 

-as os 

os 

vosotros, -as 



ellos 

les 

los 

ellos 



ellas 

les 

las 

ellas 

Plural 

3. < 

ustedes 

les 

los, las 

ustedes 



(neuter plural wanting) 




(wanting) 

se 

se 

si 2 


72. The personal pronouns, except usted (V., Vd., Ud.) 
and ustedes (V.V., Vds., Uds.), are usually omitted as 
subjects of verbs unless required for emphasis or clearness. 
Usted and ustedes, as subjects, are ordinarily used only 
once in the same sentence. 

Tengo (Tenemos) muchas peras. I have (\Ye have) many pears. 

(Emphasis) El tiene muchos cua- He has many pictures, but 
dros pero yo no tengo ninguno. I do not have any. 

(Clearness) Yo (El, Ella) escribia. I (He, She) was writing. 

Usted dice que estudia mucho. You say that you study much. 

^ The neuter forms ello and lo are limited in use. They refer to a whole 
idea or phrase, but never to a definite noun. Ello es que no trabaja, The 
fact is that he does not work. No lo creo, I do not believe it. 

"• There is a strong tendency to use le for masculine persons and lo for 
masculine things. The English neuters it and them must be expressed by 
la and las when they refer to things which are feminine in Spanish. 

,3 The pronouns mi,;.ti, and si, when used with the preposition con 
become conmigo, contigo, and consigo. 





56 SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 

73. The ordinary form of direct address (the word you) 
is expressed by usted and ustedes (formal speech) used 
with the third person of the verb. The forms tu and 
vosotros, used with the second person of the verb, are 
employed in addressing near relatives, intimate friends, 
servants, and animals. 

Senor Garcia, Vd. tiene mucho que hacer. 

Mr. Garcia, you have a great deal to do. 

Juan, hijo mio, (tu) no me has escrito a menudo. 

John, my son, you have not written to me often. 


74. Sentence position of conjunctive object pronouns.^ — 
1. Object pronouns regularly precede the verb governing 
them, and in the case of compound tenses, they immedi¬ 
ately precede the auxiliary haber.^ 

Le vi y le hable. I saw him and spoke to him. 

Les he dado muchas cosas. I have given them many 

. things. 


2. Object pronouns follow and are attached to infinitives, 
present participles, affirmative imperatives, and subjunc¬ 
tives used as affirmative imperatives. 


Voy a escribirle, diciendole 
esto. 

Damelo ahora. 

Digame Vd. lo que ha hecho. 


I am going to write to him, 
telling him this. 

Give it to me now. 

Tell me what you have done. 


(a) When an infinitive or present participle is used 
directly after another verb, the object pronouns are placed 
either before or after the complete verbal expression. 


Quiero verlos, or, Los quiero I wish to see them, 
ver. 

Estoy escribiendole, or, Le I am v^riting to him. 
estoy escribiendo. 


1 Conjunctive object pronouns are frequently used redundantly with 
nouns, Le dio al ein^eadP- un premio, He gave the employee a reward. 

2 pronourjiinay^^tervene between haber and the past participle, 
unless haber is in the infinitive or present participle. See § 4, 1, footnote 4. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


57 


3. The indirect object precedes the direct object. The 
reflexive pronoun se, however, whether direct or indirect 
object, precedes any other object pronoun. 

Nos lo da. He gives it to us. 

Quiere darnoslo. He wishes to give it to us. 

No se le dijo nada. Nothing was said to him. 

(a) Se {not reflexive in this use) is employed for the 
indiiect object forms le and les, in case lo, la, los, or las 
follows. 

Se lo doy (se lo for le lo or les I give it to him, or, to them, 
lo). 

Se las doy (se las for le las I give them to him, or, to 
or les las). them. 


75. The disjunctive (prepositional) pronouns are used: ^ — 

1. As the object of a preposition. 

Primero patine con ella, y I skated first with her, and 
despues con el. afterward with him. 


2. In addition to object conjunctive pronouns, for clear¬ 
ness or emphasis.^ 


Le hahle a el, a ella, a Vd. 
Les hable a ellos, a ellas, a 
Vds. 

Vd. me ve a mi,^ pero no le 
ve a el. 

3. After verbs of motion. 

Los ninos vendran a mi. 

Su hi jo corrio a el. 


I spoke to him, to her, to you. 
I spoke to them (m.), to 
them (/.), to you. 

You see me, but you do not 
see him. 


The children will come to me. 
His son ran to him. 


^ In case there are two pronoun objects of a verb, and the direct object 
is in the first or second person, the indirect object is expressed by the 
disjunctive form. The order is then as in English. Me presento a ella. 
He introduced me to her. But: Me los presento, He introduced them to me. 

2 For the use of mismo for emphasis, see § 132. 

3 For still greater emphasis, the sentence order A mi me ve Vd. may be 
used. 



58 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


VERBS 

76. Saber/ to know 

Pres. Part, sabiendo; Past Part, sabido. 

Pres. Ind. se, sabes, sabe, sabemos, sabeis, saben. 

Pres. Subj. sepa, sepas, sepa, sepamos, sepais, sepan. 

Impf. Ind. sabia, etc.; Put. Ind. sabre, etc.; Cond. sabria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. supe, supiste, supo, supimos, supisteis, supieron. 
Impf. Subjs. supiese, etc.; supiera, etc.; Fut. Subj. supiere, 
etc. 

Imperatives sabe, sabed. 

77. Dar, to give 

Pres. Part, dando; Past Part. dado. 

Pres. Ind. doy, das, da, damos, dais, dan. 

Pres. Subj. de, des, de, demos, deis, den. 

Impf. Ind. daba, etc.; Fut. Ind. dare, etc.; Cond. daria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. di, diste, dio, dimos, disteis, dieron. 

Impf. Subjs. diese, etc.; diera, etc.; Fut. Subj. diere, etc. 
Imperatives da, dad. 

78. Volver, to return 

Pres. Part, volviendo; Past Part, vuelto. 

Pres. Ind. vuelvo, vuelves, vuelve, volvemos, volveis, vuelven. 
Pres. Subj. vuelva, vuelvas, vuelva, volvamos, volvais, vuelvan. 
Impf. Ind. volvia, etc.; Fut. Ind. volvere, etc.; Cond. volvena, 
etc. 


Saber Conocer 

^ (a) To know, have knowledge of (a) To know, be acquainted with 

{things). {versons and things). 

(6) Governs clauses. • (6) Cannot govern clauses. 

Conozco al Sr. Lopez, y se que esta alli. 

I know Mr. Lopez, and I know that he is there. } 

Saber Poder 

(c) ( + infinitive) can, know how, (c) ( + infinitive) can, be able. 

Sabe escribir el espahol, pero no puede escribir hoy. 

He can {knows how to) write Spanish, but he cannot {is not able to) 
write to-day. 


/ 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


59 


Pret. Ind. volvi, volviste, volvio, volvimos, volvisteis, volvieron. 
Impf. Subjs. volviese, etc.; volviera, etc.; Put. Subj. volviere, 
etc. 

Imperatives vuelve, volved. 


IDIOMS 


79. Volver a (+ infinitive) 
Volvio a hablar. 

80. De vez {or cuando) 

en cuando 

Los vemos de vez (cuando) en 
cuando. 

81. Cosa de 1 

Poco mas o menos | 


To (infinitive) again 

He spoke again. 

From time to time, now and 
then 

We see them from time to time. 

About, approximately 


Vimos cosa de veinte personas, or 
Vimos veinte personas poco mas o menos. 
We saw about twenty persons. 


EN VENEZUELA 

Caracas, Venezuela, 
* 30 de enero de 19—. 

Querido amigo mio: 

Le escribo a Vd. para decirle un poco de lo que me ha 
sucedido desde mi llegada a este pais. Desembarque en 
Puerto Cabello, donde me estaba esperando mi primo, 
Julian Martin, comerciante de exportacion e importacion. 
Hace quince anos poco mas o menos que vive en Venezuela, 
y nunca le habia visto durante\stos anos sino una vez que 
volvio a Nueva York. De vez en cuando me habia invitado 
a visitarle, por lo tanto no pude menos de quedarme unos 
dias con el mientras estoy viajando en la America del Sur. 

La familia de Julian no vive en Puerto Cabello, sino en 
Valencia, cerca de las montanas, donde hace menos calor. 
Julian puede ir diariamente por tren o en automovil de una 
ciudad a la otra. Por eso, a las cinco de la tarde, Julian me 


60 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


llevo consigo en automovil a su casa en A^alencia. Sus dos 
hijos acudieron a el al bajarnos, xAlberto que tiene doce 
anos y Luis que no tiene mas que ocho. Nunca los habia 
visto, pero desde el primer momento me fueron simpaticos. 

5 Su madre los siguio para darme la bienvenida. Yo estaba 
muy contento de conocerlos. Me quede con ellos ocho dias, 
hablandoles de mis viajes y aprendiendo de ellos la historia 
y el comercio del pais. El pequeno Luis me dijo que sabia 
como Venezuela habia recibido su nombre. Se lo dio el 
10 primer explorador que entro en el lago de Maracaibo, quien 
vio a los indios que vivian en casitas sobre estacas en el 
agua. Puesto que conocia a Venecia en Italia, se le ociu’io 
que era una pequena Venecia, o Venezuela. 

Mis primos vinieron conmigo en automovil hasta Caracas. 
15 Pasamos por muchos cafetales y cacaotales, y les hice muchas 
preguntas respecto a ellos. Alberto queria darme el mismo 
informes sobre el comercio. Me informo de que el cacao 
de aquel distrito les gusta mucho a los franceses, por con- 
siguiente export an las semillas a Erancia. Luis le interrum- 
20 pio, — Vd. no sabra que los indios todavia emplean las 
semillas de cacao en lugar de dinero. De vez en cuando me 
las han dado en las montanas, donde cada semilla vale cinco 
centavos, y se las he entregado a mi madre. 

Julian tiene muchos amigos en Caracas y me los presento. 
25 No volvere a verle a el ni a su familia, porque saldre de aqui 
en dos dias. Sus amigos acudieron a mi a darme informes 
del pais. He sabido de uno de ellos que hay un lago de 
asfalto de cosa de mil acres cerca de las bocas del Orinoco, 
de donde los vapores norteamericanos llevan cargamentos 
30 inmensos a los Estados Unidos. Todos saben cuanto se 
emplea este producto ahora. 

Espero volver a escribirle de otro pais. 

Su afmo. amigo, 

Roberto 



En UN CACAOTAL 



















El Palacio de Gobieeno, Caracas 

















AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


61 


A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 

guientes: 

1. El comerciante de exportacion e importacion. 2. La 
oasa del primo en Valencia. 3. Los hijos de la familia. 

4. Como Venezuela recibio su nombre. 5. Los cacaotales. 

6. Las semillas de cacao en lugar de dinero. 7. El lago de 
asfalto. 

B. Ponganse los pronombres en espanol en el lugar con- 

veniente: 

1. {it, to him) No dije. 2. {them, to them) Estoy enviando. 

3. {you) Vemos. 4. {them, to us) Nuestros amigos dieron. 

5. {them) Me acuerdo de. 6. {to you) Los ninos iran. 7. {to 
her) Deseo escribir. 8. {it, to us) No quieren decir. 

9. {to her, me) Hablaron, pero no dijeron nada. 10. {her) 

I Conoce Vd. ? 11. {them) Deseo conocer. 12. {them, to 

her) Den. 13. {it) Esta buscando. 14. {them) Vd. no cree. 

15. {it, to them) Digan ahora. 

C. Traduzcase al espanol: 

John Clark did not come with Louis to Mexico City, but left ^ 
him at Vera Cruz, and went to Venezuela and Colombia to visit 
some friends. They hoped to see each other ^ again soon. In 
Venezuela John visited Julian Martin whom ^ he had known for¬ 
merly at the University. They had written to each other from 5 
time to time, but had not seen each other for^everal years. Julian 
had in Venezuela a dozen relatives more or less. Upon arriving 
in Valencia, John wanted to know them, so Julian introduced him 
to them. He saw them often and talked Spanish with them. The 
children especially liked him, and would often run to ask him ques- 10 
tions about the United States. Julian was a merchant who not only 
exported cocoa to France, but also was interested in a large asphalt 
lake. John has just reached Mexico City, and with Louis is seated 
in Elizabeth’s room. Mary Anderson enters. 

Louis. — Miss Anderson, you do not know Mr. Clark, do you ^ 15 
Allow me to introduce him to you. You know that I have written 

1 separarse de. 2 verse. ^ a quien (§ 122, 2). 




62 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


to him often since I have been in Mexico. In fact, I had already 
written him a letter last night, but I had not yet sent it to him. 
Now I can read it to him. 

Mary. — I am pleased to know you, Mr. Clark. Please sit 
5 down. Elizabeth and I have just prepared some ^ chocolate. Here 
is a cup, Elizabeth; give it to him yourself, and then he cannot 
help drinking it. Louis says that men never drink it, but only 
women. Don’t give it to him. 

Louis. — Don’t drink it, John. Remember you told me the 
10 Indians use cocoa beans as money. Explain it to them. Then 
they won’t offer it to you or to me either. 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

1. conmigo. 2. hace tres dias. 3. acudir a ella. 4. no poder 
mas. 5. pasar por. 6. hacer menos calor. 7. ir en automovil. 
8. en lugar de. 9. poco a poco. 10. por consiguiente. 

E. Los verbos irregulares c/ar, saber^ y volver^ y los modismos. 

Traduzcanse: 

1. They will return to Costa Rica from time to time. 2. I 
do not believe that they know {pres, subj.) the truth. 3. She 
spoke to them again. 4. Give them to me at once. 5. Can they 
not come now and then ? 6. I learned (saber) yesterday that 

they never gave them (fern.) to their cousins. 7. We feared that 
the explorer would not return {impf. subj.). 8. There is the letter, 
give it to me again. 9. I do not believe that they know {pres, 
subj.) their lessons. 10. Again I gave him about fifteen apples. 
11. Do not give them {fern.) to her. 12. I gave the servant about 
fifty cents. 13. When shall you {pi.) return ? 14. I do not believe 
that they will return {pres, subj.) with me. 



1 Omit. 




AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


63 


EXERCISE VIII 

Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs — Formation 
of Adverbs 

82. Comparisons of inequality. — The comparative of 
inequality is regularly formed by placing mas or menos 
before the positive form of adjectives and adverbs. The 
superlative of adjectives is formed ^ by placing the definite 
article or the possessive pronoun before the comparative 
form.2 The superlative form of adverbs ^ is usually the 
same as the"^^ comparative. 

Positive Comparative Superlative 

Adjective facil mas (menos) facil el (la) mas (menos) facil 

los (las) mas (menos) faciles 

Adverb despacio mas (menos) despacio {same as comparative) 

De ese modo sera mas facil. In that way it will be easier. 
Esta leccion es la mas facil This lesson is the easiest in ^ 
del libro. the book. 

Cuando habla mas despacio, When he speaks more slowly, ^ 
le comprendo. I understand him. 

83. Four adjectives and four adverbs are compared 
irregularly: 

ADJECTIVEa 

grande mayor el (la) mayor bueno mejor el (la) mejor 

pequeno menor el (la) menor malo pbor el (la) peor 


^ The absolute superlative {not denoting any real comparison) is expressed 
by placing muy before the adjective, or by adding the suffix -isimo to it. 
It is expressed in English by very or exceedingly with the adjective. Util, 
useful, muy util or utilisimo, very {exceedingly) useful. Note that muchisimo 
(not muy mucho) is used as the absolute superlative of mucho. 

2 The sentence position of the superlative form of an adjective is regu¬ 
larly after its noun, and the accompanying article precedes the noun. 
La casa m^s grande, the largest house. 

3 The superlatives of adverbs may have the neuter article lo before 
them, in case they are followed by a word or phrase expressing possibility. 
Vino lo mas pronto posible, He came as soon as possible. 

^ After superlatives, the word in is expressed by de. 



64 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


Corresponding Adverbs 

mucho mas bien ^ mejor 

poco menos mal peor 

(a) Grande and pequeno are compared both regularly 
and irregularly. When they are compared regularly, they 
refer to size; when they are compared irregularly, they 
usually refer to age or rank. 

La pintura grande es buena, The large painting is good, 
pero la mas pequena es la but the smallest one is the 

mejor de la coleccion. best in the collection. 

Es mi hermana menor. She is my youngest sister. 

84. Spanish equivalents of the word than. — 1. The 
word than in a comparison of inequality is expressed by 

que. 

Carlos es mas pobre que su Charles is poorer than his 
hermano. brother. 

Aquel hombre tiene menos That man has less money 
dinero que su primo, than his cousin. 

2. Before cardinal numbef^^^^<m_^ expressed by de in 

affirmative statements! ^whlle que is more usual in ne 
statements. -'^^ ^ ^ ^ ^ t 

Hemos visto mas de cien We have seen more than one 
estudiantes. hundred students. 

No hay mas que diez panes There are only (no more 
en la cesta. than) ten loaves of bread 

in the basket, 

3. Before a clause, when the comparison is based upon a 
noun of the principal clause, than is del que, de la que, de 
los que, de las que, agreeing in gender and number with 
this noun. When the comparison is with the whole idea in 
the previous clause, which usually terminates in an adjective 
or an adverb, than is de lo que {invariable). 



^ Mas bien occurs with the meaning of rather. Parece perezoso mas 
bien que cansado. He seems lazy rather than tired. 




AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


65 


Tenia mas dinero del que me He had more money than he 
did. gave me. 

Me trajeron mas libros de los They brought me more books 
que me habian prometido. than they had promised me. 

Es mas fuerte de lo que creian. He is stronger than they be¬ 
lieved. 

85. Comparisons of equality. — 1. In comparing adjec¬ 
tives and adverbs, as (so) ... as is expressed by tan . . . como. 

Es tan trabajador como su He is as diligent as his sister, 
hermana. 

No leo tan bien como el. I do not read so well as he. 

2. In comparing nouns, as (so) much (many) ... as is 
expressed by tanto (-os), tanta (-as) ... como. 

Vd. no tenia tanto cafe como yo. You did not have so much 

coffee as I. 

No he comido tantas peras como I have not eaten so many 
el. pears as he. 

3. In comparing clauses, the more (less) . . . the more 

(less) is expressed by cuanto ^ mas (menos) ... tanto ^ mas 
(menos). 

Cuanto mas gana, tanto mas The more he earns, the more 
desea. he wants. 

Cuanto menos sabe, tanto mas The less he knows, the more 
debe trabajar. he ought to work. 

86. Formation of adverbs. — Many adverbs may be 
derived from adjectives by adding -mente ^ to the feminine 
form of the adjective. 

Facil, easy, facilmente, easily; rapido, rapid, rapidamente, rapidly. 

Podemos verlo facilmente We can see it easily. 

Lo haran rapidamente. They will do it rapidly. 


1 Cuanto may be replaced by mientras, and tanto may be dropped 
entirely from the second member of the comparison. Mientras m^s gana, 
mas desea. The more he earns, the more he wants. 

2 When two adverbs ending in -mente are used in succession, the last 
one only retains the -mente; the first one has the ending of the feminine 
of the adjective. Hace su trabajo rapida y facilmente, He does his work 
rapidly and easily. 



SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


VERBS 

87. Ver, to see 

Pres. Part, viendo; Past Part, visto. 

Pres. Ind. veo, ves, ve, vemos, veis, ven. 

Pres. Subj. vea, veas, vea, veamos, veais, vean. 

Impf. Ind. veia, veias, veia, veiamos, veiais, veian. 

Fut. Ind. vere, etc.; Cond. veria, etc. 

Pret. Ind. vi, viste, vio, vimos, visteis, vieron. 

Impf. Subjs. viese, etc.; viera, etc.; Fut. Subj. viere, etc. 
Imperatives ve, ved. 

88. Pensar, to think 

Pres. Part, pensando; Past Part, pensado. 

Pres. Ind. pienso, piensas, piensa, pensamos, pensais, piensan. 
Pres. Subj. piense, pienses, piense, pensemos, penseis, piensen. 
Impf. Ind. pensaba, etc.; Fut. Ind. pensare, etc.; Cond. 
pensana, etc. 

Pret. Ind. pense, pensaste, penso, pensamos, pensasteis, 
pensaron. 

Impf. Subjs. pensase, etc.; pensara, etc.; Fut. Subj. pensare, 
etc. 

Imperatives piensa, pensad. 

89. traer, to bring 

Pres. Part, trayendo; Past Part, traido. 

Pres. Ind. traigo, traes, trae, traemos, traeis, traen. 

Pres. Subj. traiga, traigas, traiga, traigamos, traigais, traigan. 
Impf. Ind. traia, etc.; Fut. Ind. traere, etc.; Cond. traeria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. traje, trajiste, trajo, trajimos, trajisteis, trajeron. 
Impf. Subjs. trajese, etc.; trajera, etc.; Fut. Subj. trajere, etc. 
Imperatives trae, traed. 


IDIOMS 

90. En vez (or lugar) de Instead of 

Comen en vez de trabajar. They are eating instead of 

working. 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


67 


91. Ser aficionado a To be fond of 

Es aficionado a la musica. He is fond of music. 


92. Cuanto antes [ 

Tan pronto como sea posible j 

Iremos cuanto antes (tan pronto como 
sea posible). ■ 


As soon as possible 

We shall go as soon as 
possible. 


EN COLOMBIA 

Colombia es un pais de montanas alias y valles fertiles 
que esta limitado al norte por el Mar Caribe y al oeste por el 
Oceano Pacifico. Tiene la mayor variedad de climas desde 
las costas calientes hast a las cordilleras cubiertas de nieve. 

Es un pais riquisimo respecto de sus miner ales, y su suelo 5 
ofrece los mas import antes productos agricolas. Pocos 
paises tienen tantas clases de minerales como Colombia. 
Proporciona cosa de la mitad del platino del mundo, mineral 
de mas valor que el oro, y tambien tiene yacimientos mas o 
menos ricos de oro, plata, hierro, plomo, carbon, azufre, lo 
cobre, etc. En Colombia se encuentran mas esmeraldas de 
las que producen todos los demas paises. El distrito de Muzo, 
a menos de cien millas al norte de Bogota, posee las minas 
mas ricas de esmeraldas. Este distrito famoso se extiende 
sobre mas de cien mil acres. 15 

El rio Magdalena es la via mas import ante de comunica- 
cion con el interior. Si el viajero piensa ir cuanto antes de 
la costa del norte a Bogota, puede hacer el viaje en hydro- 
avion en ocho o nueve horas desde Barranquilla hasta 
Girardot, puerto del rio Magdalena, una distancia de mil 20 
kilometres poco mas o menos. De Girardot a Bogota se 
viaja por tren.* De ese modo se llega mucho mas rapida y 
facilmente que en los vapores los cuales necesitan por lo menos 
ocho dias en vez de ocho horas. Naturalmente, si uno es 
aficionado al estudio de la naturaleza, le gustara viajar mas 25 
lentamente por vapor y conocer lo mejor posible la vegetacion 
y los animales que se ven desde el vapor que sube el rio. 


68 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


Cuanto mas el viajero sube el no, tanto mas fresco y mas 
agradable encuentra el clima. 

Bogota tiene la fama de ser uno de los centros mas cultos 
del continente, y se llama a menudo la Atenas de la America 
5 del Sur. La Universidad Nacional es muy concurrida. El 
observatorio astronomico es uno de los mas elevados del 
mundo y el primero que fue edificado en la zona tropical. 
El Museo de Antiguedades contiene pruebas claras de una 
civilizacion antigua mas desarrollada de lo que se cree comun- 
10 mente. Cuanto mas sabemos de aquella edad, tanto mas 
reconocemos el valor de su historia poco conocida. Por 
ejemplo, tenian una leyenda tan interesante como la de Noe, 
la de la famosa area que por cuarenta dias y otras t ant as 
noches floto sobre las aguas del Diluvio Universal. 

15 A Bogota se traen los productos de todos los climas. En 
los mercados se ven el mejor maiz, trigo, avena, y patatas 
de las mesetas al lado de los platanos y otras frutas de los 
terrenos mas calientes. Ahora proporciona Colombia mucho 
mas algodon del que antes se cultivaba alli, y hay varias 
20 fabricas grandes que tejen muy buenos pafios. No solo 
Bogota sino tambien otras muchas partes de la republica 
llegan a ser muy atractivas para los viajeros. 

A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 

guientes: 

1. El clima de Colombia. 2. Los minerales del pais. 

3. Desde la costa a Girardot en hydroavion. 4. El viaje 
en vapor. 5. El observatorio de Bogota. 6. La edad 
antigua. 7. Los mercados. 

B. (1) Pongase el espanol por than donde hay rayas: 

1. Aqm estan mas-cien libras de cafe. 2. Comian 

menos patatas-creiamos. 3. Aquellos viajeros han 

comprado mas esmeraldas-habiamos visto en la ciudad. 

4. La vida de los campesinos es mas dura-se cree comun- 

mente. 5. El comerciante tenia mucho mas sombreros 





AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


69 


- me vendio. 6. Este invierno hay menos nieve - 

cayo el ano pasado. 7. Luis no ha vendido mas-cinco 

sacos de trigo. 

(2) Formense adverbios de los adjetivos; y ponganse donde 

hay rayas: 

1. (lento) Juan come menos-que Luis. 2. (rapido) 

Leemos —— el espanol. 3. (feliz) Vieron - lo que 

habiamos hecho. 4. (facil) Cada dia vienen -. 

5. (admirable) Probaron - lo que habian dicho. 6. (di- 

ficil, malo) Los jovenes viajaban-y-. 

(3) Ponganse donde hay rayas las palabras convenientes 

que significan igualdad: 

1. Este arbol no es - grande - me dijeron. 

2. Comen-patatas —-noSotros. 3. -mas estudia- 

ban, - mas aprendian. 4. Traigo - carbon - 

necesito. 5. - menos piensan en viajar, - menos 

trabajan. 6. Luis no ve - bien - Maria. 7. Vd. 

tenia —— diner o — el. 

C. Traduzcase al espanol: 

Louis. — John, tell me as soon as possible about your trip to ‘ 
Colombia. That is easier for me than to read the guide book. The 
more I read, the less I know. I hope that you have thought of me ^ 
from time to time, and ^ brought me at least a handful of emeralds. 

I haven’t as many friends as you have ^ in South America. 5 

John. — You haven’t written as many letters as I. I haven’t, 
however, more than two or three friends in Colombia, but they are 
the best in the world. They live in Bogota, the capital of Colombia. 
Bogota is less than one hundred miles south of Muzo, a district 
exceedingly rich in emeralds. A certain rich merchant goes to the 10 
mines by airplane instead of going by train. He is fond of traveling 
by airplane because he goes so rapidly and easily. One of my friends 
gave me some imperfect stones which are not worth much, although 
they are very pretty. I shall give the best ones to your sister when 
I see ^ her again. 15 


1 en mi. 


2 Insert have. 


3 Omit. 


4 See § 150 . 



























70 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


Louis. — Don’t give them to her, give them to me. She has 
more things already than she can carry. Th^ more she gets, the 
more she wants. I should like to give them to another girl whom 
I know in my home town. 

5 John. — You are as selfish as m6st brothers. However, I shall 
give you a few of the smallest ones . . . And now I shall tell you 
something about Colombia. It not only furnishes more emeralds 
than are produced by all other countries, but also half ^ the plat¬ 
inum in 2 the world. It is also a country much richer in agri- 
10 cultural products than is commonly believed. The more we learn 
of Colombia, the more we are surprised at its importance. 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

‘ 1. mas dinero. 2. tan bien. 3. riquisimo. 4. mas de. 5. por 

tren. 6. el guia. 7. la guia. 8. un gran hombre. 9. un hombre 
grande. 10. el pobre nino. 

E. Los verbos irregulares pensar, traer^ y ver^ y los modismos. 

Traduzcanse: 

1. Our friends see that we are very fond of flowers. 2. Bring 
us our coffee as soon as possible. 3. I do not believe that they are 
thinking (pres, subj.) of what they are doing. 4. Have you seen 
what they brought ? 5. Instead of oranges, they offered us 

bananas of which we are fond. 6. I have not seen the hydroplane 
in which he brought them. 7. If you do not see it as soon as 
possible, he will not like it. 8. He feared that they had not brought 
(plupf. subj.) as much gold as he desired. 9. Instead of trying to 
learn what I think, he talks as fast as he can. 10. Mary saw the 
best fruits that we brought. 


2 de. 




1 the half of. 





AND COMPOSITION BOOK 71 


EXERCISE IX 

Possessive Adjectives and Pronouns 

93. Possessive adjectives and pronouns. — 1. The table of 
possessive adjectives is as follows: — 

Before noun After noun 


Singular Plural Singular Plural 



. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Mas. 

Fern. 


mi 

mis 

mio 

mia 

mios 

mias 

my 

tu 

tus 

tuyo 

tuya 

tuyos 

tuyas 

your (familiar, sing.) 

su 

sus 

suyo 

suya 

suyos 

suyas 

his, her, its, their. 


your (formal, sing, and pi.) 

Before or after noun 


Singular X 

Plural 


Mas. 

Fern. 

Mas. 

Fern. 


nuestro 

nuestra 

nuestros 

nuestras 

our 

vuestro 

vuestra 

vuestros 

vuestras 

-1 

your 

(familiar, pi.) 


2. The table of possessive pronouns ^ is as follows: — 


Singular Plural 


Mas. 

Fern. 

Mas. 

Fern. 



el mio 

la mia 

los mios 

las mias 

mine 

* 

el tuyo 

la tuya 

los tuyos 

las tuyas 

yours (familiar. 

sing.) 

el suyo 

la suya 

los suyos 

las suyas 

his, hers, its. 

theirs. 


yours (formal, sing, and pi.) 
el nuestro la nuestra los nuestros las nuestras ours 


el vuestro la vuestra los vuestros las vuestras yours (familiar, pi.) 

94. Agreement. — In Spanish, the possessive adjectives 
and pronouns agree with the thing possessed, and not, as 
in English, with the possessor. 

Veo mis plumas y nuestra I see my pens and our ink. 
tinta. 

El tiene sus cuellos, y yo He has his collars, and I 
tengo los mios. have mine. 


1 A possessive pronoun used with ser usually omits its article, unless 
emphatic distinction is desired. Esta caja es mia, This box is mine. 



72 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


95. A possessive adjective modifying two or more nouns 
is regularly repeated before each one. 

Nuestros panuelos y nuestras corbatas estan aqui. 

Our handkerchiefs and neckties are here. 


96. The form of the possessive adjective which precedes 
the noun occurs more frequently than the form which 
follows. The latter is used in direct address, for emphasis, 
or when in English of mine, of yours, etc. are used. 


Nuestro hijo estaba en Vera 
Cruz. 

Hija mia, no leas todo el 
tiempo. 

Un prime mio ha venido. 


Our son used to be in Vera 
Cruz. 

My daughter, do not read all 
the time. 

A cousin of mine has come. 

% 


97. Use of the definite article. — The definite article is 
commonly employed instead of the possessive adjective 
when referring to clothing or parts of the body, in case 
there is no doubt concerning the possessor. In case of 
doubt, an indirect object pronoun is used with the verb. 


,E1 nino no queria quitarse el 
sombrero. 

Carlos tiene una pluma en la 
mano. 

Me pongo los guantes. 


The child did not want to 
take off his hat. 

Charles has a pen in his 
hand. 

I am putting on my gloves. 


(a) When the object referred to is a thing in the singular 
the like of which is possessed by several individuals of a 
group, a singular noun is generally used in Spanish. 

Los ninos se lavaron la cara. The children washed their faces. 


98. Uncertainty in meaning may arise in the use of the 
possessive adjective su (sus) from the fact that the meaning 
may be his, her, its, your or their. When such uncertainty 
arises, it should be avoided by the use of either one of the 
methods indicated below: 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


73 


de el 


el lapiz 
los lapices 


de ella 
de usted 
de ellos 
de ellas 
de ustedes 


his 

her 

your, m. and f. 
their, m. 
their, f. 

your, m. and f. 


su lapiz 

(or) sus lapices 


de el 
de ella 
de usted 
de ellos 
de ellas 
de ustedes 


He visto su (el) lapiz de Vd. I have seen your pencil. 

I Donde estan las (sus) plumas Where are their pens ? 
de ellos? 


99. Uncertainty in meaning may arise in the use of the 
possessive pronouns el suyo, los suyos, la suya, and las 
suyas from the fact that any one of these forms may mean 
his, hers, its, yours, or theirs. When such uncertainty arises, 
it should be avoided by the use of the forms indicated in 
the following table: 





\ 

1. el suyo 

f 1. el ] 


ella 

2. la suya , ^ 

, substitute s 

2. la 

> de< 

usted 

3. los suyos 

1 3. los 

ellos 

4. las suyas 

[ 4. lasj 


ellas 

ustedes 


his 

hers 

yours, m. and f. 
theirs, m. 
theirs, f. 

yours, m. and f. 


Vieron nuestro cuadro y el They saw our picture and 
de ella. hers. 

Tengo mis anteojos y los de I have my spectacles and 
ellos. theirs. 


VERBS 

100. Salir, to go out. Leave 

Pres. Part, saliendo; Past Part, salido. 

Pres. Ind. salgo, sales, sale, salimos, sails, salen. 

Pres. Subj. saiga, saigas, saiga, salgamos, salgdis, salgan. 
Impf. Ind. salia, etc.; Put. Ind. saldre, etc; Cond. saldria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. sail, saliste, salio, salimos, salisteis, salieron. 
Impf. Subjs. saliese, etc.; saliera, etc.; Put. Subj. saliere, etc. 
Imperatives sal, salid. 






74 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


101. Reir, to laugh 

Pres. Part, riendo; Past Part, reido. 

Pres. Ind. no, nes, rie, reimos, reis, rien. 

Pres. Subj. ria, rias, ria, riamos, riais, nan. 

Impf. Ind. reia, etc.; Fut. Ind. reire, etc.; Cond. reiria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. rei, reiste, rio, reimos, reisteis, rieron. 

Impf. Subjs. riese, etc.; riera, etc.; Fut. Subj. riere, etc. 
Imperatives rie, reid. 

102. Sentir, to feel, regret 

Pres. Part, sintiendo; Past Part, sentido. 

Pres. Ind. siento, sientes, siente, sentimos, sentis, sienten. 
Pres. Subj. sienta, sientas, sienta, sintamos, sintms, sientan. 
Impf. Ind. sentia, etc.; Fut. Ind. sen tire, etc.; Cond. sentiria, 
etc. 

Pret. Ind. senti, sentiste, sintio, sentimos, sentisteis, sintieron. 
Impf. Subjs. sintiese, etc.; sintiera, etc.; Fut. Subj. sintiere. 
etc. 

Imperatives siente, sentid. 


IDIOMS 


103. Dejar de ( + infinitive) 
Nunca dejan de venir. 

Deje Vd. de hablarme. 

104. En cuanto a 

En cuanto a mi hermano, no 
saldra. 

105. De repente 
Salieron de repente. 


To fail to, cease to, stop 

They never fail to come. 

Stop talking to me. 

As for, concerning 

As for my brother, he will 
not leave. 

Suddenly 

They went out suddenly. 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


75 


EN PANAMA 

Panama, 15 de febrero de 19—. 

Querido amigo mio: 

Mientras tengo todavia ante los ojos las escenas de mi 
viaje de hoy por el canal de Panama, voy a escribirle a Vd. 
algunas de mis impresiones. Naturalmente, Vd. habra 
oido y leido muchisimo del canal y del trabajo de nuestros 5 
ingenieros norteamericanos, y le aseguro que todo lo escrito 
no puede dar una idea adecuada de este triunfo nuestro. 
No puede dejar de asombrar al que ve por primera vez las 
construcciones gigantescas del canal. 

Nuestro vapor pasaba eritre el rompeolas y la ciudad de IQ 
Colon cuando de repente salio el sol, iluminando esta ciudad, 
que, con su vecina Cristobal, sefiala la entrada al canal. 
Cristobal es verdaderamente la primera ciudad nuestra en 
la zona del canal, j Que cosa tan curiosa que aqm tengamos 
el nombre del gran explorador repartido entre dbs ciudades ! 15 
Cuanto mas se acercaba nuestro vapor a las esclusas de 
Gatun, tanto mas veiamos la magnitud de su construccion. 
Sus esclusas se levantan en tres escalones hasta una altura 
de 85 pies. 

Al llegar a la primera esclusa, otro vapor salia de su boca 20 
con muchos pasajeros sobre cubierta. Agitaron la mano o 
el sombrero para saludarnos, y correspondimos a sus saluta- 
ciones, aunque no los conociamos. Nuestro vapor y el de 
ellos eran de la misma linea. Cierto viajero, que estaba 
a mi lado, me pregunto, — ^ Cree Vd. que los sombreros de 25 
ellos sean de Panama ? — Aunque es posible, los sudameri- 
canos los llaman sombreros de jipijapa; tampoco los hacen 
en Panama, sino en el Ecuador y en el Peru. El mio es del 
Ecuador. — Aquel hombre rio al oir eso, y no dejo de apun- 
tarlo en un librito, porque tenia siempre una pluma en la 30 
mano para escribir todo lo nuevo, que pondria mas tarde 
en un libro suyo. 

Entramos en la primera esclusa, y en menos de quince 


76 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


minutos se lleno bastante para ponernos al nivel del agua 
de la segunda. Se abrieron con fuerza electrica las compuer- 
tas, y dos locomotoras electricas nos arrastraron lentamente 
hacia la segunda. A los pocos minutos entramos del mismo 
5 modo en la tercera, de donde salimos al lago de Gatun. 
La fuerza electrica de toda la zona del canal con sus ciudades 
se saca del desague de Gatun por el cual corre el rio Chagres 
que proporciona la mayor parte del agua del canal. 

Siento muchisimo que Vd. no haya estado conmigo, sobre 
10 todo al pasar por el Corte de Culebra donde ban tenido 
lugar tantos deslizamientos de terreno que por mucho 
tiempo se desesperaron nuestros ingenieros. Al fin bajamos 
por las esclusas de Pedro Miguel y las de Miraflores al 
nivel del Pacifico, y llegamos a Panama. Vd. que es ingeniero 
15 habria tenido mucho gusto en ver el canal con sus represas 
fuertes y sus esclusas inmensas. Algiin dia espero volver 
a verlo con Vd. 

Su afmo. amigo 
Roberto 

A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 

guientes: 

1. Los ingenieros del Canal de Panama. 2. Colon y 
Cristobal. 3. Las esclusas de Gatun. 4. Los pasajeros 
del otro vapor. 5. Los sombreros de jipijapa. 6. La 
fuerza electrica de la zona del canal. 7. El Corte de Cule¬ 
bra. 8. Panama y el Pacifico. 

B. Ponganse la expresion posesiva (adjetivo, pronombre, o 

articulo determinado) en lugar de las rayas: 

1. (m?/, yours) No veo - sombrero, pero aqui esta 

-. 2. {his, our) Hemos perdido - lapices y - 

plumas. 3. {my, hers) I Con quien salio - madre ? 

Salio con-. 4. {your, mine) - anteojos no son tan 

buenos como --. 5. {their) No deseo que salgan en 

-automovil. 6. {ours, theirs) —— musica no es tan di- 














Las esclusas de Gatun 









AMWVi 


0£-' 


1 

•t 

I 


J 
















Se abrieron las compuertas 






























AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


77 


ficil conio -. 7. {hers, his) Vd. ha visto -- cuadros 

-, pero no ha visto-cuadros -. 8. {his) El 

hablaba de la pluma que tenia en - mano. 9. {our, 

yours) - panuelos y - son del mismo tamano. 

10. {your, ours) Siento mucho que-ninos no salgan con 

-. 11. {their) Nunca se ponen ■ sombrero antes de 

salir. 12. {our, their) Los muchachos se rieron de - 

caballos, porque iban mas rapidamente en- automovil. 

13. {his) Aquel muchacho no queria lavarse -- cara y 

-manos. 14. {their) No han puesto-corbata nueva 

hoy. 15. {her, his) (j Conoee Vd. a - hermana ? Si, 

senor, y tambien conozco--. 

C. Traduzcase al espanol: 

Louis and John, instead of remaining longer in Mexico City, 
decided suddenly to ^ travel again. They are now on a steamboat 
which has just gone out of the third lock of the Panama Canal 
into Lake Gatun. John is seated on ^ deck talking with the ship’s 
doctor, an old acquaintance of his father and mother. Louis is 
standing near them with his hands in his pockets. 

John. — Get a chair, Louis, and put it near ours. Where is 
your little book W Don’t fail to write down your impressions of 
this wonderful canal with its gigantic locks, eighty-five feet or so 
high. ’^It is more interesting than I believed. The more I see of it, 
the longer I want to stay here. 

Louis. — You are much fonder of writing notes than I. Your 
l)ook is almost full, but mine has only a few sentences in it. Lend 
me your fountain pen; mine doesn’t write so well as yours. Have 
you yours in your pocket ? Wait, don’t give me yours, 1 shall use 
the Doctor’s. His is better than yours, anyway. 

{Louis jumps up suddenly and waves his hat at another ship which 
is passing them. The other ship is much larger than theirs.) 

John. — Be careful, Louis ! Stop waving your hat that way or 
you will lose that elegant Panama of yours. Dr. Brown has just 
told me that the hats which we ^ North Americans call “Panama 
hats” are called^ “jipijapa hats”,by® the South Americans and 

1 a. 2 sobre. ^ insert los. ^ los Hainan. ^ Omit. 


5 

10 

15 

20 


















78 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


are not made in Panama but in Ecuador and Peru. As for yours 
and mine, they are probably poor imitations made in the United 
States. 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

1. al llegar. 2. la mayor parte. 3. muchisimo. 4. sobre 
todo. 5. al fin. 6. volver a. 7. tener cuidado. 8. ser aficionado 
a. 9. 1492. 

E. Los verbos irregulares rdr, salir, y sentUy y los modismos. 

Traduzcanse: 

1. When shall you leave ? 2. I shall leave at a quarter after 

eight. 3. They left suddenly. 4. As for my father, he never goes 
out with us. 5. Stop laughing. 6. Suddenly she felt ill. 7. I 
fear that they will laugh {pres, subj.) at him. 8. He did not write 
anything concerning his trip. 9. I regret that Louis did not come 
{pres. perf. subj.). 10. They laughed suddenly when she stopped 
talking. 11. I leave early every day. 12. He never fails to tell 
us all that happens. 

EXERCISE X 

Demonstrative Adjectives and Pronouns — Para and Por 

106. Demonstrative adjectives and pronouns. — The 
table of demonstratives is as follows:— 

Adjectives Pronouns 



Singular 

Plural 

Singular 

Plural 

Masc. 

este 1 

estos 1 

estel this 

estos ] 

Fern. 

esta ^ this 

estas f these 

esta y one. 

estas f these 

Neut. 

-J 

—-J 

esto j this 

-J 

Masc. 

ese'l 

esos] 

esel that 

esosl 

Fern. 

esa ^ that 

esas y those 

esa one, 

esas > those 

Neut. 

-J 


eso J that 

-J 

Masc. 

aquel 1 

aquellos ] 

aquel] that 

aquellos ] 

Fern. 

aquella [ that 

aquellas those 

’ aquella ^ one. 

aquellas those 

Neut. 

- J 

-J 

aquelloj that 

- J 


(a) The masculine and feminine pronouns have a written 
accent on the stressed syllable to distinguish them visually 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


79 


from the corresponding adjectives. The neuter pronouns 
do not need accents, because there are no neuter adjectives. 


Este estudiante fue a la clase, 
pero aquel quedo en casa. 

Estas peras son mejores que 
esas. 

Esas ideas que tiene Vd. son 
buenas. 

I Que es esto ? — Es una silla. 


This student went to class, 
but that one remained at 
home. 

These pears are better than 
those. 

Those ideas which you have 
are good. 

What is this ? It is a chair. 


107. Agreement. -— Demonstrative adjectives agree with 
their nouns in gender and number and are repeated before 
each noun to which they refer. 

Estos guisantes y estas judias These peas and beans are 
son buenos. good. 

108. Meaning of adjectives. — Este means this, near the 
speaker.^ 

Ese means that, near the person spoken to, or referring 
to a subject recently mentioned.^ 

Aquel means that, remote from both speaker and person 
spoken to.^ 

Este anillo de oro es mas cos- This gold ring is more costly 
toso que ese reloj de plata. than that silver watch. 

Aquel techo es rojo. That roof is red. 

109. The masculine and feminine demonstrative pronouns 
represent nouns which have been definitely mentioned; the 
neuter pronouns (esto, eso, aquello) represent things not 
definitely mentioned, or ideas. 

I Que es aquello ? — Es una What is that ? It is a flag, 
bandera. 

No creo eso. I do not believe that (some¬ 

thing recently mentioned). 

1 The adverb aqm, here (near the speaker), corresponds to este; ahi, 
there (near the person spoken to), corresponds to ese; alli, there (remote 
from both speaker and person spoken to), corresponds to aquel. After verbs 
of motion, aca is commonly used for here, and alia for there. 



80 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


110. Meaning of pronouns. — The pronoun este means 
the latter, and aquel, the former, in contrasted clauses; este, 
the latter f comes first in the sentence, contrary to English 
usage. 

Carlos y Maria han llegado, esta con dos baules, 
y aquel con una maleta. 

Charles and Mary have arrived, the former with 
a suitease, and the latter with two trunks. 

111. The English demonstrative pronoun is usually ex¬ 
pressed in Spanish by the definite article when standing 
before a phrase beginning with de, or before a relative 
clause.^ 


Mi casa y la de mi padre estan 
en la misma calle. 

La que vio Vd. ayer es mi 
prima Dolores. 

Lo que dice es sorprendente. 


My house and that of my 
father (my father’s) are in 
the same street. 

The one (she whom) you saw 
yesterday is my cousin 
Dolores. 

What (that which) he says is 
surprising. 


112. Para, /or, in order to, etc. is used to express: (1) use, 
purpose, or destination, (2) a unit or point of future time, 
(3) proximity of an action {with infinitive). 


(1) Esta es una cuchara para 

sopa. 

Estudiamos para aprender. 

Esta silla es para Vd. 

Saldra para Mejico. 

(2) Esta leccion es para manana. 
El trabajo estara hecho para 

las dos. 

(3) Estamos para ir al teatro. 


This is a soup spoon {spoon for 
soup). 

We are studying to (in order to) 
learn. 

This chair is for you. 

He will leave for Mexico. 

This lesson is for to-morrow. 

The work will be done by two 
o’clock. 

We are about to go to the 
theater. 


113. Por, /or, hy, through, etc. is used to express: (1) for 
the sake of, (2) price or exchange, (3) time, during which. 


1 For treatment of relative pronouns, see § 122, 3, 4. 





AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


81 


time of day ^ when the hour is not given, (4) {with infinitive) 
inclination without certainty of accomplishment, (5) place 
through which, (6) manner or means, (7) physical agency ,2 
(8) cause. 


( 1 ) Lo haremos por nuestros 

amigos. 

(2) Las vendio por un peso. 

Le dare a Vd. esta pluma 

por esa. 

(3) Estarealliporcuatromeses. 
Ire manana por la noche. 

(4) Estamos por ir al teatro. 

(5) Pasamos por Valparaiso. 

(6) Viajaremos por ferrocarril. 

(7) El nino fue castigado por su 

padre. 

(8) Lo hizo por miedo. 


We shall do it for (the sake of) 
our friends. 

He sold them for one dollar. 

I shall give you this pen for 
that one. 

I shall be there for four months. 

I shall go to-morrow night. 

We are iiLfavor-of going to the 
theater. 

We passed through Valparaiso. 

We shall travel by railroad. 

The child was punished by his 
father 

He did it through fear. 


VERBS 

114. Pedir, to ask, request 

Pres. Part, pidiendo; Past Part, pedido. 

Pres. Ind. pido, pides, pide, pedimos, pedis, piden. 

Pres. Subj. pida, pidas, pida, pidamos, pidais, pidan. 

Impf. Ind. pedia, etc.; Put. Ind. pedire, etc.; Cond. pediria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. pedi, pediste, pidio, pedimos, pedisteis, pidieron. 
Impf. Subjs. pidiese, etc.; pidiera, etc.; Put. Subj. pidiere, etc. 
Imperatives pide, pedid. 

115. Servir, to serve 

Pres. Part, sirviendo; Past. Part, servido. 

Pres. Ind. sirvo, sirves, sirve, servimos, servis, sirven. 

Pres. Subj. sirva, sirvas, sirva, sirvamos, sirvais, sirvan. 

Impf. Ind. servia, etc.; Put. Ind. servire, etc.; Cond. serviria, 
etc. 


1 For definite time of day, see § 64. 

2 For the use of de with mental action, see § 133, footnote 3. 



82 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


Pret. Ind. servi, serviste, sirvio, servimos, servisteis, sirvieron. 
Impf. Subjs. sirviese, etc.; sirviera, etc.; Put. Subj. sirviere, 
etc. 

Imperatives sirve, servid. 

116. Vestir, to 'dress 

Pres. Part, vistiendo*, Past. Part, vestido. 

Pres. Ind. visto, vistes, viste, vestimos, vestis, visten. 

Pres. Subj. vista, vistas, vista, vistamos, vistais, vistan. 

Impf. Ind. vestia, etc.; Put. Ind. vestire, etc.; Cond. vestina, 
etc. 

Pret. Ind. vesti, vestiste, vistio, vestimos, vestisteis, vistieron. 
Impf. Subjs. vistiese, etc.; vistiera, etc.; Put. Subj. vistiere, 
etc. 

Imperatives viste, vestid 


IDIOMS 

117. En seguida \ 

At instante { 

Se lo enviare a Vd. en seguida 
(al instante). 

118. Tardar en (-f- infinitive) 
No tar do en llegar. 

119. A pesar de ^ 

Vinieron a pesar de lo que habian 
dicho. 


At once, immediately 
I shall send it to you at once. 

To delay in, be long in 
He was not long in arriving. 

In spite of 

They came in spite of what 
they had said. 


EN EL ECUADOR 

Quito, el Ecuador, 
24 de febrero de 19—. 

Ahora que estoy en el Ecuador, este pais tan caliente,y 
tambien tan frio, no puedo dejar de apuntar algo en cuanto 
a su geografia, porque de este modo sirve para dar una idea 
de la gran variedad de sus climas y de sus product os. Los 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 83 

de Colombia y los del Ecuador se asemejan mucho, pero 
aquel pais tiene mas minerales que este. La region lito¬ 
ral produce frutas tropicales, algodon, vainilla, cacao, cafe, 
tagua y paja toquilla para sombreros de jipijapa; la meseta 
central entre las dos grandes cordilleras tiene el clima y 
los productos de la zona templada; el oriente en la cuenca 
del Amazonas produce caucho. 

En Guayaquil, puerto donde hacen escala los vapores 
grandes, me he parado varios dias a pesar del calor, para 
pedir informes de su comercio. El cacao, sombreros de 
jipijapa y tagua parecen sus exportaciones mas importantes. 
A1 salir de Guayaquil para Quito, he tenido que pasar por 
el rio Guayas a la ciudad de Duran para ir por ferrocarril. 
Aquel dia no estaba por viajar por la manana, pero sabia 
que a pesar de eso tendria que llegar para las ocho de la 
manana. Habia que tomar el tren que sale a las ocho y media 
porque no hay tren por la tarde. 

Me vesti bastante temprano, y estaba para salir cuando 
cierto conocido mio acudio de repente pidiendome que 
aceptase de regalo un hermoso sombrero de jipijapa que 
habia comprado especialmente para mi. Dijo que aquel 
me serviria durante varios veranos. Anadio que no solo 
serviria de recuerdo del Ecuador, sino tambien de reclame 
de uno de sus productos mas importantes. Le di mil gracias 
por su regalo, y no tarde en salir, pero llegamos ta de a 
Duran. Creia que el tren estaba para salir; por eso pedi 
al mozo que llevaba mis maletas que corriese conmigo a la 
taquilla. Lo hizo por ayudarme; sin embargo, el tren tardo 
veinte minutos en salir, y aquello me sirvio para ir a comprar 
una revista y un periodico. 

En el tren lei en la revista un buen articulo sobre la tagua. 
Esas nueces se obtienen de cierta palmera que crece sin 
cultivo en los bosques por donde andan los recogedores 
indios. Estos las venden en los puertos grandes por un 
precio modico para ganar la vida. Estas nueces sirven 
para hacer botones, y por lo general los norteamericanos 


5 

10 

15 

20 

25 

30 

35 


84 SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 

se visten de trajes con botones hechos de las nueces blancas 
de tagua. 

El tren que va a Quito tiene otra locomotora mas po- 
derosa al llegar a las montanas. No pude dejar de admi- 
5 rar el gran triunfo de la ingenieria en el ferrocarril que en 
la Nariz del Diablo sube por un zigzag de mil pies en‘ muy 
corta distancia. Este ferrocarril fue construido por ingenieros 
expertisimos. Me asombraron los hermosos picos de Coto¬ 
paxi y Chimborazo; aquel es un volcan activo y este queda 
10 cubierto de nieve. Aqui en Quito hay mucho de interes, 
pero lo que mas me gusta es el observatorio, desde el cual 
he visto las constelaciones de dos hemisferios. 

A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 

guientes: 

1. El clima del Ecuador. 2. Las tres regiones del pais. 
3. El comercio de Guayaquil. 4. El regalo del sombrero 
de jipijapa. 5. La llegada a Duran y la salida del tren. 
6. La tagua. 7. El ferrocarril que sube hasta Quito. 
8. El observatorio. 

B. (1) Traduzcanse las palabras en parentesis y ponganse en 

lugar de las rayas: 

1. {these, those) - manzanas son muy duras, pero 

-parecen buenas. 2. {this, that) - es mas costoso 

que-. 3. {this, that) -algodon y-cafe vinieron 

del Ecuador. 4. {the latter, the former) Luis y su hermana 

acaban de llegar, -esta cansada, pero-quiere tra- 

bajar. 5. {that, this) ^ Que es-? No se, pero-es 

una caja. 6. {those, these, this) -ideas son mejores que 

- en-revista. 7. {that) -tren tarda en llegar. 

8. {those) -maletas eran grandes. 9. {these, those) - 

regains me gustaban mas que-. 10. {those, these) - 

sillas cuestan menos que — 



















AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


85 


(2) Pongase por o para en vez de las rayas: 

1. Quedaron en Espana - aprender el idioma. 

2. Llegaremos manana-la tarde. 3. Los paquetes son 

- nuestros primos. 4. Los sombreros sirven - pro- 

tegernos del sol. 5. Se dice qiie esta es la leccion - 

jueves. 6. Este hombre fue elegido - el pueblo. 

7. (j Donde esta el vaso-leclie ? 8. Iremos-tren. 

9. Los compraron-cinco pesos. 10. Este cafe es- 

Vd. 11. Me daran otro vestido-este. 12. Ya estamos 

-salir. 

C. Traduzcase al espanol: 

Louis and John are about to leave the steamer in order to go to 
a hotel in Guayaquil. The former has his hat in his hand, and is 
carrying his suitcase and a bag of fruit. The latter also is carrying a 
suitcase as well as a package of newspapers and magazines. In 
spite of all that, he is trying to write down from time to time some 5 
notes in his notebook. They must go by boat to Duran in order 
to go from there by railroad to Quito. Louis, through laziness, 
is in favor of going in the morning, but John wants to leave at once. 

Dr. Brown. — Listen, my friends, why don’t you remain on 
board to lunch instead of going to the hotel ? '^Although the captain 10 
says that the engineer will not be long in getting ready to go, I 
don’t believe that. We shall be here for two hours at least. You 
will have time enough to reach Duran by three o’clock. 

Louis. — Thank you very much. Doctor Brown, but John 
wants to set out at once for Duran. We can buy some ^ more fruit 15 
in Guayaquil and lunch there. These bananas are not now very 
good, and those near you are not much better. 

John. — What you say concerning the bananas surprises me, 
Louis. Those which ^ I ate yesterday afternoon were delicious. 
Thank you all the same for your invitation. Doctor. 20 

Dr. Brown. — Don’t mention it, John. I hope that you will have 
a good time. Louis, here are two letters for you, which the captain 
gave me when I was about to leave his cabin. He told me not to 
fail ^ to give them to you. It is evident that this one was written by 
a woman, that one by a man. I know which one you will read first. 25 


1 Omit. 


2 Los que. 


Impf. subj. 














86 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

1. por la manana. 2. alii. 3. por Nueva York. 4. tener que. 
5. dar mil gracias. 6. divertirse bien. 7. en vez de. 8. en 
cuanto a. 9. poco mas o menos. 

E. Los verbos irregulares pedir, servir^ y vestir^ y los modismos. 

Traduzcanse: 

1. They ask that all should go {pres, suhj.) to-morrow morning. 
2. We shall not be long in dressing. 3. In spite of receiving those 
letters, he failed to answer. 4. We do not ask for that coffee 
which you have. 5. They dressed at once. 6. I have just asked 
him to study.^ 7. Instead of doing that for his sister, he left by 
train. 8. This serves its purpose well. 9. Ask them to give 
{pres, suhj.) the Panama hats to us. 10. They asked the boys to 
run {impf. suhj.) with them. 11. They were not long in selling 
the cotton. 12. I do not believe that they will dress {pres, suhj.) 
immediately. 13. What you saw served to teach you a lesson. 


EXERCISE XI 


Relative and Interrogative Pronouns, Adjectives, and 

Adverbs 


120. Relative ^ expressions. — The table of relatives is as 
follows: — 


que (invariable) 
el cual, los cuales 
la cual, las cuales 
el que, los que 
la que, las que 
cuyo, cuyos 
cuya, cuyas 
cuanto, cuantos 
cuanta, cuantas 
quien, quienes 


who, which, that 


who, which 


whose, of which 


persons 

or 

things 


all that, all those who, as 
many {much) as 

who persons only 


1 that he study. 

2 Relative and interrogative pronouns referring to persons (not que), 
when used as direct objects of verbs, require the preposition a the same as 
nouns. See § 38. Cori'ozco a los que hablaron espanol, I know those who 
spoke Spanish, i A quien vio Vd? Whom did you see? 









w 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 87 


lo cual (invariable) which 
lo que (invariable) which, what {that which) 
donde (invariable) in which {where) things only 


I whole idea 


121. Interrogative ^ expressions. — The table of inter- 
rogatives is as follows: — 


I que ? 2 (invariable) 

I cual ? I cuales ? 

cuanto ? 2 ^ cuantos ? 1 
I cuanta ? i cuantas ? / 

I quien ? i quienes ? 

I de quien? i de quienes? 

I donde ? i cuando ? i como ? 


what ? 

which? which one? 
how much? how many? 


adjectives 

or 

pronouns 


who ? 1 - 

of whom? whose? | only 

where? when? how? adverbs 


(Note that an accent is used to distinguish visually the 
interrogatives.) 


122. Uses of relatives:^ — I. Que is used more fre¬ 
quently than the other relatives, referring to persons or 
things, as the subject or object of a verb. (As the object 
of a preposition quien instead of que is used for persons.) 


El hombre que vino ayer es 
mi hermano. 

He visto las cartas que Vd. 
escribio. 


The man who came yesterday 
is my brother. 

I have seen the letters which 
you wrote. 


2. Quien is used for persons, principally after preposi¬ 
tions. Sometimes it includes its antecedent and means he 
who, or is used for who after a clause the sense of which is 
complete. 


El estenografo de quien Vd. 
ha hablado acaba de llegar. 

Quien estudia aprende. 

He encontrado a mi prime, 
quien me lo ha dicho. 


The stenographer of whom 
you have spoken has just 
arrived. 

He who studies learns. 

I have met my cousin, who 
has told me so. 


1 See note 2 page 86. 

2 Que and cuanto are used also in exclamations j Que bien habla Vd.! 
How well you speak ! j Cuanto me alegro ! How glad I am! 

3 The relative pronoun is never omitted in Spanish as it frequently is 
in English. El periodico que he leido, The newspaper {which) I have read. 




« 


88 SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 

3. El cual and el que,^ since they vary for gender and 
number, are used instead of que or quien to avoid ambiguity, 
particularly when the antecedent and relative are widely 
separated. They are used also for emphasis, and after 
prepositions of more than one syllable." 

El hijo de la Sra. Navarro, el cual esta en la ciudad, vendra pronto. 

Mrs. Navarro’s son, who is in town, will come soon. 

No he visto hoy al dueno de la casa, el cual es muy simpatico. 

I have not seen to-day the owner of the house, who is very congenial. 

I Donde esta la silla sobre la cual puse mi sobretodo ? 

Where is the chair on which I put my overcoat ? 

4. Lo cual and lo que ^ are used to refer to a whole idea, 
not to a definite noun. 

Mi profesor habla despacio, My professor speaks slowly, 
lo cual me gusta. which I like. 

Leimos lo que han escrito. We read what they have 

written. 


5. Cuyo is a relative adjective, which must directly pre¬ 
cede the noun it modifies, and which must agree with it in 
gender and number. 

Preferimos al comerciante cuyos precios son modicos. 

We prefer the merchant whose prices are moderate. 

Alli esta la senora cuyo paraguas halle. 

There is the lady whose umbrella I found. . 

6. Cuanto is used both as a pronoun and as an adjective, 
and varies for gender and number. 

Mi amigo hizo cuanto pudo. My friend did all that he 

could. 

Cuantos estaban alli murie- All those who were there died, 
ron. 


1 For the use of el que as a demonstrative pronoun, see § 111. 

2 For the use of lo que as a demonstrative pronoun, see § 111. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


89 


7. Donde, en donde, de donde, and a donde, may be used 
as relative adverbs. 

' Este es el pueblo (en) donde yo vivia. 

This is the village in which I used to live. 

Pronto veremos la escuela a donde vamos. 

We shall soon see the school to which we are going. 


123. Uses of interrogatives. — Interrogative pronouns, 
adjectives, and adverbs are used both in direct and in 
indirect questions. 


I Que dijeron los ninos? 

I Que cosa es esta? 

Aqui estan varies cuadros. 
i Sabemos cual comprar ? 

I Cuantas manzanas habia en 
el plato ? 

Se quienes son. 

I De quien es este abanico ? 

I Donde, cuando y como 
murio ? 


What did the children say ? 

What thing is this ? 

Here are several pictures. 

Do we know which one to 
buy.? 

How many apples were there 
on the plate ? 

I know who they are. 

Whose fan is this .? 

Where, when and how did he 
die ? 


VERBS 

124. Seguir, to follow 

Pres. Part, siguiendo; Past. Part, seguido. 

Pres. Ind. sigo, sigues, sigue, seguimos, seguis, siguen. 

Pres. Subj. siga, sigas, siga, sigamos, sigdis, sigan. 

Impf. Ind. seguia, etc.; Put. Ind. seguire, etc.; Cond. segiiiria, 
etc. 

Pret. Ind. segui, seguiste, siguio, seguimos, seguisteis, siguieron. 
Impf. Subjs. siguiese, etc.; siguiera, etc.; Put. Subj. siguiere, 
etc. 

Imperatives sigue, seguid. 

125. Morir, to die 

Pres. Part, muriendo; Past. Part, muerto. 

Pres. Ind. muero, mueres, muere, morimos, moris, mueren. 
Pres. Subj. muera, mueras, muera, muramos, murais, mueran. 


90 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


Impf. Ind. moria, etc.; Fut. Ind. morire, etc.; Cond. moriria, 
etc. 

Pret. Ind. mori, moriste, murio, morimos, moristeis, murieron. 

Impf. Subjs. muriese, etc.; muriera, etc.; Fut. Subj. muriere, 
etc. 

Imperatives muere, morid. 

126. Conocer, to know 

Pres. Part, conociendo; Past Part, conocido. 

Pres. Ind. conozco, conoces, conoce, conocemos, conoceis, 
conocen. 

Pres. Subj. conozca, conozcas, conozca, conozcamos, conozcais, 
conozcan. 

Impf. Ind. conocia, etc.; Fut. Ind. conocere, etc.; Cond. 
conoceria, etc. 

Pret. Ind. conoci, conociste, conocio, conocimos, conocisteis, 
conocieron. 

Impf. Subjs. conociese, etc.; conociera, etc.; Fut. Subj. cono- 
ciere, etc. 

Imperatives conoce, conoced. 


IDIOMS 


127. Echar de menos 


To miss, feel the lack of 


Echamos de menos los gozos del We miss the pleasures of the 


campo. 


country. 


128. Dar con 


To happen upon, meet 
I happened upon (met) them this 


Di con ellos esta manana. 


morning. 



Meanwhile 


Mientras tanto (entretanto) hablabamos de las minas. ' 
Meanwhile we were talking of the mines. 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


91 


EN EL PERU 

El Peru es uno de los paises mas montafiosos del mundo. 
El que conoce esta republica desde la costa hasta la fron- 
tera oriental sabe bien cuantos climas y que variedad de 
productos se encuentran. La region de la costa recibe muy 
pocas Iluvias, de lo cual resulta que se perderian las cosechas 
agricolas sin el riego usual de que se sirven los labradores. 
La region mas fria es la que sigue las cordilleras del interior 
en las cuales hay minas riquisimas de cobre, plata, etc. A1 
bajar de las cordilleras al este, el clima no tarda en llegar 
a ser humedo y caliente, lo^^e ayuda a producir frutas 
tropicales, goma, y plantas medicinales. En esta region esta 
Iquitos, ciudad hasta donde Began vapores desde el Oceano 
Atlantico, los cuales suben el Amazonas pasando por el 
Brasil. 

Quien viaja en el Peru da con extensas ruinas antiguas de 
una raza vencida. Por alii penetraron los conquistadores 
espafioles que siguieron los caminos construidos por los 
indios, quienes ya tenian una civilizacion muy desarrollada, 
la que ha dejado ruinas que asombran por su perfeccion y 
su tamano. ^ Quien sabra como y cuando construyeron 
aquellos monumentos ? j Cuantos hombres debieron traba- 
jar para edificarlos ! Aquellos templos y fortalezas, cuyas 
piedras grandes quedan todavia tan estrechamente unidas, 
y que no echan de menos el cemento, asombran al que los 
considere. Los conquistadores quitaron muchisimo oro a 
los incas y entretanto los subyugaron. Murieron muchos 
durante la conquista. 

Lima, capital del pais, Arequipa, metropoli del sur, y el 
Cuzco, capital antigua de los incas, ofrecen al viajero escenas 
de donde es posible conocer tanto los tiempos pasados como 
los presentes. En el Cuzco los llamas cargados que los indios 
conducen por las calles entre ruinas incaicas, las que que¬ 
dan casi intactas en algunos sitios, nos muestran el espiritu 
antiguo. Con las campanas de sus muchas iglesias Are- 


5 

10 

15 

20 

25 

30 


92 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


quipa nos habla con elocuencia del poder de la fe cristiana. 
Vemos la importancia de la educacion en la vida de la nacidn 
en Lima, si visitamos la Universidad de San Marcos, que 
es famosa por ser la primera universidad establecida en las 
5 Americas. 

A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 

guientes: 

1. La region de la costa con el riego. 2. La region fria 
con los minerales. 3. La region calida y humeda del este. 

4. La eivilizacion antigua de los incas. 5. Las tres eiudades 
mas importantes del pais. 6. La universidad mas antigua 
de las Americas. 

B. (1) Ponganse en vez de las rayas los relatives convenientes: 

1. {whom) Los hombres - conocimos no Iq dijeron. 

2. {that) Los sombreros —- compraron eran buenos. 

3. {the one who) No vi-\|iajaba en el Peru. 4. {He who) 

- trabaja adelanta. 5. {that) No he leido las eartas 

- Vd. trajo. 6. {all that) Haran - sea posible. 

7. {whose) La muchaeha - padre murio no volvio a la 

escuela. 8. {in which) Aquel pais - viviamos es muy 

interesante. 9. {what) No oi-dijeron. 10. {who) La 

madre de Luis,-esta enferma, no puede salir. 11. {which) 

Vainos muy lentamente,-no nos gusta. 

(2) Ponganse en vez de las rayas los interrogatives con¬ 
venientes : 

1. iJVhat) (i- hicieron ? 2. (Who) l - vinieron ? 

5. {How many) -eiudades han visitado ? 4. {Which) 

d- profesor vio Vd. ? 5. {Who) No se -es. 

6. {How) I - murieron ? 7. {When) i - paso por la 

calle ? 8. {Whose) ^ -era la eorbata blanca ? 9. {What) 

i -diremos ? 10. (Whom) ^ -siguio ? 

C. Traduzcase al espanol: 

Elizabeth Miller, Louis’ sister, who is still in Mexico City, is 
seated in her room. She has in her hand a letter which she has just 






















La Catedral de Lima 









SK'iy®*!': 


Ifc *• **':• -tV;....' . •;*, 




|:i; J 


PS 

^1 

‘•aa 






•^•1i 

iSs 

>5:> ^••...'> • .*; 





























Un then de llamas 




















AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


93 


received from John Clark. She is reading ^ what it contains to 
Margaret Ordonez, the young lady whose brother used to visit 
Louis, when the latter was in the city. Meanwhile, Mary Anderson 
enters, and begins to talk rapidly. 

Mary. — Elizabeth, I have just met a handsome man in the 
courtyard who was wearing a ^ uniform. ^Do you know who he is ? 
What is he 'doing here ? Is he a soldier ? Whom is he visiting ? 

Elizabeth. — Stop talking a minute, and I shall do all I can 
to ® answer your ^questions. The man whom you saw is Captain 
James Ordonez, Margaret’s brother, who has just arrived from 
Tampico to visit her. But stop thinking so much about military 
men. Of course, that is because now you are studying ^ Mexican 
history. Look ! don’t you see those letters on the table ? 

Mary. — Which are mine ? When did they come How glad 
I am to ^ see them ! I was telling you a ^ few days ago how much 
I missed ^ letters from our friends. 

Elizabeth. — Do you want to hear what John writes .? He gives 
many facts concerning life in Peru ® which are very interesting. 
He says that he who travels in Peru will see many temples and 
old ruins whose great stones still remain joined closely together. 
He says also that the Indians have llamas which carry heavy 
loads. Do you know what the word 11-a-m-a-s means What are 
they, and from where do they come ? 

Mary. — They are a sort of camel or goat, I don’t know which. 
I wish I knew ^ all that John does. How many countries he must 
have ^ visited, and how many things he must know ! ^ 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

1. ^ a quien ? 2. cuanto me alegro. 3. en donde. 4. mien- 

tra-s tanto. 5. en seguida. 6. dar con. 7. buen tiempo. 8. haga 
Vd. el favor de. 9. dejar de.. 

E. Los verbos irregulares seguir, morir, y conocer, y los modis- 

mos. Traduzcanse: 

1. The poor people died immediately. 2. I do not believe that 
they will follow {ipres. subj.) us. 3. Do you (pi.) know those girls ? 
4. He missed his friends. 5. Meanwhile they offered us coffee. 


1 § 169. 2 Omit. 3 por. 4 de. & Insert las. ® Peruvian. ^ Quisiera 

saber. « § 45. 


5 

10 

15 

20 

25 



94 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


6. Where did you happen upon Mr. Valdes 7. Didn’t you know 
him before ? 8. I miss Louis with whom I used to go to the muse¬ 
ums. 9. I doubt that they know {pres, subj.) the merchant. 
10. Do you believe that he will die {pres, subj.) ? 11. I do not 
know that lady but they say that she is very congenial. 12. Mean¬ 
while let us read the newspaper that we have. 


EXERCISE XII 

Reflexive Verbs — Mismo — Passive Voice 

130. Reflexive .verbs are conjugated like the following 
model: — 

Levantarse, to rise, get up 
Present Indicative 
yo me levanto 
tu te levantas 
el, ella, Vd. se levanta 
nosotros nos levantamos 
vosotros os levantais 
ellos, ellas, Vds. se levantan 

Impf. Ind., yo me levantaba, etc. 

Pret. Ind., yo me levante, etc. 

Put. Ind., yo me levantare, etc. 

CoND. Ind., yo me levantana, etc. 

Present Participle, levantandose 

Imperative Constructions 

Familiar Speech Formal Speech 

Singular Plural Singular Plural 

Imperative Subjunctive 

levantate . levantaos levantese Vd. levantense Vds. 

Subjunctive levantemonos 

no te levantes no os levanteis no se levante Vd. no se levanten Vds. 


Present Perfect Indicative 
yo me he levantado 
tu te has levantado 
el, ella, Vd. se ha levantado 
nosotros nos hemos levantado 
vosotros os habeis levantado 
ellos, ellas, Vds. se han levantado 

Pres. Subj., yo me levante, etc. 
-se Impf. Subj., yo me levantase, 
etc. 

-ra Impf. Subj., yo me levantara, 
etc. 

Put. Subj., yo me levantare, etc. 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


95 


131. Equivalents of English constructions — The reflexive 
verbs are used in Spanish as the equivalents of the following 
English constructions: — 

1. Reflexive verbs. (Spanish like English.) 

Me lavo ahora. I am washing myself now. 

Se expusieron al peligro. They exposed themselves to 

the danger. 

2. Reciprocal verbs. (Spanish like English.) 

Nos escribiremos cada se- We shall write to each other 
mana. every week. 

Se culpan (los unos a los They blame one another, 
otros).’^ 

S. Simple {non-reflexive) verbs'^ (in English). 

Los soldados se atreven a ir. The soldiers dare to go. 

Me queje de lo que habian I complained of what they 
hecho. had done. 

4. Passive voice (in English). 

Eso no puede hacerse. That cannot be done. 

El espanol se habla aqm.^ Spanish is spoken here. 

(a) The English impersonal construction is expressed by 
the reflexive in Spanish. 

Se dice que habra poca nieve. It is said that there will be 

little snow. 

Se cree que vendran. It is believed that they will 

come. 

Se me figura que es verdad. It seems to me that it is true. 

{b) If the subject of a verb in the passive {in English) 
refers to a deflnite person or persons, it may be expressed 


1 If necessary for the sake of clearness, el uno al otro, etc., may be added. 

2 Some simple verbs acquire a new meaning when used reflexively. Ir, 
to go, irse, to go away; dormir, to sleep, dormirse, to fall asleep; acostar, 
to put to bed, acostarse, to go to bed. 

® But: Aqui se habla espanol {without the article). 



96 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


as the direct or indirect object of a reflexive verb (in singular 
only) in Spanish. 


Se ve a los ninos. 

Se les ve distintamente. 


Se me dice. 


The children are seen. (One 
sees the children.) 

They are seen distinctly. 
(One sees them distinctly.) 
I am told. 


132. Mismo, -a, -os, -as, self, is used to emphasize the 
subject or object of a verb. 

Yo mismo lo dije a Carlos. I myself told it to Charles. 

Lo dieron a Maria misma.’^ They gave it to Mary herself. 

133. The Spanish passive voice {infrequently used). — 
The passive voice in Spanish is formed by the verb ser ^ 
followed by the past participle, which agrees in gender and 
number with the subject. 

Este libro fue escrito por ^ Perez Galdos. 

This book was written by Perez Galdos. 

Somos respetados de ^ nuestros amigos. 

We are respected by our friends. 

VERBS 


134. Acostarse, to go to bed 

Pres. Part, acostandose; Past Part, acostado. 

Pres. Ind. me acuesto, te acuestas, se acuesta, nos acostamos, 
os acostais, se acuestan. ^ 

Pres. Subj. me acueste, te acuestes, se acueste, nos acostemos, 
os acosteis, se acuesten. 

Impf. Ind. me acostaba, etc.; Fut. Ind. me acostare, etc.; 
CoND. me acostaria, etc. 

Pret. Ind. me acoste, te acostaste, se acosto, nos acostamos, 
os acostasteis, se acostaron. 


1 When mismo means same, it precedes the noun. Estamos estudiando 
en la misma universidad, We are studying in the same university. 

2 For the use of estar with past participles, see § 14, 4. 

3 By is usually expressed by por in the passive construction, but de 
nfay be used after some verbs which denote mental action. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


97 


Impf. Subjs. me acostase, etc.; me acostara, etc.; Put. Subj. 
me acostare, etc. 

Imperatives acuestate, acostaos. 

135. Conducir, to conduct 

Pres. Part, conduciendo; Past Part, conducido. 

Pres. Ind. conduzco, conduces, conduce, conducimos, conducis, 
conducen. 

Pres. Subj. conduzca, conduzcas, conduzca, conduzcamos, con- 
duzcais, conduzcan. 

Impf. Ind. conducia, etc.; Put. Ind. conducire, etc.; Cond. 
conduciria, etc. 

Pret. Ind. conduje, condujiste, condujo, condujimos, condu- 
jisteis, condujeron. 

Impf. Subjs. condujese, etc.; condujera, etc.; Put. Subj. con- 
dujere, etc. 

Imperatives conduce, conducid. 


136. Jtigar, to 'play 

Pres. Part, jugando; Past Part, jugado. 

Pres. Ind. juego, juegas, juega, jugamos, jugais, juegan. 

Pres. Subj. juegue, juegues, juegue, juguemos, jugueis, 
jue^^. 

Impf. Ind. jugaba, etc.; Put. Ind. jugare, etc.; Cond. jugaria, 
etc. 

Pret. Ind. jugue, jugaste, jugo, jugamos, jugasteis, jugaron. 
Impf. Subjs. jugase, etc.; jugara, etc.; Put. Subj. jugare, etc. 
Imperatives juega, jugad. 


IDIOMS 


137. Tratarse de 

Se trata del gobierno del pais. 

138. Prestar atencion 
Preste Vd. atencion cuando hablo. 
138. De buena {mala) gana 

Volvimos de buena gana a la 
ciudad. 


To be a question of, deal with 

It is a question of the govern¬ 
ment of the country. 

To pay attention 

Pay attention when I talk. 

Willingly (unwillingly), 
gladly 

We returned willingly to the 
city. 


98 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


EN CHILE 

Santiago de Chile, 
28 de marzo de 19—--. 

i Cuantos cambios de clima y de vida dentro de pocos 
dias ! Hace diez dias que en Bolivia me encontre en un 
vapor en el gran lago de Titicaca, casi del tamano del lago 
Erie, a una altura de mas de dos millas sobre el nivel del 
5 mar, en la meseta mas alt a de las Americas. Se veian mon- 
tanas cuyas faldas quedan cubiertas de nieve. Cuando 
yo comia se me dijo que el chuno o patatas congeladas for- 
maba una parte del alimento. Yo mismo me quejaba del 
> frio, sobr^todo cuando me atrevia a mirar las montanas. 

10 Cuatro dias mas tarde estuve entre las minas de Potosi, 
de donde se ban sacado miles de millones de pesos de plata 
y de estaiio. Ahora se puede comprender bien el dicho 
espanol « Ese hombre vale un Potosi », lo cual se dice al 
hablar de un hombre riqmsimo. 

15 Una noche me acoste en un tren que salia para Chile, 
fuimos bajando todita la noche, y al dia siguiente me des- 
perte en un distrito muy arido en el cual no se veian arboles 
ni hierba. De alii se saca el salitre, producto chileno de gran 
importancia, que se exporta de Iquique y de otros puertos a 
20 todas partes del mundo. 

En el vapor que nos condujo por el oceano a Valparaiso 
ya no se trataba de montanas, llamas, y minerales, sino que 
se divertia, o se hablaban los pasajeros de los gozos de San¬ 
tiago que pronto verian. Se me figura que el puerto de Val- 
25 paraiso es uno de los mas activos que jamas he visto. Alii 
se ven buques de todos los paises del mundo. 

En Santiago presto mucha atencion a las hermosas aveni- 
das plantadas de arboles, en las cuales me paseo de buena 
gana. Sobre todo me gusta pasearme en la Alameda que 
30 se llama la Avenida de las Delicias, la cual se extiende a una 
distancia de cuatro millas desde el parque de Santa Lucia 
que esta en el centro de la ciudad. En esta avenida ancha 




Un vapor en el lago Titicaca 
















V 



< 

0 

H 

12 

< 

zn 

Q 

w 

p 

0 

W 
























AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


99 


de seiscientos pies se hallan cuatro hileras de arboles 
grandes, tranvias a cada lado, paseos para automoviles, y 
aceras anchas. De vez en cuando se ven estatuas de 
hombres distinguidos: O’Higgins, Vicuna Mackenna, los 
Amunategui, el libertador San Martin, etc., todos los cuales 5 
son muy amados de los cliilenos. 

Desde lo alto del cerro del parque de Santa Lucia se ven 
claramente todo el alcance de la capital, los llanos fertiles de 
alrededor, y si es la bora de ponerse el sol, los Andes al 
este con matices rosados en las cumbres nevadas. El parque lo 
mismo es una maravilla de hermosura. 

A. Hdganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 

guientes: 

1. El lago de Titicaca. 2. Las minas de Potosi. 3. La 
region del salitre. 4. En el vapor. 5. Las avenidas de 
Santiago. 6. Las estatuas de los hombres distinguidos. 

7. La vista desde el parque. 

B. (1) Traduzcanse las formas siguientes del verbo irse: 

1. We shall go away. 2. Did they go away ? 3. I go 

away. 4. That they may g?away {'pres. subj.). 5. They 
would go away. 6. I went away. 7. Are you going away ? 

(2) Traduzcanse al ingles las frases siguientes: 

1. Se van todos los dias. 2. No se les habla a menudo. 

3. No creo que se acuesten ahora. 4. Se me dijo que han 
vuelto. 5. Vds. no se culparan. 6. Aqui se habla ingles. 

7. No se queje Vd. tanto. 8. Se lavaron la cara y las manos. 

9. Nos levantariamos. 10. Eso no se hard. 11. Me ire en 
seguida. 12. Nos hablaremos en espanol. 

■» 

C. Traduzcase al espanol: 

John and Louis are in a rooming house in Santiago which is ^ in 
the center of the city. John has seated himself near a large window 
from which can be seen broad sidewalks and streets filled with ^ 


1 hallarse. 


2de. 



100 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


automobiles and street cars. The two friends had gone to bed 
late the night before, but decided to get up early in order to go 
walking while it was cool. They have been told that it is quite 
warm in the middle of the day. John has already washed his hands 
5 and face and shaved himself. Louis is dressing slowly, and is 
complaining about the haste of his friend. 

John. — Hurry up, Louis, and put on your coat. Stop looking 
at yourself in the mirror, and don’t pay so much attention to your 
clothes. We are not going to call on a girl, but to look for something 
10 to 1 eat. I was told last night of a good restaurant in which they 
serve good meals that are not costly. 

Louis. — Let’s go there; I shall like that too. Here people 
believe that every ^ North American is as rich as ^ a “Potosi.” That 
is what a very rich man is called in this part of the world. 

15 John. —- Well, don’t complain of everything you meet ^ while 

you are traveling.^ "Come on now; I want to take a walk on the 
Alameda, and see the statues of O’Higgins and of the other Chileans 
who are greatly® beloved by their compatriots. - Finally we shall 
go to Santa Lucia Park, from which they say one can see the Andes 
20' if there are no clouds. 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

1. se me dice. 2. otro vapor. 3. se ven. 4. prestar atencion 
a. 5. se dice. 6. me llamo. 7. entretanto. 8. tardar en. 

9. este . . . ese. 10. saber . . . conocer. 

E. Los verbos irregulares acostarse^ conducir^ y jugar^ y los 

modismos. Traduzcanse: 

1. He paid attention when he was playing. 2. She always used 
to go to bed willingly. 3. It is a question of conducting things 
well. 4. When he no longer pays attention (pres, subj.), they will 
play. 5. It was not a question of traveling then. 6. He goes to 
bed unwillingly. 7. It is believed that he will conduct them. 
8. I am told that they play often. 9. I myself played twice. 

10. Go to bed now. 11. They conducted the government well. 
12. When she paid attention, she learned a great deal. 


1 que. 


2 todo. 


3 valer. 


^ Use reflexive. 


muy. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


101 


EXERCISE XIII 


The Subjunctive (I) — Sequence of Tenses 


140. Use of the subjunctive: In noun clauses.^ — The 
subjunctive mood is used in a subordinate clause whq|i^ 
there is uncertainty in the mind of the speaker.*^ ^lie m-* 
dicative, on the contrary, implies certainty in the mind of 
the speaker. The subjunctive is used in Spanish in many 
instances where English uses the infinitive or the indicative. 
The subjunctive is used in noun clauses,^ when the subject 
of the dependent clause is different from that of the principal 
clause,^ after: (1) volitional verbs; (2) emotional verbs; 
(3) verbs of doubt, denial, and interrogaticn; and (4) im¬ 
personal expressions not indicating certainty. 

1. After volitional verbs (command,^ desire, permission, 
prohibition, preference, advice, etc.). 


Me manda que escriba la 
leccion. 

Quiero que Vd. me traiga un 
vaso de agua. 

Permitio que fuesemos con 
ellos. 


He orders me to write the 
lesson. 

I want you to bring me a 
glass of water. 

He permitted us to go with 
them. 


2. After emotional verbs (joy, sorrow, fear, hope,^ sur 


prise, etc.). 

Mealegro (de) que Vds. ha- 
yan venido. 

Siento que ella se vaya tan 
pronto. 

Temieron que lo hiciesemos. 


I am glad that you have 
come. 

I am sorry that she is going 
away so soon. 

They feared that we might do it. 


^ A noun clause is one used as the subject or object of a verb. 

2 The conjunction que, that, is used to introduce both subjunctive and 




IS usea 


indicative clauses. ^ 

3 When the subjecl~of)%>sw conseeutivq^verbs is the same, the second 
verb is in the infinitive. Temo no llegar a tiempo, I am afraid that I shall 
not arrive in time. 

4 Decir and escribir require the subjunctive when they express a com¬ 
mand, and the indicative when they make a statement. Digale Vd. que 
vaya. Tell him to go. But: Me dijo que iria. He told me that he would go. 

^ When certainty is implied, the indicative is used with esperar. 



102 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


3. After verbs of doubt, denial, and interrogation (im¬ 
plying doubt). -3' 


Dudo que lo hagan. 

I Cree Vd. que vengan pasado 
manana? 

No creo que vengan. 


I doubt that they will do it. 
Do you believe that they will 
come day after to-morrow ? 
I do not believe that they 
will come. 


(a) Verbs of doubt, in the negative, and verbs of belief, 
in the affirmative, take the indicative. 

No dudo que me hablaran. I do not doubt that they will 

speak to me. 

Creo que Uegaran a tiempo. I believe that they will arrive 

in time. 


ih) The indicative is used after questions, in case there 
is no doubt in the mind of the speaker concerning the 
reality of the statement in the dependent clause. 

,1 No sabe Vd. que estamalo? Don’t you know that he is 

ill ? {He really is ill.) 

I No cree Vd. que soy feliz? Don’t you believe that I am 

happy ? (7 really am 

happy.) 

4. After impersonal expressions not indicating certainty. 

Es precise que lo hallemos. It is necessary for us to find it. 

Era posible que abriese la It was possible that he would 
puerta. open the door. 

But: Es cierto que vinieron. It is certain that they came. 


(a) Impersonal verbs are followed by the infinitive, in 
case the dependent verb in English does not have a subject 
expressed, or when the expressed subject is not emphatic. 


Es preciso ir temprano. 

Le es preciso ir temprano. 

But: Es preciso que vaya el tem¬ 
prano. 


It is necessary to go early. 

It is necessary for him to go 
early. 

It is necessary for him to go 
early. {He must go early.) 


141. Use of the future subjunctive. — The future sub¬ 
junctive, which denotes an indefinite condition or hypothe- 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


103 


sis, may express either present or future time. It is rarely 
used now in spoken Spanish, except in proverbs, axioms, 
etc., as the present subjunctive has largely replaced it. 


Lo que te dijere el espejo, 
no te lo diran en consejo. 

Sea lo que fuere, no me im- 
porta. 


What your mirror might tell 
you, your close friends will 
not say to you. 

Let it be what it may, it does 
not matter to me. 


VERBS 

142. Caer, to fall 

Pres. Part, cayendo; Past Part, caido. 

Pres. Ind. caigo, caes, cae, caemos, caeis, caen. 

Pres. Subj. caiga, caigas, caiga, caigamos, caigais, caigan. 
Impf. Ind. caia, etc.; Put. Ind. caere, etc.; Cond. caeria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. cai, caiste, cayo, caimos, caisteis, cayeron. 

Impf. Subjs. cayese, etc.; cayera, etc.; Put. Subj. cayere, etc. 
Imperatives cae, caed. 

143. Oir, to hear 

Pres. Part, oyendo; Past Part. oido. 

Pres. Ind. oigo, oyes, oye, oimos, ois, oyen. 

Pres. Subj. oiga, oigas, oiga, oigamos, oigais, oigan. 

Impf. Ind. oia, etc.; Put. Ind. oire, etc.; Cond. oiria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. oi, oiste, oyo, oimos, oisteis, oyeron. 

Impf. Subjs. oyese, etc.; oyera, etc.; Put. Subj. oyere, etc. 
Imperatives oye, old. 

144. Valer, to he worth 

Pres. Part, valiendo; Past Part, valido. 

Pres. Ind. valgo, vales, vale, valemos, valeis, valen. 

Pres. Subj. valga, valgas, valga, valgamos, valgais, valgan. 
Impf. Ind. valia, etc.; Put. Ind. valdre, etc.; Cond. valdria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. vali, valiste, valid, valimos, valisteis, valieron. 

Impf. Subjs. valiese, etc.; valiera, etc.; Put. Subj. valiere, etc. 
Imperatives vale, valed. 


104 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


IDIOMS 


145. Hacer falta a (uno) 

Me hace falta el tiempo. 

146. Valer la pena 
No vale la pena leerlo. 

147. De antemano 

Obtuve un permiso de antemano. 


To be lacking, be in want of 

I lack the time. 

To be worth while 

It is not worth while to read it. 

In advance, beforehand 

I obtained a permit in advance. 


148. Reference Table for Sequence of 


Verb of the 
principal clause 

1. Pres. Ind. 

£. Put. Ind. 

3. Imperative 

4. Pres. Subj. 

{used as imperative) 

5. Impf. Ind. 

6. Pret. Ind. 

7. Cond. Ind. 

8. Pres. Perf. Ind. 


Verb of the 
dependent clause ^ 

f Pres. Subj. 
j Impf. Subj. 

[ Pres. Perf. Subj. 

I Pres. Subj. 

( Impf. Subj. 
Pluperf. Subj. • 

Pres. Subj. 

Impf. Subj. 


Tenses 

Time of action of the 
dependent clause com¬ 
pared to that of the 
principal clause 

Same or following 
Prior {simple tense) 
Prior {compound tense) 


Following 


Same or following 
Prior {compound tense) 

Following 

Same 


No creo que vengan ahora. 

{Same) 

Dudo que vengan manana. 

{Following) 

Temo que no lo hiciese (hiciera) 

bien. {Prior, simple tense) 

Es posible que haya salido. 

{Prior, compound tense) 


I do not believe that they are 
coming now. 

I doubt that they will come 
to-morrow. 

I fear that he did not do it well. 

It is possible that he has gone 
out. 


1 Simple tenses in the dependent clause in English are regularly expressed 
by simple tenses in Spanish, and compound tenses by compound tenses in 
Spanish. 




AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


105 


2 . 


Manana le permitire que tra- 
baje conmigo. (Same) 

Le mandate que los compre. 

{Following) 

Vd. se alegrara de que yo lo 
hiciese (hiciera). {Prior, 
simple tense) 

Vd. sentira que esto haya suce- 
dido. {Prior, compound tense) 


To-morrow I shall permit him 
to work with me. 

I shall order him to buy (that 
he buy) them. 

You will be glad that I did it. 

You will be sorry that this has 
happened. 


3. Escribele que me envie aquellos 

libros. {Following) 

4. Permitame Vd. que lea este 

periodico. {Following) 


5. 


f Dudabamos que trabajasen 
1 (trabajaran). {Same) 

■ Mi hermano me pedia que le 
ayudase (ayudara). {Fol- 
, loioing) 


f Sentiamos que no hubiesen 
(hubieran) escrito. {Prior, 
[ compound tense) 


6 . 


Pedi a Jorge que me acom- 
panase (acompanara). {Fol¬ 
lowing) 

Temieron que yo no hubiese 
(hubiera) comprado los bille- 

tes. {Prior, compound tense) 


Si estuvieran aqui ahora, te- 
meria que lo hiciesen (hi- 
cier'an). {Same) 

7. “j Le pediria que viniese (viniera). 

{Following) 

Dudaria que hubiesen (hu¬ 
bieran) llegado. {Prior) 


8. 


Me han pedido que les escriba. 

{Following) 

He dudado que lo hiciesen (hi- 
cieran). {Same) 


Write to him to send me those 
books. 

Allow me to read this news¬ 
paper. 

We doubted that they were 
working. 

My brother used to ask me to 
help (that I should help) him. 


We were sorry that they had 
not written. 


I asked George to accompany 
me. 

They feared that I had not 
bought the tickets. 


If they were here now I should 
fear that they would do it. 

I should ask him to come. 

I should doubt that they had 
arrived. 

They have asked me to write to 
them. 

I have doubted that they were 
doing it. 









106 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


ATRAVESANDO LOS ANDES 

Mendoza, Argentina, 
12 de abril de 19—. 

Me alegro de que mis amigos chilenos, Roberto Valdes 
y su hijo Luis, no hay an permitido que me fuese de Santiago 
sin ver la mayor parte de los parques y edificios publicos de 
los cuales estan tan ufanos. Vale bien la pena verlos todos. 

5 No querian que me pasease solo, porque temian que no 
los hallase facilmente. Por supuesto que me gusto mucho 
que me acompanasen a todas partes, y es cierto que me hacia 
falta el tiempo de verlos todos dentro de pocos dias sin guia. 
Dudo que se hay a tratado mas cortesmente a cualquier 
10 otro viajero. 

A1 ir al magmfico parque Cousino, me sorprendio que los 
tranvias tuvieran mujeres de conductores, y le pedi a mi 
vecino que me lo explicase. Me dijo que durante cierta 
guerra fue necesario que las mujeres se encargasen de aquel 
15 trabajo, porque hacian falta hombres suficientes. Nunca 
despues han permitido las mujeres que los hombres las 
reemplacen. 

Me alegro de que me hay an llevado a la Biblioteca Na- 
ciohal. Don Luis me habia dicho de antemano:—(i No 
20 sabe Vd. que tenemos alh una edicion muy lujosa de la 
Araucana? Es uno de los grandes poemas epicos de la 
literatura espanola, y es precise que Vd. lo lea. Cuenta las 
luchas de los indios araucanos de Chile contra los espanoles, 
y es cierto que se defendieron valerosamente. 

25 Al fin llego la hora de decir adios a mis amigos que sin- 
tieron mucho que me fuese tan pronto. Con un numero 
del famoso diario El Mercurio en la mano y un ejemplar de 
la Araucana en el bolsillo, subi al tren que me llevo a Llai 
Llai, desde donde emprendi el viaje por los Andes. Se 
30 oye mucho de este viaje por las montanas, y dudo que haya 
otras escenas mas majestuosas en la America del Sur. En 
la estacion de Juncal baje del tren con otros dos viajeros 





Me sorprendio que tuvieran 

MUJERES DE CONDUCTORES 



















t 




' ■« ” I .“»>»■ 


i iA 't«ti.- 

fr^ s*fc jf - ^ 

■'r 

.»' , J 



El Cristo de los Andes 

















































AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


107 


entusiastas para atravesar a caballo la cumbre de los Andes. 
No es posible que yo describa las mil maravillas de las 
montanas. Me alegro de haber visto en la frontera y en la 
cumbre misma la famosa estatua del « Cristo de los Andes », 
monumento de bronce de un Cristo de casi treinta pies de 5 
alto que simboliza la paz entre la Argentina y Chile. Sean 
los que fueren los sentimientos de mis companeros, es cierto 
que yo espero que otros paises pongan en sus fronteras 
algun simbolo de la paz. 

Aunque yo temia que cayesen de sus caballos mis dos lo 
companeros, bajamos sanos y salvos desde la cumbre hast a 
Las Cuevas, pueblo argentino en el cual tuvimos que esperar 
la llegada del tren siguiente. A1 fin llegamos a Mendoza, 
ciudad bastante grande que se halla en una region muy fertil 
plantada de vinas y arboles frutales. 15 

A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 
guientes: 

1. Los amigos chilenos. 2. Las mujeres haciendo de 
conductores en los tranvias. 3. La Araucana. 4. El tren 
para Llai Llai. 5: El viaje a caballo por las montanas. 

6. El Cristo de los Andes. 7. La espera del tren. 8. La 
region de Mendoza. 


B. (1) Ponganse al presente del subjuntivo los verbos en 
parentesis, y digase por que se emplea el subjuntivo: 

1. (ir) Es preciso que - pronto. 2. (estudiar) El 

profesor me pide que-mas. 3. (encontrar) Siento que 

Vd. no lo-. 4. (hacer) Vd. duda que nosotros-esto. 

5. (llegar) No creo que Isabel-a las seis. 6. (viajar) 

Queremos que Vds. - con nosotros. 7. (venir) ^ Cree 

Vd. que Maria y Luis-? 8. (entrar) La criada no nos 

permite que-. 9. (escribir) Temen que Vds. no les . 

10. (explicar) No es posible que nosotros lo-. 












108 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


(2) Ponganse al imperfecto del subjuntivo los verbos en 
parentesis, y digase por que se emplea el subjuntivo: 

1. (decir) No creian que Juan lo -. 2. (oir) Ale 

alegre de que el los-. 3. (caerse) Vd. temia que las ninas 

-. 4. (subir) Era posible que ellos -. 5. (saber) 

Queria que nosotros lo -. 6. (poder) Dudabamos que 

los caballos-atravesar el rio. 7. (pedir) Me sorprendio 

que Vds. no los -. 8. (trabajar) ^ Creian Vds. que 

Luis-? 

C. Traduzcase, empleando el subjuntivo cuando sea posible: 

Mary. — Elizabeth, you will be glad that you are not taking 
courses at the University, when I tell you what we have to do. 
Professor Rodriguez has just told all us students of the composi¬ 
tion class to write a long exercise in Spanish. It is necessary for 
5 us to use the subjunctive as much as possible. I don’t believe that 
we shall do it without making a great many mistakes. I don’t 
doubt that it is important for us to study grammar,^ but I like 
reading better. 

Elizabeth. — I think that talking with our Mexican friends 
10 is worth more than taking courses at the University. Anyway, 
it isn’t worth while to study all the time. It is possible that you 
may teach foreign languages ^ some time, but it is certain that I 
shall not do so. Do you believe that there are some letters for me 
downstairs ? It is a pity that Louis and John don’t write to us 
15 more often. I miss their letters. 

Mary. — Don’t you know that the postman has been ^ here 
already this afternoon ? I am sorry that there are no letters for 
you. Is it possible that the boys intend to cross the Andes on 
horseback ? I hope that they may see the famous '‘Christ of the 
20 Andes” that is at the frontier between Chile and Argentina. 

Elizabeth. — I don’t believe that they will go so far on horse¬ 
back. It is possible that they will rent a car if the Chilean police 
allow ^ foreigners to rent them. It is said that there is no lack of 
Ford cars in South America. 

25 Mary. — I am sorry that we don’t have one now. It is a pity 


^ Insert, definite article. 


2 pasar por. 


3 Pres. ind. 










AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


109 


for us to be in such an interesting country, and not see all the 
beautiful places. I know well that my mother would want me to 
have one if she were ^ here. 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

1. digale Vd. 2. por supuesto. 3. a caballo. 4. casi. 5. sano 
y salvo. 6.‘ todo el tiempo. 7. tratarse de. 8. de mala gana. 

9. no poder menos de. 10. saber . . . poder. 

E. Los verbos irregulares caer, ozr, y valety y los modismos. 

Traduzcanse: 

1. I hear that it will not be worth while. 2. He fell because he 
did not pay attention. 3. I doubt that they will hear it before¬ 
hand. 4. It was probable that she was in want of friends. 5. I 
am sorry that they fell. 6. He was afraid that we didn’t hear 
him. 7. Do you believe that it will be worth while ^ 8. They will 
not permit him to fall. 9. What would it be worth beforehand ^ 

10. I lack enough money. 11. I wish you to hear what they say. 
12. Do not fall. 


EXERCISE XIV 


The Subjunctive (II) 

149. In adjective clauses.^ — The subjunctive is used in 
adjective clauses whenever indefiniteness or uncertainty is 


expressed or implied in either 
dependent relative clause. 

I Hay persona cualquiera que 
- pueda saber toda la his- 
toria? 

Quienquiera que sea, no le 
escuchare. 


the principal clause or in the 


Is there any person who can 
know the whole story ? 

Whoever he may be, I shall 
not listen to him. 


1 Impf. subj. 

2 An adjective clause is one introduced by a relative pronoun. 



no 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


No hay nadie que pueda pro- 
barlo. 

Busco un joven ^ que hable 
espanol. 

But; Conozco a un joven que 
habla espanol. 


There is no one who can 
prove it. 

I am looking for a young 
man {indefinite) who speaks 
Spanish. 

I know a young man {defi¬ 
nite) who speaks Spanish. 


150. In adverbial clauses.^ — 1. In clauses which express 
indefinite future timep after: ^ 


cuando, when 
antes (de) que, before 
despues (de) que, after 
hasta que, until 


luego que 1 

^ > as soon as 

asi que j 

mientras (que), while, as long as 
siempre que, whenever 


Cuando vengan, iremos al teatro. 

When they come, we shall go to the theater. 

Dijo que vendria luego que se fuese su padre. 

He said that he would come as soon as his father went away. 

Prometio guardarlo hasta que yo viese a mis amigos. 

He promised to keep it until I should see my friends. 

jo-A/- ' L 

2. In purpose and result clauses, after such expressions as: 

para que 1 in order that. de manera que ) so that, 

a fin de que J so that de modo que / so as 


Me envio dinero para que comprase vestidos. 

He sent me money in order that (so that) I should buy clothes. 

Escriban Vds. el ejercicio de modo que (de manera que) yo pueda leerlo. 

Write the exercise so that I can read it. 


^ The preposition a is not required in this case, since the direct object 
is not a definite personal noun. See § 38. 

2 An adverbial clause is one introduced by an adverb or by a conjunctive 
expression. 

3 Future time considered from the standpoint of the verb of the principal 
clause. 

4 The subjunctive is also used to express indefinite place, manner, and 
amount. Ire a donde vayan los otros, I shall go wherever the others go. Llevare 
cuanto ponga Vd. en la maleta, I shall take whatever you may put into the 
suitcase. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


111 


3. In clauses of concession 
expressions as: 

aimque,! although 
a pesar de que, in spite of 
por {adjective or adverb) que, however 
dado que, granted that 


and restriction, after such 

en caso (de) que, in case {that) 
con tal que, provided {that) 
a menos que, unless 
sin que, without 


Aunque venga, no nos lo ensenara. 

Although he may come, he will not show it to us. 

Por fuerte que sea, no puede levantar este peso. 

However strong he may be, he cannot raise this weight. 

Se lo dare, con tal que me trate bien. 

I shall give it to him, provided he treats me will. 

t 

r 

151. In conditional sentences.^— In less vivid future con- 
ditions,2 and in conditions contrary to fact in present time, 
the clause containing the condition {^protasis) is usually 
introduced by si, and the verb is in the imperfect subjunc¬ 
tive {either -se or -ra); in the clause stating the conclusion 
(apodosis), the verb is in the conditional or the -ra imperfect 
subjunctive. When a condition contrary to fact relates 
to past time, the corresponding compound tenses are 
used. 

Si viniesen a vernos, iriamos todos al concierto. 

If they should come to see us, we should all go to the concert. 

Si mi primo estuviera (estuviese) aqui, compraria (comprara) la casa. 

If my cousin were here, he would buy the house. 

Si hubieramos (hubiesemos) tenido el dinero, hubieramos (habria- 
mos) viajado. 

If we had had the money, we should have traveled. 


1 Aunque is followed by the indicative when it states an accomplished 
fact. Aunque vino anoche, no le vi, Although he came last night, I did not 
see him. 

2 A less vivid future condition is one which implies that if certam con¬ 
ditions should exist in future time, certain results would follow. ' Si yo 
tuviese bast^nte tiempo, me pasearla, If I should have enough time, I 
should take a walk. 



112 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


(a) The indicative is used in simple conditions (not less 
vivid ne>v contrary to fact)} 


Si esta aqm, estudia. {Simple 
present condition) 

Si e stab a aqui, estudiaba. 

{Simple past condition) 

Si esta aqui manana, estu- 
diara. {Simple future con¬ 
dition) 


If he is here, he is studying. 

If he was here, he was study¬ 
ing. 

If he is here to-morrow, he 
will study. 


, O- 

152. With nortatory or optative use the subjunctive is 


quite frequent in occurrence. 

r 

Que suba a mi cuarto. 
j Viva el general Galdos ! 

i Valgame Dios! 
i Ojala que viniesen pronto! 

I Ojala que no lo hubiera 
dicho! 


Let him come up to my room. 
Long live (Hurrah for) Gen¬ 
eral Galdos ! 

Heaven help me ! 

Would that they might come 
soon ! 

Would that I had not said it! 


153. In softened assertions. — The -ra imperfect sub¬ 
junctive is used both in principal and in dependent clauses 
to express a softened assertion.^ 


Quisiera ir a la opera. 

I Pudiera Vd. decirme donde 
esta la estacion? 

Vd. no debiera hacerlo de ese 
modo. 


I should like to go to the 
opera. 

Could you tell me where the 
station is ? 

You ought not to do it in that 
way. 


VERBS 

154. Caber, to he contained, fit 

Pres. Part, cabiendo; Past Part, cabido. 

Pres. Ik'd, quepo, cabes, cabe, cabemos, cabeis, caben. 

Pres. Subj. quepa, quepas, quepa, quepamos, quepais, quepan. 

^ Si, meaning if (not whether), cannot be followed by the Fut. Ind., Cond. 
Ind. or Pres. Subj. 

2 The conditional indicative of certain verbs is also used in softened 
assertions. Preferiria no ir hoy, I should prefer not to go to-day. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


113 


Impf. Ind. cabia, etc.; Fut. Ind. cabre, etc.; Cond. cabrla, etc. 
Pret. Ind. cupe, cupiste, cupo, cupimos, cupisteis, cupieron. 
Impf. Subjs. cupiese, etc.; cupiera, etc.; Fut. Subj. cupiere, 
etc. 

Imperatives cabe, cabed. 

155. Dormir, to sleep 

Pres. Part, durmiendo; Past Part, dormido. 

Pres. Ind. duermo, duermes, duerme, dormimos, dormis, 
duermen. 

Pres. Subj. duerma, duermas, duerma, durmamos, durmais, 
duerman. 

Impf. Ind. dormia, etc.; Fut. Ind. dormire, etc.; Cond. dor- 
miria, etc. 

Pret. Ind. dormi, dormiste, durmio, dormimos, dormisteis, 
durmieron. 

Impf. Subjs. durmiese, etc.; durmiera, etc.; Fut. Subj. dur- 
miere, etc. 

Imperatives duerme, dormid. ^ 

156. Enviar, to send 

Pres. Part, enviando; Past Part, enviado. 

Pr.es. Ind. envio, envias, envia, enviamos, enviais, envian. 
Pres. Subj. envie, envies, envie, enviemos, envieis, envien. 
Impf. Ind. enviaba, etc.; Fut. Ind. enviare, etc.; Cond. en- 
viaria, etc. 

Pret. Ind. envie, enviaste, envio, enviamos, enviasteis, en- 
viaron. 

Impf. Subjs. enviase, etc.; enviara, etc.; Fut. Subj. enviare, 
etc. 

Imperatives envia, enviad. 


IDIOMS 

157. Deshacerse de To get rid of 

Se deshizo de sus males com- He got rid of his bad com- 
paneros. panions. 


114 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


158. Darse cuenta de \ 
Hacerse cargo de j 

Se dio cuenta (se hizo cargo) de 
los resultados de sus hechos. 

159. De proposito 

Me dio \m golpe de proposito. 


To realize, take into ac¬ 
count 

He realized the results of his 
actions. 

Purposely, on purpose 

He gave me a blow purposely. 


EN LA ARGENTINA 

Buenos Aires, Argentina, 
24 de abril de 19—. 

No hay nadie que se de cuenta de la inmensidad de las 
pampas argentinas sin atraversarlas el mismo. Quienquiera 
que las vea, queda convencido de la riqueza del pais. En 
caso de que el viajero se detenga unos dias en el camino, 
5 podra conocer la vida interesante de los gauchos, los cuales 
se dedican a la ganaderia, y vera en otros distritos inmensas 
estancias de trigo y otros cereales. Se duda que quepan en 
todos los numerosos trenes de carga los productos agricolas 
que se exportan. Sin embargo, si se ven los muelles extensos 
10 de Buenos Aires, y tambien los muchos muelles de Rosario y 
de otras ciudades, se teme que no hay a cargamentos suficien- 
tes para que se llenen todos los vapores que hay en los men- 
cionados muelles. 

Por hermosas que scan otras ciudades grandes, Buenos 
15 Aires debiera llevarse el premio por la hermosura de sus 
edificios y sus avenidas, sobre todo la Avenida de Mayo. 
Si pudiera quedarme .en esta ciudad, quisiera vivir en esta 
avenida, aunque me costase mucho y no me durmiese tan 
facilmente como si viviera en una calle menos concurrida. 

20 Puesto que deseaba conocer las plantas de esta parte del 
mundo, fui ayer a buscar un tranvia que me llevase al celebre 
Jardin Botanico, que tiene una coleccion completa, sobre todo 
de las industriales y las medicinales. Vinieron varies tranvias 
que debieran llevarme alia, pero no se pararon porque todos 



El gran edificto de (( La Prensa )) 





































Plaza del Congreso, Buenos Aires 





















AND COMPOSITION BOOK 115 

llevaban el letrero « completo ». Aqm, si todos los asientos 
de un tranvia estan ocupados, se cuelga el letrero « com¬ 
pleto », y no se permite que suban otros viajeros hasta que 
hay an bajado algunos. Ojala que tuvieramos esa costumbre 
en nuestras ciudades norteamericanas, para que pudieran 
sentarse todos los que entrasen. 

A1 fin llegue al Jardin Botanico, y fin de proposito a buscar 
la yerba mate y el quebracho Colorado que son de tanta 
importancia comercial, productos que se envian en grandes 
cantidades del norte de la Argentina y tambien del Para¬ 
guay. La yerba mate o te paraguayo es un arbusto cuyas 
hojas proporcionan una bebida favorita de los argentinos. 
El arbol quebracho Colorado produce el extracto de tanino 
que se emplea en curtir los cueros. Antes de exportar los 
troncos de quebracho, es precise deshacerse de la corteza, 
que no contiene tanino. 

Todos los viajeros debieran visitar, entre otros puntos 
de interes, el capitolio lujoso, la Universidad de Buenos Aires, 
el Hipodromo tan concurrido en el cual tienen lugar las carre- 
ras de caballos, y los grandes edificios de La Prensa y de La 
NaciSn, periodicos sobresalientes. 

A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 

guientes: 

1. Las pampas y los gauchos. 2. Los productos agricolas. 
3. Los muelles de Buenos Aires y los de Rosario. 4. La 
Avenida de Mayo. 5. Los tranvias con el letrero « com¬ 
pleto ». 6. La yerba mate. 7. El quebracho. 8. Los 

puntos de interes de Buenos Aires. 

B. (1) Ponganse al presente del subjuntivo los verbos en 

parentesis, y digase por que se emplea el subjuntivo: 

1. (ver) Nos iremos sin que ellos nos -. 2. (tener) 

No hay ningun tranvia que no-el letrero « completo ». 

3. (llegar) Debemos esperar hasta que - otra persona. 


5 

10 

15 

20 





116 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


4. (estar) Quiero ver un tranvia que no-lleno. 5. (ser) 

Por completa que - la coleccion, le hacen falta varias 

plant as. 6. (vender) Hay que hacerlo antes de que el ganado 

se-. 7. (enviar) Quienquiera me los-, no los acep- 

tare. 8. (ir, querer) \ Que - cuando -! 9. (caer) 

Se lo dire a el a fin de que no-. 10. (venir) Prometen 

decirmelo luego que-. 

(2) Ponganse al imperfecto del subjuntivo los verbos en 
parentesis, y digase por que se emplea el subjuntivo: 

1. (acompanar) Vinieron para que nosotros los -. 

2. (dar) Dijo que llevaria cuanto Luis le-. 3. (subir) 

Ojala que-por aqui. 4. (estar) Si- aqui el carga- 

mento, lo venderiamos. 5. (deber) Maria-ir en seguida. 

6. (venir) Podriamos acabarlo pronto, si Juan -. 

7. (costar) Creiamos que lo harian, aunque les - mu- 

cho. 8. (enviar) No seria posible leerlo, si no nos lo -. 

9. (saber) No vimos a nadie que - tocar la guitarra. 

10. (leer) No querian quedarse, a menos que Isabel les 
-el periodico. 

C. Traduzcase al espanol: 

John and Louis have been in Buenos Aires for several days. 
However beautiful some North American cities may be, there 
is none which is more charming than the capital of Argentina. 
Would that more North Americans could visit it! No one, who- 
5 ever he may be, can realize the beauty of the cities of South America 
until he visits them. Wherever he goes he will see beautiful and 
interesting things, provided that he knows how to find them, of 
course. John and Louis have become experienced travelers. They 
always try to find hotels where the servants do not speak English. 
10 They are now in a little boarding house where nothing is spoken but 
Spanish. 

John. — If Elizabeth and Mary had come with us, they would 
have liked Buenos Aires. What a pity they had to stay in Mexico ! 
When I write Elizabeth I shall tell her what we are seeing. If 
15 she could see this city, she would want to stay here a long time. 




















AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


117 


Louis. — If you had a sister, John, you wouldn’t want her with 
you all the time. If Elizabeth were here, she would want to go with 
us wherever we went. We should have to get rid of her whenever 
we wanted to go ont to have a good time. Let her stay where she is. 

John. — If I had a sister as pretty as yours, I shouldn’t talk 5 
that way about her, — at least, when she wasn’t here. As soon as 
I see her again, I shall tell her what you have just said ... Be that 
as it may, I suspect she has stayed in Mexico City to get rid of 
your company. 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

1. a pesar de que. j Ojala! 3. quisiera. 4. se cree. 

5. llevarse el premio. 6. « complete ». 7. valer la pena. 8. { Que 
lastima! 9. de proposito. 

E. Los verbos irregulares caber, dorm/r, y enviar^ y los modis- 

mos. Traduzcanse: 

1. We got rid of the packages. 2. They are sending me the 
money purposely so that I shall buy the house. 3. They realized 
that the pictures would not fit in the box. 4. He slept well. 5. He 
does not believe that I shall sleep. 6. Do not send us the large 
box. 7. He does not realize that they will not fit in the collection. 

8. I am doing it purposely so that you may sleep. 9. Unless they 
get rid of their house, they cannot go. 10. I realize what they 
will do. 

EXERCISE XV 

Infinitives — Present Participles — Past Participles 

160. Infinitives have only three endings: -ar, first con¬ 
jugation; -er, second conjugation; -ir, third conjugation. 

Hablar, to speak; comer, to eat; escribir, to write. 

161. Use of the infinitive. — The infinitive is used in 
Spanish after all prepositions, where in English the present 
participle is used. 

En vez de venir ayer, me es- Instead of coming yesterday, 
cribio. he wrote to me. 

Salio sin hablarme. He left without speaking to 


me. 


118 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


162. The infinitive (as a verbal noun) may be used as 
the subject or object of a verb.^ 

El viajar es muy agradable. Traveling is very agreeable. 

Mi tia aborrece el fumar. My aunt abhors smoking. 


163. The infinitive is used after impersonal expressions 
without any preposition. 

Es precise trabajar mucho. It is necessary to work much. 

No es dificil olvidar los verbos It is not difficult to forget the 
irregulares. irregular verbs. 

164. The following are some of the most common verbs 
which govern the infinitive without any preposition: ^ 


creer, believe 
esperar, hope 
impedir, prevent 
mandar, order 
necesitar, need 


permitir, permit 
poder, he able 
prbeurar, try 
prohibir, prohibit 
querer, wish 


saber, know {how) 
sentir, /eeZ, regret 
servirse, please 
temer, fear 


Podran comprendernos bien. 

Yds. quieren ir con ellos. 

No sabemos hacer ese trabajo. 


They will be able to understand 
us well. 

You wish to go with them. 

We do not know how to do that 
work. 


165. Common verbs which require de before the in¬ 
finitive : 2 

acordarse, remember arrepentirse, repent jactarse, boast 

alegrarse, be glad cesar, cease olvidarse, forget 

aprovecharse, profit by gozar, enjoy 

Se alegro de venir ayer. He was glad to come yesterday. 

Gozamos de tocar la guitarra. We enjoy playing the guitar. 


1 For the use of the article el with the infinitive, see § 3, 2. A1 (a + el) 
followed by the infinitive, is equivalent to English on or upon followed 
by the present participle, or to a clause. A1 llegar le di6 a el su tarjeta de 
visita, Upon arriving {when he arrived), he gave him his calling card. 

2 See Appendix D for list of verbs followed by the infinitive without 
a preposition or preceded by a, de, en, por, and con. 



AND COMPOSITION BOOK 119 


166. Common verbs which require a before the infinitive : '■ 


aprender, learn 
apresurarse, hurry 
atreverse, dare 
ayudar, help 
Aprenden a leer. 

Vamos a visitar a Chile 


decidirse, decide 
ensenar, teach 
ir, go 

llegar, succeed 


venir, come 
principiar 1 
comenzar > begin 
empezar J 


They are learni*ng to read. 
We are going to visit Chile. 


167. Common verbs which require en before the in¬ 
finitive : ^ 

acordar, agree empenarse ) interesarse, interest 

consistir, consist insistir J oneself 

equivocarse, he mistaken fijarse, pay attention tardar, delay 

Acordaron en hacerlo. They agreed to do it. 

Nos interesamos en oirlos hablar We are interested in hearing them 
de Cuba. talk of Cuba. 


168. The present participle (gerund) is invariable in end¬ 
ing (-ndo). It is expressed in English by a present parti¬ 
ciple, or by a present participle preceded by a preposition 
such as hy, while, and on. 


Diciendo eso, se marcho. 

Se aprende estudiajido mucho. 
Paseandose en el parque, se 
encontro con el profesor. 


Saying that, he went away. 
One learns by studying much. 
While walking in the park, he 
met the professor. 


169. Use of the present participle. — The present parti¬ 
ciple is used after the verb estar ^ to form a progressive 
construction in order to emphasize the continuance of an 
action.^ 

Esta hablando todo el tiempo. He is (keeps) talking all the 

time. 

Estabamos estudiando toda la We were studying all the 
tarde. afternoon. 


^ See page 118, note 2. 

2 See § 14, 3. 

2 The present participles of ser, estar, ir, and venir are never used in 
the progressive construction. Voy (not estoy yendo) cada dia a mis clases, 
I go (am going) every day to my classes. 



120 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


(a) Verbs of motion, such as ir, venir, andar, etc., and 
verbs of rest, such as quedar, may be substituted for estar 
in this construction. • 

Van (estan) escribiendo con They are writing very care- 
mucho cuidado. fully. 

Quedan leyendo las revistas. They keep reading the maga¬ 
zines. 


170. Past participle. — The past participles of verbs with 
infinitives in -ar end in -ado, of verbs with infinitives in 
-er or -ir, in -ido. When they are used to form the com¬ 
pound tenses with haber, they do not vary in ending. Past 
participles used as adjectives vary for gender and number. 

Hemos aprendido a escribir el espanol. 

We have learned to write Spanish. 

Aqui estan las cartas que Vd. ha escrito. 

Here are the letters that you have written. ^ ' 

En esta sala de clase hay dos ventanas abiertas y una cerrada. 

In this class room there are two open windows and one closed one. 


171. The past participle may be used without any other 
verb in an absolute construction. 


Hecho esto, se decidio a ven¬ 
der la casa. 

Acabado el trabajo del dia, 
volvi a casa. 


This being done, he decided 
to sell the house. 

The day’s work being ended, I 
returned home. 


VERBS 

172. Huir, to flee 

Pres. Part, huyendo; Past Part, huido. 

Pres. Ind. huyo, huyes, huye, huimos, hiiis, huyen. 

Pres. Subj. huya, huyas, huya, huyamos, huyais, huyan. 

Impf. Ind. huia, etc.; Put. Ind. huire, etc.; Cond. huiria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. hui, huiste, huyo, huimos, huisteis, huyeron. 

Impf. Subjs. huyese, etc.; huyera, etc.; Put. Subj. huyere, etc. 
Imperatives huye, huid. 


AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


121 


173. Asir, to seize 

Pres. Part, asiendo; Past Part, asido. 

Pres. Ind. asgo, ases, ase, asimos, asis, asen. 

Pres. Subj. asga, asgas, asga, asgamos, asgais, asgan. 

Impf. Ind. asia, etc.; Put. Ind. asire, etc.; Cond. asiria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. asi, asiste, asio, asimos, asisteis, asieron. 

Impf. Subjs. asiese, etc.; asiera, etc.; Put. Subj. asiere, etc. 
Imperatives ase, asid. 


174. Oler, to smell 

Pres. Part, oliendo; Past Part, olido. 

Pres. Ind. huelo, hueles, huele, olemos, oleis, huelen. 

Pres. Subj. huela, huelas, huela, olamos, olais, huelan. 

Impf. Ind. olia, etc.; Put. Ind. olere, etc., Cond. oleria, etc. 
Pret. Ind. oH, oliste, olio, olimos, olisteis, olieron. 

Impf. Subjs. oliese, etc.; oliera, etc.; Put. Subj. oliere, etc. 
Imperatives huele, oled. 

IDIOMS 


175. Hacer efectivo 

Voy a hacer efectiva mi letra. 

176. Al contado 

Vendemos vestidos solo al con¬ 
tado. 

177. Al por mayor (menor) 

Compre los generos al por mayor 
(al por menor). 


To cash {a check or draft) 

I am going to cash my draft. 
For cash 

We sell clothing for cash only. • 

At wholesale (retail) 

I bought the goods at wholesale 
(at retail). 


EN EL URUGUAY 

Montevideo, el Uruguay, 
17 de mayo de 19 —. 

Me alegro de haber navegado el no Parana para gozar del 
maravilloso salto de agua del rio Iguassu, en la frontera de 
la Argentina y el Brasil. Este salto es mucho mas ancho 


122 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


que el del Niagara, y sus aguas caen desde mayor altura, 
haciendo resonar con su ruido los bosques tropicales que se 
extienden a su alrededor. Uno no puede menos de asom- 
brarse al contemplar esta maravilla de la naturaleza. 

6 Vuelto a Posadas en la frontera paraguaya, me decidi a 
atravesar el rio Parana e ir por ferrocarril hasta Asuncion, 
capital del Paraguay. Llegue a comprar en Asuncion en- 
cajes de nandutiy palabra indigena que quiere decir tela de 
arana. Estos encajes son los mas finos y delicados de todos 
10 los que me acuerdo de haber visto en mis viajes. 

A pesar de no tener puerto de mar el Paraguay, va 
desarrollando continuamente su comercio exterior. Los 
paraguayos exportan yerba mate, maderas de tinte y de 
construccion, y quebracho, al por mayor. 

15 En vez de volver de Asuncion a Buenos Aires por vapor, 
me empene en viajar por tren. Atravesando la mitad del 
Paraguay, un distrito de la Argentina, y todo el Uruguay 
del norte al sur por ferrocarril, me fije en adquirir ideas mas 
cabales de la vida de estas partes de la America del Sur. 
20 Creo no equivocarme al comparar el Uruguay a los estados 
de Kentucky y Tennessee en el verano. El ganado vacuno, 
el lanar y el caballar pacen en terrenos muy fertiles. No 
es sorprendente que el establecimiento uruguayo de Liebig 
en Fray Bentos haya ganado tanta fama en el mundo con 
25 sus extractos de came de vaca. 

Al llegar a Montevideo, tuve que ir sin tardar a un banco 
para hacer efectiva una letra sobre Nueva York. Un sentimi- 
ento de sorpresa se apodero de ml al ndtar que un peso norte- 
americano no valia tanto como un peso de oro uruguayo. 
30 Puesto que quiero pagar al contado todo lo que compre 
aqui, ando llevando en el bolsillo bastante dinero. Me he 
interesado mucho en visitar los magmficos edificios publicos, 
teatros, hoteles, escuelas, y la universidad. Los uruguayos 
gozan mucho paseandose en los jardines y los parques, los 
35 cuales contienen muchos arbustos y muchas flores tropicales 
de gran interes. Tambien les gust an los deportes, inclu- 



Gauchos argentinos 















f 







En UN PARQUE DE MONTEVIDEO 























AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


123 


yendo el futbol, y van a divertirse y a banarse a las playas 
risuenas cerca de Montevideo, de las cuales Pocitos y Trou- 
yille son muy concurridas. El Cerro, a corta distancia de la 
ciudad, es el que vio el descubridor que dio el nombre de 
Montevideo a este lugar. 5 

Tengo que salir de Montevideo para Nueva York dentro de 
pocos dias, y quiero aprovecharme del viaje para detenerme 
algiin tiempo en Santos a ver los famosos cafetales brasilenos, 
y por supuesto no dejare de pasar unos dias en Rio de Janeiro. 
Me es dificil huir de los placeres de Montevideo, porque la lo 
vida uruguaya es muy balaguena. El Uruguay es uno de 
los paises mas progresistas del mundo. 

A. Haganse preguntas y respuestas sobre los asuntos si- 

guientes: 

1. El salto del Iguassu. 2. El viaje hast a Asuncion. 

3. Los encajes paraguayos. 4. A traves del Uruguay por 
ferrocarril. 5. El ganado del Uruguay. 6. Los deportes. 

7. El Cerro. 8. La vuelta a Nueva York. 

B. (1) Ponganse los verbos en parentesis (a) al presente del 

indicative; (b) al preterite, con la preposicion debida 
delante del infinitive, o sin preposicion cuando no 
se necesita: 

1. {delay) Vd. no - enviarlo. 2. {know how) Juan 

-hablar espanol. 3. {enjoy) Luis y Maria-viajar. 

4. {decide) Yds. -volver. 5. {be necessary) -atra- 

vesar el pais. 6. {wish) Yo-ir en seguida. 7. {begin) 

Mis primes-- leer. 8. {insist) Vd. -pagarlo al con- 

tado. 9. {fear) Yo - asirlos. 10. {be glad) Nosotros 

- verla. 11. {go) Los muchachos - venderlo. 

12. {hope) Yo-comprenderlo pronto. 13. {regret) Los 

jovenes-decirlo. 14. {learn) Yo-hacerlo. 

(2) Traduzcanse los verbos en parentesis, poniendolos al 
gerundio o al participle pasivo, como se necesita: 

1. (decir) - lo posible, se fue. 2. (viajar) Estaban 

- en el verano. 3. (volver) Han - de la ciudad. 




















124 


SPANISH REVIEW GRAMMAR 


4. (gozar) Queda-del clima. 5. (huir) Estan-de 

sus enemigos. 6. (ver) Los encajes que Vd. ha-son 

bonitos. 7. (pasearse)-con ellos, vieron al Sr. Melendez. 

8. (abrir) La puerta esta-. 

C. Traduzcase al espanol: 

Upon arriving at Montevideo John and Louis decided to go to 
Pocitos, a pleasant beach near the city, instead of staying in the 
city itself. They both were fond of swimming and could go in 
bathing every day. They have spent several days in visiting the 
5 city, and now intend to take a boat to Rio de Janeiro. From 
that port they expect to return to the United States. Louis is in 
his room busy packing his suitcase. It is warm and he has all 
the wmdows opened. He seems to be very happy and is singing 
constantly. 

10 John. — Louis, why are you so long in packing that suitcase 
Please stop singing and begin to work. Weren’t you out walking 
all the morning ? Why didn’t you finish packing it beforehand 

Louis. — I wasn’t out walking, but buying souvenirs. Since it 
was necessary to pay cash for everything,^ I had to cash a draft 
15 first. That being done, I tried to find a store where ^ things were 
cheap. I succeeded in finding a piece of fine spider lace for my 
mother, and I still have to look for a souvenir for a friend (/.) of 
mine at the University. 

John. — If you want to give her a real souvenir of the country, 
20 send her a bottle of Liebig’s beef extract. . . Well, if you are finally 
ready, let’s go. I am glad that we are traveling by boat instead of 
going by rail. It is probable that you will be seasick, but people ^ 
rarely die from being seasick. 

Louis. — It’s well worth being seasick in order to visit South 
25 America. Every student in^ an American University when he grad¬ 
uates ought to visit some foreign country. If he hasn’t enough 
money, he should beg, borrow it or . . . get it some other way. 

D. Haganse oraciones con las frases siguientes: 

1. paseandome. 2. alpormenor. 3. querer decir. 4. acabado 
el tema. 5. darse cuenta'de. 6. lo mas pronto posible. 7. en 
seguida. 8. el fumar. 9. es precise. 10. la America del Sur. 


1 all for cash. 2 Insert definite article. 


Use reflexive. de. 







AND COMPOSITION BOOK 


125 


E. Los verbos irregulares ashy huhy y o/er, y los modismos. 

Traduzcanse: 

1. I cashed my draft. 2. He sells for cash at retail. 3. I do 
not want him to seize that. 4. They fled immediately. 5. They 
smell those flowers. 6. Don’t smell that fruit. 7. They are fleeing. 
8. They seized the railroad. 9. I shall pay cash for it. 10. He 
buys his fruits at wholesale. 11. Where is your draft ? I shall 
cash it now. 12. This will be sold for cash. 








APPENDIX A 

Accentuation and Syllabication 
1, Accentuation. 

1. Words ending in a consonant^ except n or s, are stressed 
on the last syllable. 

Espanol, Spanish; comprar, to buy; ciudad, city; reloj, watch; 
nariz, nose. 

2. Words ending in a vowel (including diphthongs or in 
n or S are stressed on the next to the last syllable.^ 

Casa, house; hombre, man; libro, booh; compran, they buy; 
pedimos, we ash; familia, family; sabio, wise. 

3. Any exception to rule 1 or 2 above (including stress on a 
syllable preceding the next to the last one) requires a written 
accent on the stressed syllable.^ 

Facil, easy; lapiz, pencil; sofa, sofa; cafe, coffee; hablo, he spohe; 
nacion,^ nation; ingles,^ English; dia, day; tenia, he had; examenes,® 
examinations ; telegrafo, telegraph. 

4. The written accent must be used to distinguish visually 
words similar in spelling and pronunciation but different in 
meaning or function. 

1 Final y is considered as a consonant for accentual purposes, although 
it sounds as a vowel. Paraguay, Uruguay. 

2 A few diphthongal monosyllables bear the written accent: fui, fue, 
dio, vio. However, there is no accent on vais, dais and deis. 

® However, a verb retains its written accent when a pronoun is affixed 
to it. De Vd., give; denos Vd., give us. 

^ A verb not accented when standing alone adds a written accent when 
a pronoun is affixed, in case the stress then falls on a syllable preceding the 
next to the last. Diciendo, saying, diciendonoslo, saying it to us. 

^ The addition of -es to form the plural results in the loss of the written 
accent, when it is on the final syllable. Nacion, naciones; ingles, ingleses; 
jardm, jardines. 

® The addition of -es to form the plural of nouns stressed on the next 
to the last syllable makes a written accent necessary. Ezamen, ezamenes; 
orden, ordenes. 


127 



128 


APPENDIX A 


aquel, that {adjective) 
como, as 

cual, as, which, etc. 
cuando, when 

cuanto, as much (many) as 
de, of, « from 
donde, where 
el, the 

ese, that {adjective) 
este, this {adjective) 
mas, but 
mi, my 
que, that, etc. 
quien, who 
se, himself, etc. 
si, if 

solo, .alone 

tu, your {familiar) 


aquel, that one {pronoun) 

I como ? how ? I como ! how ! 
I cual ? which ? 

I cuando ? when ? 

I cuanto ? how much (many) ? 
de, give {Pres. Subj.) 

I donde ? where ? 
el, he 

ese, that one {pronoun) 
este, this one {pronoun) 
mas, more 
nu, me 
I que ? what ? 

I quien ? who ? 

se, I know, be {imperative) 

SI, yes, himself, etc. 

solo, only 

tu, you {familiar) 


2. Diphthongs and triphthongs. 

1. Diphthongs. — A diphthong is a combination of two 
vowels to form a single syllable. Contrary to English, the 
sound of each vowel of a diphthong in Spanish is distinctly 
heard. A diphthong consists of a combination of (1) a strong 
vowel ^ (a, e, o) and a weak vowel (i, y, u) or (2) of two weak 
vowels.^ In (1) the stress falls on the strong vowel; in (2) the 


stress falls on the second weak 

vowel. 

The following com- 

binations 

are found: — 




Strong 

AND Weak 

Weak and Strong 

Two Weak 

Vowel 

Vowel 

Vowels 

ai (y) 

aire, hay 

ia 

viaje 

iu ciudad 

au 

causa 

ie 

quien 

ui fuimos 

oi (y) 

oigo, hoy 

io 

estudio 


ou 

Sousa 

ua 

cuando 


ei (y) 

reina, rey 

ue 

puesto 


eu 

Europa 

uo 

cuota 


1 Two contiguous strong 

vowels never unite into a single syllable. Ca-er, 


le-er, po-e-ma. 

2 In case the first of two contiguous weak vowels is stressed or a weak 
vowel standing next to a strong one, two separate syllables are formed, 
and this stress is indicated by a written accent. Cre-i-a, di-a, flu-i-do. 



APPENDIX A 


129 


2. Triphthongs. — A triphthong consists of a strong vowel 
between two weak vowels. The stress falls on the strong 
vowel. The following combinations are found: 

iai estudiais 

iei envieis 

uai (y) averiguais, Uruguay ) 

uei (y) averigiieis, buey 

3. Syllabication. 

1. A single consonant (including ch, 11, rr) between vowels 
goes with the following vowel. La-piz, ve-ra-no, mu-cha-cho, 
ca-ba-llo, pe-rro. 

2. Two adjacent consonants are regularly divided, so that 
one goes with each syllable. Per-so-na, lec-cion, tin-ta, her- 
mo-so. However, consonants followed by 1 or r (except rl, si, 
tl, sr) are not separated. Ma-dre, a-ma-ble, cua-tro, si-glo, 
li-bro, (At-lan-ti-co, mer-lu-za). 

3. When more than two consonants occur between vowels, 
only the last consonant or the two consonants of the insepa¬ 
rable groups mentioned in rule 2 above go with the following 
syllable. Ex-pli-car, sor-pre-sa, trans-po-ner, mez-cla. 

4. Prefixes are usually inseparable, even if in violation of 
the above rules. Des-es-pe-rar, sub-le-var, des-a-tar. 


130 


APPENDIX B 


APPENDIX B 

Verb Formation 

I. THE KEGULAR CONJUGATIONS 


I 

II 

Infinitive Mode 

III 

compr ar, to buy 

vend er, to sell 

Participles 

Present 

viv ir, to live 

compr ando, buying 

vend iendo, selling 

Past 

viv iendo, living 

compr ado, bought 

vend ido, sold 

Indicative Mode 

Present 

viv ido, lived 

1 buy^ do buy^ am 

I sell, do sell, am 

I live, do live, am 

buying^ etc. 

selling, etc. 

living, etc. 

compr 0 

vend 0 

viv 0 

compr as 

vend es 

viv es 

compr a 

vend e 

viv e 

compr amos 

vend emos 

viv imos 

compr dis 

vend eis 

viv IS 

compr an 

vend en 

viv en 

Imperfect (Past Descriptive) ' 

7 was buying^ used 

7 was selling, used 

7 was living, used 

to buy, bought, etc. 

to sell, sold, etc. 

to live, lived, etc. 

compr aba 

vend la 

viv la 

compr abas 

vend las 

viv ias 

compr aba 

vend la 

viv ia 


compr abamos 
compr abais 
compr aban 


APPENDIX B 


131 


vend lamos 
vend lais 
vend lan 


viv lamos 
viv lais 
viv lan 


Preterite (Past Absolute) 

/ sold, etc. 
vend 1 
vend iste 
vend io 
vend imos 
vend isteis 
vend ieron 


I bought, etc, 
compr e 
compr aste 
compr 6 
compr amos 
compr asteis 
compr aron 


I shall buy, etc. 
comprar e 
comprar as 
comprar a 
comprar emos 
comprar eis 
comprar an 


Future 

I shall sell, etc. 
vender e 
vender as 
vender a 
vender emos 
vender eis 
vender an 


I lived, etc, 
viv 1 
viv iste 
viv io 
viv imos 
viv isteis 
viv ieron 


/ shall live, etc, 
vivir e 
vivir as 
vivir a 
vivir emos 
vivir eis 
vivir an 


Conditional (Past Future) 


/ should buy, etc. 
comprar la 
comprar las 
comprar la 
comprar lamos 
comprar lais 
comprar lan 


Buy 

compr a (tu) 
compr ad (vosotros 
-as) 


I should sell, etc. 
vender la 
vender las 
vender la 
vender lamos 
vender lais 
vender lan 

Imperative Mode 

Sell 

vend e (tu) 
vend ed (vosotros, 
-as) 


I should live, etc, 
vivir la 
vivir las 
vivir la 
vivir iamos 
vivir lais 
vivir lan 


Live 
viv e (tu) 
viv id (vosotros. 


132 

{That I may) huy. 

APPENDIX B 

Subjunctive Mode 

Present 

(That I may) sell. 

{That 1 may) liv 

{let me) buy^ etc. 

{let me) sell, etc. 

{let me) live, etc 

compr e 

vend a 

viv a 

compr es 

vend as 

viv as 

compr e 

vend a 

viv a 

compr emos 

vend amos 

viv amos 

compr eis 

vend ais 

viv ais 

compr en 

vend an 

viv an 

{That) 1 might or 

Imperfect (Past) 

(-se form) 

{That) I might or 

{That) I might o 

should buy, etc. 

should sell, etc. 

should live, etc. 

compr ase 

vend iese 

viv iese 

compr ases 

vend ieses 

viv ieses 

compr ase 

vend iese 

viv iese 

compr asemos 

vend iesemos 

viv iesemos 

compr aseis 

vend ieseis 

viv ieseis 

compr asen 

vend iesen 

viv iesen 

{That) I might or 

Imperfect (Past) 

(-ra form) 

{That) I might or 

{That) I might o 

should buy, etc. 

should sell, etc. 

should live, etc. 

compr ara 

vend iera 

viv iera 

compr aras 

vend ieras 

viv ieras 

compr ara 

vend iera 

viv iera 

compr aramos 

vend ieramos 

viv ieramos 

compr arais 

vend ierais 

viv ierais 

compr aran • 

vend ieran 

viv ieran 


APPENDIX B 


133 


Future 


That I {may or shall) 
buy, etc. 
compr are 
compr ares 
compr are 
compr aremos 
compr areis 
compr aren 


(or Hypothetical) 

That I {may or shall) 
sell, etc. 
vend iere 
vend ieres 
vend iere 
vend ieremos 
vend iereis 
vend ieren 


That I {may or shall) 
live, etc. 
viv iere 
viv ieres 
viv iere 
viv ieremos 
viv iereis 
viv ieren 


n. THE COMPOUND TENSES 

The compound tenses of all verbs, regular and irregular, are 
formed by adding their past participle (invariable) to the 
proper form of the auxiliary haber, to have (see § 6)d 

Model verb with haber 


Infinitive Participle 

Present Perfect Present Perfect 

haber comprado, to have bought habiendo comprado, having 

bought 

Indicative 

Present Perfect 

he comprado, etc., I have bought, etc. 

Pluperfect (Past Perfect) 
habia comprado, etc., I had bought, etc. 

Past Anterior (Second Past Perfect) 
hube comprado, etc., I had bought, etc. 

^ The passive voice is formed with ser, to he (see § 15), and the past 
participle (variable) of the verb. 




134 


APPENDIX B 


Future Perfect 

habre comprado, etc., I shall have bought, etc. 
Conditional Perfect 

habria comprado, etc., / should have bought, etc. 

Subjunctive 

Present Perfect 

haya comprado, etc., {that) I may have bought, etc. 

Pluperfect (Past Perfect) 

(-se form) 

hubiese comprado, etc., {that) I might have bought, etc. 

Pluperfect (Past Perfect) 

(-ra form) 

hubiera comprado, etc., {that) I might have bought, etc. 
Future Perfect 

hubiere comprado, etc., that I {may or shall) have bought, etc. 


m. ORTHOGRAPHIC-CHANGING VERBS 

1. Changes which occur before e of the ending (to preserve 
the consonantal sound at the end of the stem of the infinitive).^ 

1. In -car verbs c>qu: 

Sacar — Fret. Ind. 1st sing, saque 

Pres. Subj. saque, saques, saque, saquemos, saqueis, 
saquen 

2. In -gar verbs g>gu: 

Pagar — Fret. Ind. 1st sing, pague 

Pres. Subj. pague, pagues, pague, paguemos, pagueis, 
paguen 

^ Only seven forms of the verb inflection are affected by the consonantal 
changes mentioned in group 1. 



APPENDIX B 


135 


3. In -guar verbs gu>gii: 

Averiguar — Pret. Ind. 1st sing, averigiie 

Pres. Subj. averigiie, averigiies, averigiie, averi- 
giiemos, averigiieis, averigiien 

4. In -zar verbs z>c: 

Gozar — Pret. Ind. 1st sing, goce 

Pres. Subj. goce, goces, goce, gocemos, goceis, gocen 

2. Changes which occur before o or a of the ending (to pre¬ 
serve the consonantal sound at the end of the stem of the 
infinitive) d 

1. In -cer and -cir verbs preceded by a consonant c>z: 

Veneer — Pres. Ind. 1st sing, venzo 

Pres. Subj. venza, venzas, venza, venzamos, ven- 
zais, venzan 

Esparcir — Pres. Ind. 1st sing, esparzo 

Pres. Subj. esparza, esparzas, e^parza, esparzamos, 
esparzais, esparzan 

(a) In -cer and -cir verbs preceded by a vowel c>zc (differs from 
stem): 

Conocer — Pres. Ind. 1st sing, conozco 

Pres. Subj. conozca, conozcas, conozca, conozca- 
mos, conozcais, conozcan 
Lucir — Pres. Ind. 1st sing, luzco 

Pres. Subj. luzca, luzcas, luzca, luzcamos, luzcais, 
luzcan 

2. In -ger and -gir verbs g>j: 

Coger — Pres. Ind. 1st sing, cojo 

Pres. Subj. coja, cojas, coja, cojamos, cojais, cojan 

Dirigir — Pres. Ind. 1st sing, dirijo 

Pres. Subj. dirija, dirijas, dirija, dirijamos, dirijais, 
dirijan 

3. In -guir verbs gu>g: 

Distinguir — Pres. Ind. 1st sing, distingo 

Pres. Subj. distinga, distingas, distinga, distin- 
gamos, distingais, distingan 


1 Only seven forms of the verb inflection are affected by the consonantal 
changes mentioned in group 1. 




136 


APPENDIX B 


4. In -quir verbs qu>c: 

Delinquir — Pres. Ind. 1st sing, delinco 

Pres. Subj. delinca, delincas, delinca, delincamos, 
delincais, delincan 


3. Changes in -iar and -uar verbs. Certain verbs in -iar 
and -uar take a written accent on the i or u of the stem in the 
following forms: 

Enviar — Pres. Ind. envio, envias, envia, envian 
Pres. Subj. envie, envies, envie, envien 

Imperative singular envia 

Continual — Pres. Ind. continuo, continuas, continua; 

continuan 

Pres. Subj. continue, continues, continue, 
continuen 

Imperative singular continua 


4. Change of i to y of the endings -ie- and -i6 in verbs 
whose stem ends in a vowel (excluding -iar and -uar verbs). 

Creer — Pres. Part, creyendo 

Pret. Ind. Srd sing, and 3rd pi. creyo, creyeron 
Impf. Subjs. creyese, etc.; creyera, etc. 

Put. Subj. creyere, etc. 


6. Loss of i of the endings -ie- and -io when the stem of 
the verb ends in 11, n or j. 


Bullir — Pres. Part, bullendo 

Pret. Ind. Srd sing, .^rd pi. hullo, bulleron 
Impf. Subjs. bullese, etc.; bullera, etc. 

Put. Subj. bullere, etc. 

Brunir — [Pres. Part, brunendo 

Pret. Ind. Srd sing, and Srd pi. bruno, bruneron 
Impf. Subjs. brunese, etc.; brunera, etc. 

Put. Subj. brunere, etc. 


Decir — Pret. Ind. dijo, dijeron 

Impf. Subjs. dijese, etc.; dijera, etc. 
Put. Subj. dijere, etc. 




APPENDIX B 


137 


6. Verbs ending in -uir (not -guir and -quir) insert y at the 
end of the stem in certain forms, and also change i to y in the 
ending, as in group 4 above. 

Hmr — Pres. Part, huyendo 

Pres. Ind. huyo, huyes, huye, huyen 

Pres. Subj. huya huyas, huya, huyamos, huyais huyan 

Imperative singular huye 

Pret. Ind. 3rd sing, and 3rd pi. huyo, huyeron 
Impf. Subjs. huyese, etc.; huyera, etc. 

Put. Subj. huyere, etc. 


IV. RADICAL-CHANGING VERBS 

1. Class I (-ar and -er verbs), — If stressed, the stem 
vowel e >ie and o >ue. It occurs in only nine forms. 

Pensar — Pres. In,d. pienso, piensas, piensa, piensan 
Pres. Subj. piense, pienses, piense, piensen 

Imperative singular piensa 

Contar^ — Pres. Ind. cuento, cuentas, cuenta, cuentan 
Pres. Subj. cuente, cuentes, cuente, cuenten 

Imperative singular cuenta 

Perder — Pres. Ind. pierdo, pierdes, pierde, pierden 
Pres. Subj. pierda, pierdas, pierda, pierdan 
Imperative singular pierde 

Volver — Pres. Ind. vuelvo, vuelves, vuelve, vuelven 
Pres. Subj. vuelva, vuelvas, vuelva, vuelvan 
Imperative singular vuelve 

(a) If initial vowels are stressed, e >ye, and o >hue. 

Errar — Pres. Ind. yerro, yerras, yerra, yerran 
Pres. Subj. yerre, yerres, yerre, yerren 

Imperative singular yerra 

Oler — Pres. Ind. huelo, hueles, huele, huelen 
Pres. Subj. huela, huelas, huela, huelan 
Imperative singular huele 


Jugar (originally jogar) is inflected like contar. 




138 


APPENDIX B 


2. Class II (“ir verbs) D — If stressed, the stem vowel 
e >ie and o>ue, and also e >i and o >u if unstressed, in 
case the following syllable begins with -a-, -ie- or -io. 

Sentir — Pres. Part, sintiendo 

Pres. Ind. siento, sientes, siente, sienten 
Pres. Subj. sienta, sientas, sienta, sintamos, sintais, 
sientan 

Imperative singular siente 

Pret. Ind. sintio, sintieron 

Impf. Subjs. sintiese, etc.; sintiera, etc. 

Put. Subj. sintiere, etc. 

Donnir— Pres. Part, durmiendo 

Pres. Ind. duermo, duermes, duerme, duermen 
Pres. Subj. duenna, duermas, duerma, durmamos, 
durmais, duermen / 3 
Imperative singular duerme 
Pret. Ind. durmio, durmieron 
Impf. Subjs. durmiese, etc.; durmiera, etc. 

Put. Subj. durmiere, etc. 

3. Class III (“ir verbs).“ — If stressed, the stem vowel e >i, 
and also e >i if unstressed, in case the following syllable begins 
with ■ 



pidiendo 


Pres. Ind. pido, pides, pide, piden 

Pres. Sw^N^pida, pidas, pida, pidamos, pidais, pidan 

Imperative singular pide 

Pret. Ind. pidid, pidieron 

Impf. Subjs. pidiese, etc.; pidiera, etc. 

Put. Subj. pidiere, etc. 


1 Class II contains all verbs ending in -entir, -erir, and -ertir, as well 
as hervir. 

2 To class III belong all verbs ending in -ebir, -edir, -egir, -eguir, -eir< 
^emiTj -enchir, -endir, -enir, -estir and -etir, as well as servir. 



APPENDIX G 


139 


APPENDIX C 

Reference List of Irregular Verbs 


The numbers below in black faced type indicate paragraphs 
in the text where the complete conjugation of the verb is to 
be found; the numbers in light faced type indicate the model 
verb. The vowels in black faced type in the parentheses 
indicate the radical change which occurs. The capital letter 
JB, after a verb, refers to Appendix B; the Roman and Arabic 
numerals following B refer to sections of the Appendix. SuppL 
refers to the Supplement to Exercise I which treats of verb 
formation. 


A 


abrir SuppL C, VIII 

acertar (ie) 

88 

acordar(se) (ue) 

134 

acostar(se) (ue) 

134 

advertir (ie) 

102 

almorzar (ue) 

134 

andar 

54 

aprobar (ue) 

134 

argliir . B, 

m, 6 172 

arrepentirse (ie) 

102 

asir 

173 

atraer 

89 

atravesar (ie) 

88 

B 

brunir 

B, III, 5 

bullir 

B, III, 5 

c 

caber 

154 

caer 

142 

calentar (ie) 

88 


cenir (i) 

B, m, 5 

114 

cerrar (ie) 


88 

cocer (ue) 


78 

colegir (i) 

B, III, 2 

114 

colgar (ue) 


134 

comenzar (ie) 


88 

competir (i) 


116 

componer 


40 

concluir 

B, III, 6 

172 

conducir 


135 

confesar (ie) 


88 

conocer 


126 

conseguir (i) 

B, III, 2 

124 

consentir (ie) 


102 

construir 

B, III, 6 

172 

contar (ue) 


134 

contener 


7 

contribuir 

B, III, 6 

172 

convenir 


67 

convertir (ie) 


102 

corregir (i) 

B, III, 2 

124 

costar (ue) 


134 

creer 

B. Ill, 4 

cubrir 

SuppL C, 

vin 


140 


APPENDIX C 




D 





I 



dar 



77 

impedir (i) 



114 

decir 



28 

imponer 



40 

defender (ie) 

Suppl. 

A, I 

imprimir 

Suppl. C, 

VIII 

demostrar (ue) 



134 

incluir 

B, 

HI, 6 

172 

descender (ie) 

Suppl. 

A, I 

inducir 

B, 

III, 5 

135 

despedir (i) 



114 

introducir 

B, 

III, 5 

135 

despertar (ie) 



88 

ir 



53 

destruir B, 

Ill, 

6 

172 





devolver (ue) 



78 


J 



disminuir B, 

HI, 

6 

172 

jugar 



136 

disponer 



40 





distribuir B, 

HI, 

6 

172 


L 



divertir (ie) 



102 

leer 


B, III, 4 

dormir (ue) 



155 

lucir 

B, 

III, 2 

126 

E 





LI 



elegir (i) 



114 

Hover (ue) 



78 

empezar (ie) 



88 


TVT 



encender (ie) 

Suvvl. 

A, I 


M 



encontrar (ue) 



134 

manifestar (ie) 


88 

entender (ie) 

Suppl. 

A, I 

medir (i) 



114 

enviar B, 

Ill, 

3 

156 

mentir (ie) 



102 

envolver (ue) 



78 

morir 



125 

errar B, IV, 

1 (a) 

mostrar (ue) 



134 

escribir Suppl. C, 

VIII 

mover (ue) 



78 

estar 



16 










N 







negar (ie) 



88 

Vr 




nevar (ie) 



88 

gemir (i) 



114 










O 



H 




obtener 



7 

haber 



6 

oir 



143 

hacer 



27 

oler (ue) 



174 

heiar (ie) 



88 





herir (ie) 



102 


P 



hervir (ie) 



102 

parecer 



126 

huir 



172 

pedir (i) 



114 



APPENDIX C 


141 


pensar (ie) 


88 

perder (ie) 

B, 

IV, 1 

poder 


66 

poner 


40 

preferir (ie) 


102 

prender 

Suppl. C, 

VIII 

probar (ue) 


134 

producir 

B, III, 5 

135 

proponer 

Q 

40 

quebrar (ie) 


88 

querer 

E 

39 

recordar (ue) 


134 

referir (ie) 


102 

regar (ie) 


88 

regir (i) 

B, III, 2 

114 

reir (i) 


101 

rendir (i) 


114 

renir (i) 

B, III, 5 

114 

repetir (i) 


116 

reponer 


40 

retener 


7 

rogar (ue) 

B, III, 1 

134 

romper 

Suppl. C, 

VIII 


S 


saber 


76 

salir 


100 

satisfacer 


27 

seguir 


124 

sentar (ie) 


88 

sentir (ie) 


102 

ser 


15 

servir 


115 

soler (ue) 


78 

sonar (ue) 


134 

sonreir (i) 


101 

sonar (ue) 


134 

suponer 

T 

40 

temblar (ie) 


88 

tener 


7 

traducir 

B, III, 5 

135 

traer 


89 

tropezar (ie) 

V 

88 

valer 


144 

venir 


67 

ver 


87 

vestir 


116 

volar (ue) 


134 

volver 

- 

78 


142 


APPENDIX D 


APPENDIX D 

List of verbs governing the direct infinitive or Tequiring the 
prepositions a, de, en, por or con before a dependent infinitive. 


A 

abandonar (se) a, to give (oneself) 
up to 

abstenerse de, to refrain from 
acabar de, to finish, to have just; 

— por, to end by 
acceder a, to accede, agree to 
acomodarse a, to conform to 
aconsejar —, to advise to 
acordarse de, to remember 
acostumbrar —, to be used to; 

— (se) a, to become used to 
acudir a, to hasten to, go, come 
acusar de, to accuse of 
adherir(se) a, to stick to 
afanarse por, to exert oneself to 
aficionarse a, to become addicted 

to 

afirmar —, to affirm, declare 
afligirse de, to lament 
agraviarse de, to be grieved at 
ajustarse a, to agree to 
alcanzar a, to reach, attain to 
alegrarse de, to be glad to 
amenazar —, to threaten to; — 
con, to threaten with 
anhelar —, to long to 
animar a, to encourage to 
aplicarse a, to apply oneself to 
aprender a, to learn to 
apresurar(se) a, to hurry; hasten 
to 

aprovecharse de, to profit by 
apurarse por, to exert oneself to 
arrepentirse de, to repent of 
arriesgar con, to risk by 
asegurar —, to assure, claim to 
aspirar a, to aspire to 
asustarse de, to be frightened at 
atreverse a, to dare to 


autorizar a, to authorize to 
aventurarse a, to venture to 
avergonzarse de, to be ashamed of 
ayudar a, to aid, help to 

B 

bastar con, to be enough to 

C 

cansar(se) de, to tire, make 
(grow) weary of 
celebrar —, to be glad to 
cesar de, to cease to 
comenzar a, to begin, commence 
to 

complacerse en, to take pleasure 
in 

comprometer(se) a, to engage 
(oneself), agree to 
condenar a, to condemn to 
condescender a, to condescend to 
conducir a, to lead, conduct to 
confesar —, to confess 
confiar en, to trust, hope to 
conformarse a, to conform, agree 
to 

consagrar(se) a, to devote (one¬ 
self) to 

conseguir —, to succeed in 
consentir en, to consent to 
consistir en, to consist in 
conspirar a, to conspire to 
consumirse en, to be consumed in 
contar con, to count on 
contentarse con, to content one¬ 
self with; — de, to be satisfied 
to 

continuar a, to continue to 
contribuir a, to contribute to 


APPENDIX D 


143 


convenir(se) —, en, or a, to agree 
to 

convidar a, to invite to 
correr a, to run to 
creer —, to believe, think 

D 

dar a, to give to; — se a, to give 
oneself up to 

deber — , ought to, should; — de, 
ought to, must (supposition) 
decidir(se) — or a, to decide to 
declarar —, to declare 
dedicar (se) a, to dedicate, devote 
(oneself) to 

dejar —, to let, allow, permit to; 

— de, to cease to, stop 
deleitarse en, to take delight in 
desafiar a, to challenge to 
descender a, to descend to 
descuidar de, to neglect to 
desdenar(se) — or de, to disdain 
to , 

desear —, to desire, wish to 
desesperar(se) de, to despair of 
desistir de, to desist from 
destinar a, to destine to 
detenerse a, to stop to 
determinarse a, to determine to 
dignarse — or de, to deign to 
disculpar(se) de, to excuse one¬ 
self for 

dispensar de, to excuse from 
disponer(se) a, to get ready, 
prepare to 

disuadir de, to dissuade from 
divertirse en or con, to amuse 
oneself by or with 
dudar — , to doubt; — en, to 
hesitate to 

E 

echar(se) a, to begin to 
elegir — , to choose to 
empenarse en, to insist on 
empezar a, to begin to 


encargarse de, to undertake to 
ensenar a, to teach to 
entrar a, to enter on, begin to 
entretener(se) a, to entertain 
oneself by or with 
enviar a, to send to 
equivocarse en, to be mistaken in 
escuchar —, to listen to 
esforzar(se) a, en or por, to at¬ 
tempt to 

esmerarse en, to take pains in 
esperar —, to hope to 
estar para, to be about to; — 
por, to be inclined to 
evitar —, to avoid 
excitar a, to excite to 
excusar(se) de, to excuse (one- 
* self) from 
exhortar a, to exhort to 
exponer(se) a, to expose (one¬ 
self) to 

F 

f astidiar (se) de, to weary, be 
weary of 

fatigar(se) de, to tire, be tired of 
felicitar(se) de, to congratulate 
(oneself) on 

fijarse en, to pay attention to 
fingir —, to pretend to 
forzar a, to force to 

G 

gozar(se) de, to enjoy; — (se) 
en, to take pleasure in 
gaardarse de, to guard against 

H 

haber de, to have to 
habituar(se) a, to accustom (one¬ 
self) to 

hacer —, to make, have; — por, 
to try to 

hartarse de, to be sated with 
humillar(se) a, to humiliate (one¬ 
self) to 


APPENDIX D 


144 


I 

imaginarse — , to Imagine 
impedir — , to prevent, hinder 
impeler a, to impel to 
mcitar a, to incite to 
inclinar a, to induce to; — se a, 
to be inclined to 
incomodarse de, to be annoyed 
at; — por, to put oneself out 
to 

indignarse de, to be indignant at 
inducir a, to induce to 
insistir en, to insist on 
inspirar a, to inspire to 
intentar —, to try, attempt 
invitar a, to invite to 
ir a, to go to 

J 

jactarse de, to boast of 
jurar —, to swear to 
justificar(se) de, to justify (one¬ 
self) for 

L 

librar de, to free from 
limitar(se) a, to limit (oneself) to 
lograr —, to succeed in 

LI 

Uegar a, to come to, succeed in 

M 

mandar —, to command, have; 

— a, to send to 
matarse por, to try hard to 
meditar en, to meditate upon 
merecer — , to deserve to 
meterse a, to undertake to 
mezclarse en, to take part in 
mirar — , to look at 
morirse por, to be dying to 

N 

necesitar —, to need to 
negar —, to deny; — se a, to 
decline, refuse to 


O 

obligar(se) a, to oblige (oneself) 
to 

obstinarse en, to persist in 
ocupar(se) en, to busy (oneself) 
with or in 
odiar —, to hate to 
ofrecer(se) —, to offer, promise 
to; —(se) a, to offer to 
oir —, to hear 

olvidar —, to forget to; —(se) de, 
to forget to 

oponerse a, to be opposed to 
ordenar —, to order to 

P 

pararse a, to stop to 
parecer —, to seem to 
particularizarse en, to specialize 
in 

pasar a, to proceed, pass to 
pensar —, to intend to; — en, 
to think of 

permitir —, to permit to 
perseverar en, to persevere in 
persistir en, to persist in 
persuadir(se) a, to persuade (one¬ 
self) to 

poder —, to be able to, can, may 
poner a, to put to; —se a, to 
begin to 

preciarse de, to boast of 
preferir —, to prefer to 
preparar(se) a, to prepare 
presumir —, to presume to 
pretender —, to preten^, try to 
principiar a, to begin to 
privar(se) de, to deprive, be de¬ 
prived of 

probar a, to try to 
proceder a, to proceed to 
procurar —, to try to 
prohibir —, to forbid 
prometer —, to promise to 
proponer —, to propose to 
provocar a, to provoke to 
pugnar por, to strive, struggle for 


APPENDIX D 


Q 

quedar(se) a, to remain to; — 
en to agree to; — por, to be 
considered as 

quejarse de, to complain of 
querer —, to wish to 

R 

rabiar por, to be crazy to 
recelarse —, to fear 
recomendar —, to recommend to 
reconocer —, to acknowledge, 
confess to 

recordar —, remember 
recrear(se) en, to divert (oneself) 
by 

reducir(se) a, to bring (oneself) to 
rehtisar(se) — or a to refuse to 
renunciar a, to renounce 
resignarse a, to resign oneself, 
submit to 

resistirse a, to resist 
resolver(se) a, to resolve, decide 
to 

reventar por, to be bursting to 
S 

saber —, to know how, be able 
to, can 

salir a, to go out to 
sentarse a, to sit down to 


145 

sentir — , to regret, be sorry to 
ser de, to be 

servirse —, to please, be so kind 
as to 

sobresalir en, to excel in 
soler —, to be used, accustomed 
to 

soltar a, to start to 
someter(se) a, to submit (one¬ 
self) to 

sonar con, to dream of 
sospechar de, to suspect of 
sostener —, to maintain, affirm 
subir a, to go up to 
sugerir —, to suggest 

T 

tardar en, to delay, be long in 
temer —, to fear to 
terminar en, to end by 
tornar a, to return to, to . - 
again 

tratar de, to try to 
V 

vacilar en, to hesitate to 
valerse de, to avail oneself of 
venir a, to come to 
ver —, to see 
volar a, to fly to 
volver a, to return to, to . o o 
again 





VOCABULARIES 


The Spanish-English vocabulary is above, the English-Spanish below the dividing line. 
The radical-changing verbs are shown by (ie), (ue), and (i) placed after the verb. If a 
verb is followed by an infinitive without a preposition, it is shown by (—); if a preposition 
is required, (a), (de), (en), (por), (con) are used. The numbers refer to paragraphs. 


a 

a to, at; — lo lejos in the dis¬ 
tance; — menudo often; — tra- 
ves de across; al (-h injin.) on, 
upon (+ 'pres. part.); al menos 
at least; al por mayor wholesale 
abierto, -a open 
abril m. April 

abrir (Suppl. Ex. 1 , C, VIII) open 
acabar finish; — de have just 
aceptar accept 
acera /. sidewalk 
acercarse (a) (App. B, III, 1) 
approach 

acompanar accompany, go with 
acontecimiento m. event 
acordarse (ue) (de) 134 remember 
acostarse (ue) 134 go to bed 
acre m. acre 
active, -a active 
acudir (a) come up 
adecuado, -a adequate 
adelantado, -a advanced 
adelantar. advance, improve, pro¬ 
gress 

adelante: mfis —, farther along 
adios good-by 


alg 

adjetivo m. adjective 
admirar admire 
admitir admit 
adornar adorn, decorate 
adquirir acquire 
adverbio m. adverb 
afan m. eager desire 
aficionado, -a fond of 
afmo. = afectisimo very affection¬ 
ate 

agitar wave 
agosto m. August 
agradable agreeable 
agricola agricultural 
agricultura /. agriculture 
agua /. water; salto de —, 
waterfall 
ahora now 
aire m. air 
alcanzar attain, reach 
alegrarse (de) be glad (of) 
algo something 
algodon m. cotton 
alguien someone 

alguno, -a; algun some; pi. some, 
a few 


a, an un m., una /. 
about prep, de; por; {approxi¬ 
mately) cosa de, poco mas o 
menos; (concerning) de; be — 
to estar (16) para 
accept aceptar 

accordingly por consiguiente, por 
eso, por lo tanto 
acquaintance conocido m. 
adventure aventura /. 
afraid: be — (of) tener (7) miedo 
(de), temer (—) 


after prep, despues de; conj. 
despues que 

afternoon tarde/.; in the —, (de/- 
inite hour) de la tarde, (in- 
dejinite hour) por la tarde 
again otra vez; see —, volver 
(ue) (78) a ver; she spoke —, 
volvio a hablar; I shall come —, 
volvere a venir 

ago: two days —, hace dos dias 
agricultural agricola 
airplane aeroplano m. 






ali 


VOCABULARIES 


• arr 


alimento m. food 

Almirante m. Admiral 

alto, -a high; loud; de —, high; 

lo —, the top 
altura /. height 
alia there 
alii there 
amar love 
amarillo, -a yellow 
Amazonas m. sing. Amazon 
ameno, -a pleasant 
America /. America; — Central 
Central America; — del Norte 
North America; — del Sur 
South America 
amiga /. friend {female) 
amigo m. friend {male) 
amistad /. friendship 
amor m. love 
ancho broad, wide 
andar 64 go (about) 
anexar annex 
angel m. angel 
animal m. animal 
ante before 

antemano: de —, beforehand 
anteojos m. -pi. glasses, spectacles 
anterior preceding, previous 
antes (de) before; cuanto —, as 
soon as possible 
antigiiedad /. antiquity 
antiguo, -a ancient 


Antillas /. pi. West Indies 
anadir add 

ano m. year; tener . . . —s be 
. . . years old 
apenas scarcely, hardly 
aplicar apply (App. B, III 1, l) 
apoderarse (de) seize 
apreciar appreciate 
aprender learn 

aprovecharse (de) take advantage 
of 

apuntar note down 
aquel, -11a, -llos, -lias adj. that; 
the former 

aquel, -11a, aquello {neut.), -llos, 
-lias pron. that (one); the 
former 

aqui here; por — , this way 
arana /. spider; tela de —, spider 
web 

araucano, -a Araucanian 
arbol m. tree; — de cacao cocoa 
tree 

arbusto m. bush 
area /. ark 

argentine, -a Argentinian 
arido, -a dry 
aroma m. aroma, odor 
arquitecto m. architect, builder 
arquitectura /. architecture 
arrancar (App. B, III, 1) draw 
forth * ' 


all todo; — I can todo lo posible; 

— that rel. pron. todo lo que; 

— the same no obstante 
allow permitir 
almost casi 
alone solo, -a 
already ya 
also tambien 

I although aunque 
always siempre 

America America Central —, 

(la) America Central; North —, 

(la) America del Norte; South 
—, (la) America del Sur 

148 


American americano, -a 
ancient antiguo, -a 
and y, {before i- or hi-) e 
Andes los Andes 
another otro, -a 
answer responder (a), contestar 
any: not — more no mas 
anything alguna cosa; {with nega¬ 
tive) nada 

anyway de todos modos, sea como 
fuere 

apple manzana /. 

Aragon Aragon m. 

Argentina (la) Argentina/. 





arr 


VOCABULARIES 


be 


arrastrar pull 
arte /. art 
articulo m. article 
asegurar assure 

asemejarse resemble each other 

asfalto m. asphalt 

asi so, thus 

asiento m. seat 

asir 173 seize 

asombrar astonish, amaze 

astronomico, -a astronomical 

astronomo m. astronomer 

asunto m. topic, matter 

Atenas Athens 

atencion /. attention 

Atlantico m. Atlantic 

atractivo, -a attractive 

atravesar (ie) 88 cross 

atreverse dare 

aturdir deafen 

aun even 

aunque although 

automovil m. automobile 

avanzar advance 


avena /. oats 
avenida /. avenue 
aventura /. adventure 
ayer yesterday 
ayuda /. aid, help 
ayudar aid, help 
azteca m. & f. Aztee 
azucar m. sugar 
azucarero, -a sugar 
azufre m. sulphur 
azul blue 

bajar descend, get ofif (out), go. 

(come) down 
bajo hanging; under 
banana /. banana 
bananero, -a banana 
banco m. bank 
banarse bathe 
barro m. clay 
basar base 

bastante enough, sufficient, plenty;, 
quite 

baya /. berry 


arrival llegada /. 
arrive (at) llegar (a) (App. B, 
III, 1, 2) 

as tan; como; de; en vez de; 

— {adj. or adv.) —, tan . . . 
como; — for en cuanto a; — 
many —, tantos, -as; — much 
—, tanto como; — soon —, 
asi que, luego que, tan pronto 
como; — soon — possible tan 
pronto como sea posible; — 
well —, asi como, lo mismo que 

ask (favor) pedir (i) 114; (ques¬ 
tion) preguntar; — questions 
hacer (27) preguntas; (invite) 
convidar 

asphalt asfalto m.; — lake lago 
(m.) de asfalto 

at en; — least al (a lo) menos; 

— once en seguida 
attention atencion pay —, 

prestar atencion 


aunt tia /. 

automobile automovil m. 
autumn otono m. 
away a una distancia de 
Aztec azteca m. or f. 

bad malo, -a; be — weather 
hacer (27) mal tiempo 
bag saco m. 

banana platano m., banana /.; 

— plantation platanal m. 
bathe banarse 

be estar 16, ser 15 (for distinction 
between estar and ser see 13 
and 14); hallarse; — able 
poder (—) 66; — about to 

estar (16) para; — afraid (of) 
tener (7) miedo (de), temer 
(—); — a lack of faltar; — a 
question of tratarse de; — as 
rich as valer 144; — careful 
(to) tener cuidado (de); — 


149 





be 


VOCABULARIES 


bro 


bebida /. drink 
biblioteca f. library 
bien well; really, indeed 
bienvenida /. welcome; dar la —, 
welcome 

bianco, -a white 
boca f. mouth 
bolsillo m. pocket 


bondad; tenga la —, please 
bordo: a —, on board 
bosque m. forest, wood 
botanico, -a botanical 
boton button 
Brasil m. Brazil 
brasileno, -a Brazilian 
bronce m. bronze 


cold {living beings) tener (7) 
frio, {objects) estar (16) frio, 
{weather) hacer (27) frio; — 
cool {weather) hacer (27) fresco; 

— dusty haber (6) polvo; — 
five o’clock ser (15) las cinco; 

— fond of ser (15) aficionado, 
—a (a); — glad alegrarse (de); 

— very glad to tener (7) mucho 
gusto en; — homesick tener 
(7) nostalgia; — hot {weather) 
hacer (27) calor; — hungry 
tener (7) hambre; — in favor 
of estar (16) por; — in want 
of hacer (27) falta a; — long in 
tar dar en; — moonlight haber 
(6) luna; — right tener (7) 
razon; — seasick marearse; — 
sleepy tener (7) sueno; — 
sorry sentir (ie) 102 ; — sunny 
haber (6) (hacer 27) sol; — that 
as it may sea como fuere; — 
thirsty tener (7) sed; — tired 
estar (16) cansado, -a; — true 
ser (15) verdad; — warm {liv¬ 
ing beings) tener (7) calor, 
{weather) hacer (27) calor; — 
windy hacer (27) viento; — 
worn out no poder (66) mas; 

— worth valer (144); — wrong 
no tener (7) razon; —... 
years old tener (7) . . . anos; 
there is (are) hay; there will be 
habra; they have been there 
several days hace varies dias 
que estan alii 

beach play a /. 

bean {of cocoa) semilla /. 


beautiful hermoso, -a 
beauty hermosura /. 
because porque 

become hacerse 27, llegar (App. 

B, III, 1, 2) a ser 
bed: go to —, acostarse (ue) 134 
beef came /.; — extract extracto 
(m.) de came 

before adj. {'preceding) anterior 
before prep, {time) antes de ( + 
infin.) 

beforehand de antemano 
beg mendigar (App. B, III, 1, 2) 
begin principiar, comenzar (ie) 
(a) 88 (App. B, III, 1, 4) 
believe creer (App. B, III, 4) 
berry baya/.; coffee — , baya de 
cafe 

besides adema^ 
best mejor 

better mejor; like —, gustar 
mas a, preferir (ie) (—) 102 
between entre 
blue azul 

board: on —, a bordo 
boarding house casa /. de hues- 
pedes 

boat vapor m. 

book libro w.; little —, librito m. 

borrow pedir (i) (114) prestado 

both los (las) dos 

bottle botella /., frasco m. 

box caja /. 

boy muchacho m. 

breakfast desayunarse 

bring traer 89 

broad ancho, -a 

brother hermano m. 






bue 


VOCABULARIES 


cas 


bueno, -a good 
buque m. boat 
burro m. donkey 
busca /. search 

buscar (App. B, III, 1) look for 
cabal exact 

caballar: ganado —, horses and 
mules 

caballo m. horse: a —, on horse¬ 
back 

caber 154 be contained; no cabe 
duda there is no doubt 
cabeza /. head 
cacao m. cocoa 
cacaotal m. cocoa plantation 
cada each 
caer(se) 142 fall 
cafe m. coffee 
cafeto m. coffee plant 
caja /. box 
caldera /. boiler 
calendario m. calendar 
calentar (ie) 88 heat 
calido, -a warm 
caliente warm 

calor m. heat; hacer —, be warm 
caluroso, -a warm 
calle /. street 
cambiar change 


cambio m. change 
camino m. way, road 
campana /. bell 
campesino m. farmer 
campo m. country; field 
canal m. canal 
canasto m. basket 
cancion /. song 
cansado, -a tired; tiresome 
cantidad f. amount, quantity 
cana /. cane; — de azucar sugar 
cane 

Canaveral m. sugar plantation 

capa /. layer 

capital /. capital (city) 

capitan m. captain 

capitolio m. capitol 

cara /. face 

caracteristico, -a characteristic 

carbon m. coal 

carga /. freight 

cargamento m. cargo 

cargar load 

caribe Caribbean 

came /. meat; — de vaca beef 

carpintero m. carpenter 

carrera /. race 

carreta /. cart, wagon 

carta /. letter 

casa /. home, house 


bunch racimo m. 
business comercio m.; fruit —, 
comercio frutero 
busy ocupado, -a 
but pero, sino, sino que {for dis¬ 
tinction see 36, 2 and 36, 2, 
footnote l); nothing —, no mas 
que, nada mas que 
buy comprar 

by para (see 112); por (see 113, 
6 and 7); de {see 133, foot¬ 
note 3); — three o’clock para 
los tres 

cabin camarote m.. 

call llamar; — on visitar; be —ed 


llamarse 

camel camello m. 
can {'physical ability) poder (ue) 
66 ; — stand no more no poder 
mas; {mental ability) saber 76; 
all I —, todo lo posible 
canal canal m. 

candy bombon m., dulces m. pi. 
cane: sugar —, cana (/.) de 
azucar 

capital {city) capital /. 

captain capitan m. 

car automovil m. 

careful: be —, tener (7) cuidado 

(de) 

carry llevar 






cas 


VOCABULARIES 


com 


casi almost 

casita /. hut, little house 
caso: en — de que in case 
Castillo m. castle 
catedral /. cathedral 
caucho m. rubber 
celebrar celebrate 
celebre celebrated 
cemento m. cement 
centavo m. cent 
central central 
centro m. center 
cerca (de) near 
cereal m. grain 
cerrar (ie) 88 close 
cerro m. hill 
ciencia /. science 
cientifico, -a scientific 
ciento (cien) one hundred 


cierto, -a certain 
cilindro m. cylinder 
cinco five 
ciudad /. city 
civilizacion /. civilization 
claramente clearly 
claro, -a clear 
clase /. class, kind 
clima m. climate 
cobre m. copper 
coleccion /. collection 
colgar (ue) 134 hang 
Colon Columbus 
color m. color 
Colorado, -a colored 
comer eat 

comercial commercial 
comerciante m. merchant 
comercio m. commerce 


cash hacer (27) efectivo, -a; for 
—, al contado; pay — for 
pagar (App, B, III, 1, 2) al 
contado 

Castile Castilla /. 
catch: — cold resfriarse 
catholic catolico, -a 
cent centavo m. 
center centro m. 
certain cierto, -a 
certainly por supuesto 
chain cadena /.; little —, cade- 
nita /. 

chair silla/.; large —, sillon m. 
chapter capitulo m. 
charming encantador, —a 
cheap barato, -a 
child nino m. 

Chile Chile m. 

Chilean chileno, -a 
chocolate chocolate m. 

Christ Cristo m. 

Christopher Cristobal vi. 
church iglesia /. 

city ciudad/.; Mexico City Ciudad 
de Mejico 

civilization civilizacion /. 


class clase /. ; composition —, 
clase de composicion; history 
—, clase de historia 
clay barro m. 
close cerrar (ie) 88 
closely estrechamente 
clothes vestidos m. pi. 
cloud nube /. 
coast costa /. 
coat americana /. 
cocoa cacao m. 

coffee cafe m.; — berry baya de 
cafe; — plantation cafetal V 2 . 
cold frio, -a; be — {living beings) 
tener (7) frio; {objects) estar 
(16) frio; {weather) hacer (27) 
frio; catch — , resfriarse 
collection coleccion /, 

Colombia Colombia /. 
colonel coronel m. 

Columbus Colon m. 
come venir (a) 67; — in pasar, 
entrar; — on! i venga! — Up 
subir 

comfortable comodo, -a 
commonly comunmente, general- 
mente 


152 





com 


VOCABULARIES 


cri 


como as, as if 
como how 

companero m. companion 
comparar compare 
completar complete 
completo, -a complete 
comprar (a) buy (from) 
comprender understand 
compuerta/. gate {of a canal lock) 
comunicacion /. communication 
comunmente commonly 
con with; — mucho gusto very 
gladly, very willingly 
concentracion /. concentration 
concurrido, -a frequented, well 
attended 

conducir 136 conduct, drive, lead, 
take 

conductor m. conductor 
congelar freeze 
conmigo with me 
conocer 126 be (become) ac¬ 
quainted with; know; meet 
conocido m. acquaintance 
conquistador m. conqueror 
conquistar conquer 
conservat preserve 
considerable considerable 
considerar look upon, observe 
consign with him(self) 
consiguiente: por —, conse¬ 
quently 

constar consist 
constelacion /. constellation 
construccion /. structure, con¬ 
struction; madera de . —, 


lumber 

construir 172 construct 
contado: al — , cash; for cash 
contar (ue) 134 relate, tell 
contemplar contemplate 
contener 7 contain 
contento, -a glad, pleased 
continente m. continent 
continuamente steadily 
contra against 

convencer (App. B, III, 2, 1) 
convince 

conveniente proper, suitable 
convertir (ie) 102 convert 
corbata /. cravat, necktie 
cordillera /. mountain range 
correr run 

corresponder be equal; reply 

cortar cut 

corte m. cut 

cortesmente courteously 

corteza /. bark 

corto, -a short 

cosa /. thing; — de about 

cosecha /. crop, harvest 

costa /. coast 

costar (ue) 134 cost 

costoso, -a costly 

costumbre /. custom, habit 

creer (App. B, III, 4) believe 

criada /. servant 

cristalizacion crystallization 

cristianismo m. Christianity 

cristiano, -a Christian 

Cristo Christ 

Cristobal Christopher 


compatriot compatriota vi. 
complain quejarse 
composition composicion /. 
concerning de; en cuanto a 
conduct conducir 135 
congenial simpatico, -a 
conquer veneer (App. B, III, 2, 1) 
constantly sin parar 
contain contener 7 
cool fresco; be — {weather) hacer 


(27) fresco 

Costa Rica Costa Rica /. 
costly costoso, -a 
cotton algodon m. 
country pais m. 

course: of —, por supuesto; take 
—s (at) haberse matriculado, 
-a (en) 

court (yard) patio m. 
cousin primo m. 

153 







cro 


VOCABULARIES 


dep 


cuadro m. picture 
cual, el, etc. which, who 
cualquier any 

cuando when; de vez en —, from 
time to time 
<j cuando? when.? 
cuanto, -a as much as; — antes 
as soon as possible; — mas 
tanto mas the more, the more; 
en — a as to, concerning, as 
for 

I cuanto ? -a how much ? 'pl. -os, 
-as how many.? 
cuarenta forty 
cuatro four 

cuatrocientos, -as four hundred 
cubano, -a Cuban 
cubierta /. deck; sobre —, on 
deck 

cuenca /. basin 

cuenta /. account; darse — de 
realize 

cuento m. story, tale 
cuero m. hide 
cuerpo m. body 

cuidado m. care; tener — de be 
careful of 
culpar blame 

cultivador m. farmer, planter 
cultivarse be cultivated 
cultivo m. cultivation; sin —, 
wild 

culto, -a cultured 
cumbre /. peak, summit 
curioso, -a curious 
curtir tan 

cuyo, -a whose, of which 


chileno, -a Chilean 
chofer m. chauffeur 
chuno m. frozen potatoes 

dar 77 give; — con happen upon, 
encounter; — gracias thank; 

— la bienvenida welcome; — se 
cuenta (de) realize 

de of; from; on; as; by; in; 
with; (before numbers) than; 

— antemano beforehand; — 
lo que than; — proposito pur¬ 
posely; — repente suddenly 

debajo de under 

deber owe; ought; must have, 
were obliged to 
debido, -a due, suitable 
decidirse (a) decide 
decir 28 say, tell; es —, that is 
to say; querer —, mean; se 
dice it is said; se me dijo I 
was told 
declarar declare 
dedicar devote 

dedo m.: — de la mano finger; — 
del pie toe 
defender defend 

dejar allow, leave, let, permit; — 
de fail to; cease to 
delicado, -a delicate 
Delicia /. Delight 
demas rest, others 
demasiado too 
dentro de within 
depender depend 
deporte m. sport 
deposit© m. container 


cross atravesar 

cross cruz gold —, cruz de 
oro 

Cuba Cuba /. 

Cuban cubano, -a 
cup taza /. 
cut cortar 

daughter hija /. 


day dia m ; every —, todos los 
dias, cada dia 

deal: — with tratar de; a great 
—, mucho 

decide decidirse (a), decidir (—) 
deck cubierta on —, sobre 
cubierta 

delicious delicioso, -a 
delightful encantador, -a 


154 





des 


VOCABULARIES 


dus 


desagradable disagreeable 
desagiie m. overflow 
desarrollar develop 
descansar rest 
descargar unload 
desconocido, -a unknown 
describir describe 
descubridor m. discoverer 
descubrir discover, disclose 
desde from, since; — donde 
from where 

desear desire, wish, want 
desembarcar disembark, land 
desesperarse despair, be desper¬ 
ate 

deshacerse (de) 27 get rid of 
deslizamiento m. slide 
despacio slowly 
despertarse (ie) 88 awake 
despues afterward; — de after 
destine m. destination 
destruir destroy 172 
detenerse stop 7 
determinado, -a definite 
dia m. day 
diariamente daily 
diario m. daily 
diciembre m. December 
dicho m. saying 
diecinueve nineteen 
dieciocho eighteen 
diecisiete seventeen 
diez ten 

diferente different 


dificil difficult 
diluvio m. flood 
dinero m. money 
dios m. god 

direccion /. control, direction 
distancia /. distance 
distante distant 

distinguido, -a distinguished, fa¬ 
mous 

distribucion /. distribution 
distrito m. district 
divertirse (ie) 102 amuse oneself, 
have a good time 
dividir divide 

divisar catch a glimpse of, see at 
a distance 
doce twelve 

donde where; in which; on 
which; de —, from which; 
desde —, from where; hasta 
—, up to which 
i donde ? where ? 

Dona {before given name of woman) 
Mrs. 

dormir 155 sleep; — se fall asleep 
dos two 

doscientos, -as two hundred 
duda /, doubt; no cabe —, there 
is no doubt 
dudar doubt 
dueno m. owner 
durante during 
durar last 
duro, -a hard 


description descripcion /. 
desire desear 
die morir (ue) 125 
discover descubrir 
district distrito m. 
do hacer 27 ; — you ? l verdad ? 
not — any less than no poder 
(66) menos de 
doctor medico m. 

Dominic Domingo m. 
door puerta /. 
doorway puerta /. 


doubt dudar 

down: get (go) —, bajar; fall—, 
caerse 142 
downstairs aba jo 
dozen docena f. 
draft letra /. 
dress vestir(se) (i) 116 
drink tomar, beber 
drinking (el) beber 
dry secar (App.'fB, III, 1,1) 
during durante, en 
dusty: be —, haber (6) polvo 


155 





e 


VOCABULARIES 


esc 


e and 

€char: — de menos miss 
€dad /. age 
edicion /. edition 
edificar build 
edificio m. building 
efectivo, -a: hacer —, cash 
ejemplar m. copy 
ejemplo: por —, for example 
el (la, lo, los, las) the; — que 
the one that (who); — de 
that of; los (las) que those who 
(which) 

electrico, -a electric 
elegir (i) 114 elect 
elevado, -a high 
elocuencia /. eloquence; con —, 
eloquently 

embargo: sin —, nevertheless, 

however 

empenarse (en) insist (on) 
empezar (ie) 88 begin 
empleado m. employee 
emplear employ 
emprender start 

en on; during; in; at; — se- 
guida at once 

encaje m. lace; — de nanduti 
spider lace 

encantador, -a charming, delight¬ 
ful 

encanto m. charm 
encargarse (App. B, III, 1, 2) 

(de) take charge (of) 


early temprano, -a; get up —, 
levantarse temprano, madrugar 
(App. B, III, 1, 2) 
easily facilmente 
easy facil 
eat comer, tomar 
eating (el) comer 
eiglit ocho 

eighty-five ochenta y cinco 
either: not to me —, ni a mi 
tampoco 

elegant elegante, hermoso, -a. 


encarnado, -a red 

encontrar (ue) 134 find; —se be; 

be found; —se con meet 
enfermo, -a ill, sick 
ensenar teach 

entender (App B, IV, 1) hear 
entero, -a entire 
entonces then 
entrada /. entrance 
entrar (en with noun or pron.) 
enter; go (come) in; get on 
(in) 

entre among, between; por —, 
between 

entregar (App. B, III, 1, 2) hand 
over 

entretanto meanwhile 
entusiasmo m. enthusiasm 
entusiasta m. & f. enthusiast 
enviar send 
epico, -a epic 
epoca /. epoch, period 
equivocarse (App. B, III, 1, 1) be 
mistaken 
era /. era 

escala /. port; hacer —, anchor, 
stop 

escalon m. step, stage 
escena /. scene 
esclava /. slave 
esclusa /. lock 

escribir (Suppl. Ex. 1, C, VIII) 
write 

escuela /. school 


apuesto, -a 
Elizabeth Isabel 
emerald esmeralda /. 
endure soportar, sufrir 
engineer ingeniero m. 

English {language) ingles m.; adj. 

ingles, -a 
enough bastante 

enter entrar (en with noun or 
pronoun), pasar 
enthusiasm entusiasmo m. 
entire entero, -a 


156 





ese 


VOCABULARIES 


fac 


ese, -a, -os, -as adj. that 
ese, -a, -eso x{neut.), -os, -as 
pron. that (one); por eso accord¬ 
ingly 

esmeralda /. emerald 
Espana /. Spain 
espanol, -a Spanish 
espanol m. Spanish 
especialmente specially 
espera /. wait 

esperar await, wait, wait for; 
hope 

espiritu m. spirit 
establecer 126 establish 
establecimiento m. establish¬ 
ment, factory 
estaca /. stake 
estacion /. station; season 
estado m. state 

Estados Unidos m. pi. United 
States 

estancia /. ranch 
estano m. tin 

estar be; — para be ready (about) 
to; — por be in favor of 
estatua /. statue 
este, -a, -os, -as adj. this; the 
latter 

este, -a, esto (neut.), -os, -as 
pron. this (one); the latter 
este m. east; al —, on the east 
estrechamente closely 
estrujar crush 


estudiar study 
estudio m. study 
Europa f. Europe 
europeo m. European 
evidente evident, clear 
exactamente exactly 
exacto, -a exact, accurate 
examinar examine 
exito m. success; con —, success¬ 
fully 

expedicion f. expedition 
expertisimo, -a very expert 
explicar (App. B, III, 1, 1) ex¬ 
plain 

explorador m. explorer 
explorar explore 

exportacion /. exportation, ex¬ 
port 

exportar export 
expresar express 
expresion /. expression 
extenderse (ie) (App. B, IV, 1) 
extend 

extenso, -a extensive 
exterior foreign 
extracto m. extract 

fabrica /. factory, mill 
fabricar (App. B, III, 1, 1) manu¬ 
facture, make, shape 
fabuloso, -a fabulous, wonderful 
facil easy 
facilmente easily 


especially especialmente, sobre 
todo 

evening noche /.; in the —, por 
la noche 

every todo; — day todos los dias 
everything todo 
evident evidente 

examination examen m,; spring 
—, examen de primavera 
exceedingly muy; — rich riqui- 
simo 

exercise cjercicio m. 
expect esperar 


expense gasto m.\ trip —s gastos 
de viaje 

experienced experto, -a 
explain explicar (App. B, III, 1, 1) 
explorer explorador m. 
export exportar 

extract extracto m.; beef —, ex¬ 
tracto de came 

eye ojo m.; my —s are tired 
tengo los ojos cansados 

face cara /. 

fact dato m.; in —, en efecto 






fai 


VOCABULARIES 


fri 


falda /, slope, side 
falta/.: hacer (27) —a lack 
fama /. fame, reputation 
familia /. family 
famoso, -a famous 
favor w.: haga el — de please 
favorable favorable 
favorito, -a favorite 
fe /. faith 
fertil fertile 
ferrocarril m. railroad 
figurarse imagine; se me figura 
it seems to me 
fijarse (en) pay attention 
filtracion /. filtration 
fin m. end; a — de que so that; 


al —, finally 
fino, -^a fine 
flor /. flower 
flota /. fleet 
flotar float 
forma f. form 
formar form 
fortaleza /. fortress 
francos m. French 
Francia /. France 
frase f. phrase 
frecuente frequent 
fresco, -a cool, fresh; hacer (27) 
—, be cool 
frio, -a cold 
frio w. cold 


fail dejar de 
fair rubio, -a 
fall caer(se) 142 
famous famoso, -a 
fan abanico m. 
far lejos 

fast de prisa, rapidamente 
father padre m. 

favor: be in — of estar (16) por 
fear tencr (6) miedo de, temer (—) 
feel sentir (ie) 102; — like tener 
(7) gana(s) de 
Ferdinand Fernando 
few: a —, unos, -as 
field campo m. 
fifteen quince 
fifth quinto, -a 
fifty cincuenta 

filled lleno, -a; — with lleno de 
finally al fin 

find hallar, encontrar (ue) 134, 
buscar (App. B, III, 1, 1) 
fine bueno, -a; the weather is —, 
hace buen tiempo 
finish acabar (de) 
first primer(o), -a 
fit caber 164 

five cinco; be — o’clock ser (15) 
las cinco 
flee huir 172 


flower flor /. 
fluently facilmente 
follow seguir 124 
fond: be — of ser (15) aficionado, 
-a (a) 

foolish necio, -a; what a — ques¬ 
tion! i que pregunta tan necia ! 
foot pie m. 

football futbol m.; play —, jugar 
(136) al futbol 

for para, por {for distinction be¬ 
tween para and por see 112 and 
113); — a long time hace 

(hacia) mucho tiempo; — 
several years they had not seen 
each other hacia varios anos 
que no se veian 
foreign extranjero, -a 
foreigner extranjero m. 
forget olvidar; I (they) forgot 
se me (les) olvido 
former aquel, -11a, -llos, -lias 
formerly antes 

fountain fuente /.; — pen pluma 
fuente /. 

four cuatro; be — o’clock ser 
(15) las cuatro 
France Francia /. 

French frances, -a 
friend amigo m., amiga /. 

158 





fro 


VOCABULARIES 


gue 


frontera /. frontier 
fruta /. fruit 
frutal fruit 

fuente /. spring, fountain; source 
fuerte strong 
fuerza /. power 
futbol m. football 

gana /. desire; de buena —, 
willingly; de mala —, unwill¬ 
ingly; tener — de be desirous of 
ganaderia /. stock raising 
ganado w. stock; — caballar 
horses and mules; — lanar 
sheep and goats; — vacimo 
•cows 

ganar gain, win, earn 

gaucho m. Argentinian cowboy 

general general; por lo —, 


generally 

generalmente generally, usually 
geografia /. geography 
gerundio m. present participle 
gigantesco, -a gigantic, huge 
gobernador m. governor 
golfo m. gulf 
golpe m. blow;.bruise 
goma f. rubber 
gondola /. gondola, boat 
gozar (App. B, III, 1, 4) (de) 
enjoy 

gozo m. delight, pleasure 
gracias /. pL thanks; dar (77) 
—, thank 

grande (gran) large; great 
grano m. grain 
grito m. cry, shout 
guerra /. war 


from de; desde; — time to time 
de cuando (vez) en cuando; — 
where de donde 

front: in — of delante de, en 
frente de 

frontier frontera /. 
fruit frutero, -a 
fruit fruta /. 
full lleno, -a 

furnish proporcionar, dar 77 

Gatun Gatun; lake —, lago de 
Gatun 

General General 

get obtener 7, recibir; traer 89; 
— down bajar; — ready pre- 
pararse; — rid of deshacerse 
(27) de; {avoid) librarse; — 
up levantarse; — up early 
madrugar (App. B, III, 1, 2), 
levantarse temprano 
gigantic enorme, gigantesco, -a 
girl muchacha /. 
give dar 77 

glad contento, -a; be — to 
alegrarse de; be very — to 
tener ( 7 ) mucho gusto en 


glass vaso m. 

glove guante m.; silk —, guante 
de seda 

go ir 53; andar 54 {not to definite 
destination)', — about andar; 
— and visit ir a visitar; — 
away irse; — down bajar; — 
out salir 100; — out walking 
pasearse; — to bed acostarse 
(ue) 134; — to sleep dormirse 
(ue) 155; — walking pasearse; 
let’s —, vamos 
goat cabra /. 

God Dios 

gold oro m.; — cross cruz (/.) de 
oro 

good bueno, -a; have a — time 
divertirse (ie) 102 
good-looking guapo, -a; bien 
parecido, -a 

goodness: my — ! j Dios mio ! 

government gobierno m. 

graduate graduarse 

grammar gramatica /. 

great gran(de); a — deal mucho 

greatly muy 

grind moler (ue) 78 





gui 


VOCABULARIES 


hos 


guia m. guide {man) 
gma /, guide book 
guitarra /. guitar 
gustar please; me gusta I like 
gusto m. pleasure; con mucho — , 
very gladly, very willingly 

haber 6 have; hay there is (are); 

hay que it is necessary 
habitante m. inhabitant 
hablar speak 

hacer 27 make, do; — calor be 
warm; — efectivo, -a cash; 

— escala anchor, stop; — 
' falta lack; — fresco be cool; 

— preguntas ask questions; — 
un viaje take a trip; — viento 
be windy; — se become; hace 
dos dias two days ago; haga 
el favor de please 

hacia toward 


halagiieno, -a alluring, attractive 
hallar find; — se be found, be 
hasta until; up to, as far as; — 
donde up to which; — que 
until 

hemisferio to. hemisphere 
hermana /. sister 
hermano to. brother 
hermoso, -a beautiful 
hermosura /. beauty 
hierba /. grass 
hierro to. iron 
hijo TO. son, child 
hilera /. row 

Hipodromo to. Hippodrome 
historia /. history 
historico, -a historical 
hoja /. leaf 
hombre to. man 
hora /. hour, time 
hospitalidad /. hospitality 


guide (book) guia/. 

.half medio, -a 
half mitad /. 
hand mano /. 
handful punado to. 
handkerchief panuelo to.; linen 
—, panuelo de lino 
handsome guapo, -a 
happen pasar, acontecer 126; — 
upon dar (77) con 
happy contento, -a 
hard dificil 
haste prisa/. 

hat sombrero to.; Panama — , 
sombrero de jipijapa 
have {auxiliary) haber 6; {pos¬ 
session) tener 7; — a good 

time divertirse (ie) 102; — a 
headache tener (7) dolor de 
cabeza; — him come up haga 
que suba; — just acabar de 
{-\- injin.)', — to (must) tener 
que (-f- injin.) 
he el; — who el que 

160 


headache dolor (to.) de cabeza 
health salud/. 
hear oir 143 
heavy pesado, -a 
help: cannot —, no poder (66) 
menos de 

her poss. adj. su(s) 
her pers. pron. la, {after Spanish 
prep.) ella 
here aqiii 
high de altura 

him le (lo), {after Spanish prep.) 
el 

his pass. adj. su(s) 
his pass. pron. el suyo, etc. 
historical historico, -a 
history historia /.; — class clase 
(/.) de historia 
home adj. natal 
home casa/.; at —, en casa 
homesick: be —, tener (7) nos¬ 
talgia 

hope esperar 

horseback: on —, a caballo 
hospitable hospitalario, -a 





hot 


VOCABULARIES 


mu 


hotel m. hotel 
hoy to-day 

hmr (de) 172 avoid, get away 
from 

humano, -a human 
humedo, -a moist 
hydroavion hydroplane 

idea /. idea 

idioma m. language 

iglesia f. church 

igualidad /. equality 

iluminar illuminate, light up 

imperfecto m. imperfect 

imponente imposing 

importacion/. importation, import 

importancia /. importance 

importante important 

impresion f. impression 

impulsar urge, drive 

impureza /. impurity 

inca TO. & f. Inca 

incaico, -a of the Incas 

incluir 172 include 

independencia /. independence 

indicative to. indicative 

indigena native 

indio, -a Indian 


indio TO. Indian 

industria /. industry, business, 
trade 

industrial industrial 
inferior lower 
infinitive to. infinitive 
informar inform 
informes m. pL information 
ingenieria /. engineering 
ingeniero to. engineer 
ingenio to. sugar mill 
ingles TO. English 
inmensidad /. immensity, ex¬ 
panse 

inmenso, -a immense 
inspeccion /. inspection 
inspeccionar inspect 
inspector to. inspector 
intacto, -a intact 
interes to. interest 
interesante interesting 
interesar interest 
interior to. interior 
intermedio to.: — de space be¬ 
tween 

interrogativo to. interrogative 
interrumpir interrupt 
inutil useless 


hot: be —, (iveather) hacer (27) 
calor 

hotel hotel to. 
hour hora /. 
house casa/. 

how como; — many ! i cuantos, 
-as ! — old is he ? ^ cuantos 
anos tiene ? 

however sin embargo; por (adj. 

or adv.) que 
hundred cien(to) 
hungry: be —, tener (7) hambre 
hurry (up) apurarse, darse (77) 
prisa \ 

hydroplane hydroVvion to. 

I yo 
if si 

161 
J ■ 


imitation imitacion/. 
immediately en seguida 
imperfect imperfecto, -a 
importance importancia /. 
important importante 
impression impresion/. 
in en; por; de; a; {after superla¬ 
tive) de; — fact en efecto; — 
order to para; — spite of a 
pesar de 
Indian indio to. 

instead of en vez de, en lugar 
de 

intend pensar (ie) (—) 88 * 
interest interesar 
interesting interesante 
into en; a 
introduce presentar 








inv 


VOCABULARIES 


ley 


invertir invest 

invierno m. winter 

invitar invite 

ir 63 go; —se go away 

irregular irregular 

isla /. island 

islita /. little island 

Italia /. Italy 

labrador vi. farmer 

lado m. side; al — de beside 

lago m. lake 

lanar: ganado—, sheep and goats 
lapiz m. peneil 

lastima/. pity; \ que — ! what a 
pity! 

lava /. lava 
lavar wash 

jamas ever; {with negative) never 
jardin m. garden 
jipijapa fine woven straw; som¬ 
brero de —, Panama hat 
jornada /. day’s journey 
joven youEg 

joven m. & f. young man, young- 
woman 

jueves m. Thursday 
juntar join, unite 

leccion /. lesson 

leche /. milk 

leer (App. B, III, 4) read 

lejos far; a lo —, in the distance 

lentamente slowly 

lento, -a slow 

letra /. draft 

letrero m. sign, placard 

levantarse rise, get up 

leve light 

ley /. law 

kilometro m. kilometer 

leyenda /. legend 

invitation invitaeion f. 

Isabella Isabel 
island isla/. 

Italy Italia/, 
its su(s) 
itself mismo, -a 

lady senora /.; young —, seiio- 
rita /. 

lake lago m. 

language lengua/., idioma m. 

large gran(de) 

larger mas grande 

last pasado, -a; — night anoche; 

James Santiago 

John Juan 

join (together) juntar 

Julian Julian 

July julio m. 
jump (up) levantarse 
just: have —, acabar de (+ 
in jin.) 

— year el afio pasado 
late tarde 

latter este, -a, -os, -as 
laugh (at) reir(se) (de) 101 
Lawrence Lorenzo m. 
laziness pereza/. 
learn aprender; saber 76 
least: at —, al (a lo) menos 

kind clase/. 

king rey m.; — and queen reyes 
knock: there is a —, se llama 
know conocer 126; saber 76; — 
how (+ injin.) saber 

leave salir (de) 100; separarse de 
lend prestar 

less menos; mbre or —, poco mas 
o menos;' not do any — than 
no poder (66) menos de; the 
more the —, cuanto mas tanto 

lace encaje m.; a piece of —, un 
eneaje 

menos 

lesson leceion/. 

let {see 152); —’s go vamos 


lack hacer (27) falta a letter carta /. 

162 






lib 


VOCABULARIES 


maq 


libertador m. liberator 
libra /. pound 
librito m. little book 
libro m. book 
limitar bound 
linea /. line 
literatura /. literature 
litoral coast 

lo the (neut.); — mejor posible 
as well as possible; — que 
which, what; de — que than 
locomotora f. locomotive 
lucha /, struggle 

lugar m. place; tener —, take 
place, happen, occur 
lujoso, -a luxurious, elegant 
luna /. moon 
lunes m. Monday 
luz /. light 

llama m. llama {beast of burden 
of South America) 
llamar call; me llamo my name 
is 

llano m. plain 

llegada /. arrival 

llegar (App. B, III, 1, 2) (a) 


arrive (at); — a ser become 
llenar fill 

lleno, -a full, filled 
llevar carry, take, bear; —se 
carry off, win 
Iluvia /. rain 
Iluvioso, -a rainy 

machete m. cane-knife 
madera /. wood; — de tinte dye- 
wood; — de construccion lum¬ 
ber 

madre /, mother 
magnifico, -a magnificent, fine 
magnitud /. magnitude 
maiz m. corn 
majestuoso, -a majestic 
mal bad 

maleta /. suitcase 
malo, -a bad; de mala gana 
unwillingly 
mano /. hand 
manzana /. apple 
manana /. morning; por la —, 
in the morning 
mapa m. map 
maquina /. machine 


library biblioteca/. 
life vida/. 

like gustar a; querer 39; I —, me 
gusta(n); he —s le gusta(n); 
I should —, quisiera 
like adv. como; — better preferir 
(ie) 102; feel —, tener (7) 
gana(s) de 

linen lino m.; — handkerchief 
panuelo m. de lino 
listen (to) escuchar 
little pequeno, -a; — by —, poco 
a poco; — table mesita/. 
live vivir 

lively vivo, -a, alegre 
llama llama m. 
load carga/. 
lock esclusa/. 

long largo, -a; — time mucho 


tiempo 

longer mas tiempo; no —, ya no 
look mirar; — for buscar (App. 

B, III, 1, 1) 
lose perder 
Louis Luis 
Louisiana Luisiana/. 
love amar 
love amor m. 

lunch almorzar (App. B, III, 1, 4) 

magazine revista/, 
magnificent magnifico, -a 
make hacer 27 
man hombre m. 

many muchos, -as; how —! 
i cuantos, -as ! as (so) —, tan- 
tos, -as 
map mapa m. 





maq 


VOCABULARIES 


mit 


maquinaria /. machinery 
mar m. sea 

maravilla /. marvel, wonder 
maravilloso, -a marvelous, 
wonderful 
marmol m. marble 
martes m. Tuesday 
mas more; most; nada — que 
nothing but; no — que only; 
poco — o menos about, more 
or less 

mata /. plant 

mate: yerba —, Paraguayan 
tea 

matiz m. tinge, tint 
maya m. Maya 
mayo m. May 

mayor greater; al por —, whole¬ 
sale 

medicinal medicinal 
medico m. doctor, physician 
medio, -a half 
mejicano, -a Mexican 
Mejico Mexico 

mejor better; best; lo — posible 
as well as possible 
mencionado, -a before mentioned 
menor younger 


menos less; a — que unless; al 
—, at least; echar de —, miss; 
no poder — de cannot help; 
poco mas o —, about, more or 
less; por lo — , at least 
menudo: a — , often 
mercado m. market 
mes m. month 
mesa /. table 
meseta /. tableland 
metodo m. method 
metro m. meter 
metropoli /. metropolis 
miedo m. fear; tener — (de) be 
afraid (of) 

mientras (que) while 
mil (one) thousand 
milla /. mile 
millon m. million 
mina /. mine 
mineral m. mineral 
minuto m. minute 
mio, -a my, of mine 
mirar look (at) 
misionero m. missionary 
mismo, -a same; itself; el —, 
himself 
mitad /. half 


Margaret Margarita 
market mercado m. 
marry casarse con 
Martin Martin 
Mary Maria 

matter: what is the — with you ? 

^ que le pasa ? 

me me; for (to) —, me; with —, 
conmigo; {after Spanish prep.) 
mi 

meal comida/. 
mean querer (39) decir 
meanwhile mientras tanto, entre- 
tanto 

meet eneontrar (ue) 134 
mention: don’t — it de nada, no 
hay de que 

merchant comerciante m. 

164 


Mexican mejicano, -a, de Mejico 
Mexico Mejico; — City Ciudad de 
Mejico 

middle medio m. 

might poder 66 (impf. subj.) 

mile milla/. 

military (man) militar m. 
milk leche/. 

mill molino m.; sugar —, in- 
genio m. 

mine pron. el mio, etc. 
mine mina/. 
minute minuto m. 
mirror espejo m. 

Miss senorita, Srta. 
miss echar de menos, hacer (27) 
falta a 

mistake error m., falta/. 





mod 


VOCABULARIES 


non 




moda /. style 
modico, -a moderate 
cmodismo m. idiom 
modo way; de — que so that 
moler (ue) 78 grind 
molienda /. grinding 
molino m. mill 
montana /. mountain 
monton m. heap 
monumento m. monument 
morir 125 die 
mostrar (ue) 134 show 
mozo m. boy 
muchacha /. girl 
muchacho m. boy 
muchisimo very much 
mucho, -a much, a great deal of 
mucho adv. very; long; many 
muelle m. wharf, dock 
mujer /. woman 

mundo m. world; todo el —, 
everybody 
museo m. museum 
musica /, music 
muy very 


nacion /. nation 
nacional national 
nada nothing; — mas que noth¬ 
ing but 

nadie nobody, no one 

Nariz del Diablo Devil’s Nose 

naturaleza /. nature 

naturalmente naturally 

navegar sail, travel by boat 

navio m. ship 

necesario, -a necessary 

necesitar need 

negacion /. negative 

negro, -a black 

nevado, -a snow-covered 

ni nor; — siquiera not even 

nieve /. snow 

ninguno, -a not any, no 

nina /. girl 

nino m. boy, child 

nivel m. level 

no not, no 

noche/. night; de —, at night 
Noe Noah 
nombre m. name 


money dinero m. 

Montezuma Moctezuma 
month mes w. 

moonlight: be —, haber (6) luna 
more mas; — or less poco mas o 
menos; the — the — (less) 
cuanto mas tanto mas (menos) 
morning manana /.; in the —, 
{definite hour) de la manana, 
{indefinite time) por la manana 
most la mayor parte de 
mother madre/. 
mountain montana /. 
mouth boca/. 
movies cine m. 

Mr. senor, Sr. 

much mucho, -a; as — as tanto 
como; so —, tanto; too —, 
demasiado, -a; very —, mu¬ 
chisimo 

museum museo m. 



music musica/. 

must tener (7) que (-j- infin.); — 
have been seria(n) 
my mi(s), mio, -a; — goodness! 
i Dios mio I 

myself: I —, yo mismo, -a 

name nombre m.; the — of como 
se llama 

national nacional 
near cerca de 
necessary necesario, -a 
never nunca, jamas 
newspaper periodico m. 
next que viene, siguiente 
night noche /.; at —, por la 
noche; last —, anoche 
no no; — other ningun otro; —- 
one nadie; — longer ya no 
nobody nadie 
hone ninguno, -a 





nor 

norte m. north 
norteamericano, -a North Ameri¬ 
can 

notable noteworthy 
notar notice 

novecientos, -as nine hundred 

noventa ninety 

noviembre m. November 

nuestro, -a our, of ours 

nueve nine 

nuevo, -a new 

nuez /. nut 

numeracion /. numbering 
numero m. number, copy 
numeroso, -a numerous 
nunca never 

nanduti m.: encaje de —, spider 
lace 

o or 

objeto m. object, article 
obscuro, -a dark 
observatorio m. observatory 
obtener 7 obtain 


pac 

Oceano m. Ocean; — Pacifico 
Pacific Ocean 

ocupado, -a busy; occupied ^ 
ocnrrir occur; se le ocurrio it 
occurred to him 
ochenta' eighty 
ocho eight; — dias a week 
oeste m. west 

ofrecer 126 offer, produce, afford 

oir 143 hear 

i ojala ! would that 

ojo m. eye 

oler (ue) 174 smell 

oracion /. sentence 

oriental eastern 

oriente m. eastern region 

original original 

ornamento m. ornament 

oro m. gold 

otono m. autumn 

otro other, another 

pacer pasture 

Pacifico: Oceano —, Pacific 

Ocean 


VOCABULARIES 


North American norteameri¬ 
cano, -a 
nose nariz /. 
not no 

note apunte m. 
notebook memorandum m. 
nothing nada; — else than no 
mas que, nada mas que; — to 
do nada que hacer 27 
novel novela/. 

November noviembre m. 
now ahora; — and then de cuando 
(vez) en cuando; right —, ahora 
mismo 

object objeto m. 

o’clock: be five —, ser las cinco 

of de; — course por supuesto 

offer ofrecer 126 

often a menudo, muchas veces 

old antiguo, -a; be . . . years —, 


tener . . . anos; how — is he? 
(j cuantos anos tiene ? 
older mayor 

on en; — deck sobre cubierta; 

— Tuesdays los martes 
once una vez; at — , en seguida 
one uno, -a; no — , nadie 
only solo, solamente, no . . . sino 
open abrir (Suppl. Ex. I, C, VIII) 
open abierto, -a 
or o 

orange naranja/. 
order: in — to para 
other otro, -a; no —, nirgun otro 
ought deber 
our nuestro, -a 
ours el nuestro, etc. 
out: be — walking pasearse; go 
—, salir 100 

pack empacar, hacer 27 





pac 


VOCABULARIES 


pla 


padre m. father 
papr (App. B, III, 1, 2) pay 
pais m. country 
paisaje m. view, landscape 
paja /. straw 
palabra /. word 
palacio m. palace 
palma /. palm 
palmera /. palm tree 
pampa /. Argentinian plain 
Panama Panama 
pano m. cloth 
panuelo m. handkerchief 
paquete m. package 
para in order to, to; for; by; 
— que so that; estar —, be 
about to 

paraguayo, -a Paraguayan 
parar(se) stop; sin —, con¬ 
stantly 

parecer 126 appear; seem like 
parentesis m. parenthesis 
parque m. park 
parte /. part 

participio m. participle; — pasivo 
past participle 
pasado, -a past; last 
pasajero m. passenger 
pasear(se) go riding (driving) 
(walking); — a caballo ride 
on horseback 

paseo m. walk, promenade, drive 
pasivo, -a passive 


patata /. potato 
patria /. fatherland 
patriota m. patriot 
paz /. peace 
pedir (i) 114 ask (for) 
peligro m. danger 
peligroso, -a dangerous 
pena /. trouble; valer la — , be 
worth while 
penetrar penetrate 
pensar (ie) 88 intend; (+ en) 
think (of) 

pequeno, -a little, small 
perder lose 
perdida /. loss 
perfeccion /. perfection 
periodico m. newspaper 
perito, -a expert, trained 
perla /. pearl 
permanecer 126 remain 
permitir permit 
pero but 

persona /. person 

Peru m. Peru 

pesar; a — de in spite of 

peso m. dollar 

pico m. peak 

pie m. foot; dedo del — , toe 
piedra /. stone 
pintoresco, -a picturesque 
pina /. pineapple 
piramide /. pyramid 
placer m. pleasure 


package paquete m. 
page pagina/. 
pair par m. 

Panama Panama; — hat som¬ 
brero (w.) de jipijapa 
parents padres m. pi. 
park parque m. 
part parte/, 
pass pasar 

past pasado, -a; half — seven 
las siete y media 

pay pagar (App. B, III, 1, 2); 
— attention prestar atencion; 


— cash (for) pagar al contado 
peace paz/. 

pen pluma/.; fotmtain —pluma 
fuente 

pencil lapiz m. 

people ^ — believe se cree; poor 
—, los pobres 
perhaps tal vez, quiza 
Peru el Peru m. 
picture cuadro m. 
piece: a — of lace un encaje 
pity: it is a —, es lastima; what 
a — ! I que lastima ! 





VOCABULARIES 


pro 


pla 

plan m. plan 
planta f. plant 
plantacion /. plantation 
plantar plant 
plata f. silver 
platanal m. banana plantation 
platano m. banana, plantain 
platino m. platinum 
playa /. beach 
plaza /. square 
plomo m. lead 
pluma /. feather; pen 
pobre poor 

poco adv. little; — a —, little by 
little; — mas o menos about, 
more or less 
pocos, -as few 

poder 66 be able; no — menos 
de cannot help 
poder m. power 
poderoso, -a powerful 
poema m. poem 

poner 40 put; — se become; — se 
a begin; — se el sol sunset 
por by; in; through; for, be¬ 
cause of; in order to; across; 
on; — aqm this way; — 
consiguiente consequently, ac¬ 
cordingly; — ejemplo for , 
example; — entre between; — I 


eso accordingly; — lo general 
generally; — lo tanto accord¬ 
ingly; — {adj.) que however; 
— supuesto of course; al — 
mayor wholesale 
por que why 
porque because 
poseer possess, have 
posesivo, -a possessive 
posible possible 
precio m. price 

precioso, -a beautiful, fine, nice 
precise: ser —, be necessary 
pregunta /. question; hacer —s 
ask questions 
preguntar ask 
premio m. premium 
Prensa /. Press 
preparacion /. preparation 
prepararse prepare 
presentar introduce 
presente present 
presidente m. president 
prestar loan; — atencion pay 
attention 

primavera /. spring 
primero, -a first 
primo m. cousin 
probar 134 prove 
problema m. problem 


place lugar m. 

plantation: banana —, platanal 
m.; coffee—, cafetalm.; sugar 
—, Canaveral m. 
platinum platino m. 
play jugar 136; — football jugar 
al futbol 

pleasant agradable 
please haga el favor de, sirvase 
(—), tenga la bondad de; I am 
—d to know you tengo mucho 
gusto en conocerle(la) 
plenty (of) bastante 
pocket bolsillo m. 
police policia/, 
polish pulir 


poor malo, -a; (not rich) pobre 
(used after noun ); — people los 
pobres 

port Puerto m. 

Porto Rico Puerto Rico m. 
possible posible 
postman cartero m. 
prefer preferir (ie) 102 
prepare preparar 
pretty bonito, -a 
pretty adv.; — well bastante bien 
private particular 
probable probable 
probably probablemente (for dis¬ 
cussion of future and condi¬ 
tional of 'probability see 46) 


168 





pro 


VOCABULARIES 


rec 


procedimiento m. proceeding 
produccion /. produetion 
producir 135 produee 
producto m. produet 
productor produeing, productive 
profesor m. professor 
progresista progressive 
pronombre m. pronoun 
pronto soon 

propagar spread, increase 
propio, -a own 
proporcionar afford 
proposito: de —, purposely 
proteger (App. B, III, 2, 2) pro¬ 
tect 

provincia /. province 
proximo, -a near 
prueba /. proof 
publico, -a public 
pueblo m. town; people 
puerta /. door, gate 
Puerto m. port; — de mar sea¬ 
port 

puertorriqueno, -a Porto Rican 
puesta /.: — de sol sunset 
puesto que sinee 
pulir clean, polish 
pulpa /. pulp 


punto m. point 

que conj. that; than; since 
que 'pron. who, that, which 
i que ! what (a)! 

quebracho m. quebracho {wood 
which produces tannin) 
quedar(se) remain 
quejarse complain 
querer 39 wish, desire, want; 
— decir mean 

quien, -es who; a —, whom 
quienquiera whoever 
quince fifteen; — dias two weeks 
quinientos, -as five hundred 
quitar take away 

racimo m. bunch 
rapidamente rapidly 
raya /. dash 
rayo m. ray 
raza f. race 

razon /.: tener —, be right 

real royal 

recibir receive 

reciente recent 

reclame m. advertisement 

recogedor m. picker, collector 


process procedimiento m. 
produce producir 126 
product producto m. 
professor profesor m. 
promise prometer (—) 
promise promesa/, 
property propiedad/. 
provided that con tal que 
purpose proposito m., objeto, m., 
fin m. 

purposely de proposito 
put poner 40; — on ponerse 

quarter cuarto m.; a — after six 
las seis y cuarto; a — of seven 
las siete menos cuarto 
question pregunta /.; ask —s 
hacer (27) preguntas; be a — 


of tratarse de 
quite bastante 

rail (road) ferrocarril m. 
rain Hover (ue) 78 
rain Iluvia/. 

rapidly de prisa, rapidamente 
rarely rara vez, raramente 
reach llegar (a) (App. B, III, 1, 2) 
read leer (App. B, III, 4); I have 
been reading it for two weeks 
haee dos semanas que lo (la) 
leo 

reading (el) leer m. 

ready listo, -a; get —, prepararse 

real verdadero, -a 

realize darse (77) cuenta de 

receive recibir 





rec 


VOCABULARIES 


san 


recoger (App. B, III, 2, 2) gather 
reconocer 126 recognize 
reconstituir 72 rebuild 
recuerdo m. souvenir 
reemplazar (App. B, III, 1, 4) 
replace 

refrigeracion /. refrigeration 
regain m. gift, present 
region /. region 
regresar return 

regular regular ^ ^ 

reino m. kingdom 

reir 101 laugh 

relative m. relative 

renuevo m. sprout 

repartir divide 

repente: de —, suddenly 

represa /. lock 

republica /. republic 

residencia /. residence 

resonar resound 

respecto (de) (a) regarding, con¬ 
cerning 

respuesta /. answer 

restos m. pi. remains 

resultado m. result 

resultar result, follow 

revista /. magazine 

revolucion /. revolution 

rey m. king; pi. king and queen 


rico, -a rich 
riego m. irrigation 
rigido, -a rigid 
rio m. river 

riqueza /. riches, wealth 
riquisimo, -a very rich 
risueno, -a pleasant 
Roberto Robert 
rojo, -a red 

rompeolas m. breakwater 
rosado, -a pink 
ruido m. noise 
ruina /. ruin 

sabado m. Saturday 

saber know; learn; (+ inf.) 

know how 
sabor m. taste 

sacar (App, B, III, 1, 1) take 
away (off); —se be derived 
saco m. sack 

salir (de) 100 leave, go out 

salitre m. saltpeter 

salto m.; — de agua waterfall 

saludar greet 

salutacion /. greeting 

salvo, -a safe 

sano, -a sound; — y salvo safe 
and sound 
santo, -a holy 


red rojo, -a j 
regret sentir (ie) 102 
reign aeiw© m., reinado m. 
relative pariente m. & f. 
remain quedarse, permanecer 126 
remember acordarse (ue) (de) 
134; recordar (ue) 134 
rent alquilar 

restaurant restaurante m. 
retail al por menor 
return volver 78 

rich rico, -a; be as — as Creesus 
valer (144) un Potosi; exceed¬ 
ingly —, riquisimo, -a 
rid: get — of deshacerse (27) de; 
(avoid) librarse de 


ride paseo m.; take a —, dar (77) 
un paseo, pasearse 
right: — now ahora mismo; be 
—, tener (7) razon 
room cuarto m. 

rooming house casa f. de hues- 
pedes 

round redondo, -a 
ruin ruina/, 

run correr; — up acudir a 

same mismo, -a; all the —, no 
obstante; at the — time al 
mismo tiempo, a la vez 
sandwich sandwich m., empare- 
dado m. 


170 






say 


VOCABULARIES 


six 


secar (App. B, III, 1, 1) dry 

seco, -a dry 

seguida: en —, at once 

seguir 124 follow 

segun according 

segundo, -a second 

seis six 

seiscientos, -as six hundred 
semana f. week 
semilla f. seed; bean 
sentado, -a seated 
sentarse (ie) 88 sit down 
sentimiento m. sentiment, feeling 
sentir (ie) 102 feel; regret 
senalar indicate 
senor m. Mr., Sir 
senora f. Mrs.; wife; lady 
separar separate 
sepultar bury 

ser 15 be; es decir that is to say; 
llegar a —, become; sean los 
que fueren whatever may be 
serie /. series 


serpiente /. serpent 
servir 115 serve, be useful; — se de 
make use of, be used; me sirvio 
para gave me an opportunity 
to; sirvase please 
sesenta sixty 
si if 

siempre always 
siete seven 
siglo m. century 
significar mean 
siguiente following 
siUa /. chair 
simbolizar symbolize 
simbolo m. symbol 
simpatico, -a congenial, likeable 
sin without; — embargo how¬ 
ever; — tardar at once 
sino (que) but; except 
sinodico, -a synodic 
siquiera: ni —, not even 
sistema m. system 
sitio m. spot, place 


say decir 28; they — (it is said) 
se dice 

scarcely apenas 

school escuela /.; summer —, 
sesion (/.) de verano 
scientist hombre cientifico 
seasick: be —, marearse 
seat sentar (ie) 88 
seated sentado, -a 
second segundo, -a 
see ver 87; — again volver (78) 
a ver; each other verse 
seem parecer 126 
seize asir 173 
selfish egoista 
sell vender 
semester semestre m. 
send enviar 156, mandar 
senior alumno (m.) de cuarto ano 
sentence oracion/. 
separate separar 
serious formal, serio, -a 
servant criado m. 


serve servir (i) 115 
set: — out salir 100, marcharse 
seven siete; at — o’clock a las 
siete; at a quarter of —, a las 
siete menos cuarto; at half past 
—, a las siete y media 
several varies, -as 
shave rasurarse 
ship vapor m. 
should deber 
sidewalk acera/. 
silk seda/.; — glove guante (m.) 

de seda 
silver plata /. 

since {time) desde que; — I have 
been desde que estoy; (causal) 
puesto que 
sing cantar 
sister hermana/. 
sit (down) sentarse (ie) 88 
six seis; a quarter after —, las 
seis y cuarto; be — o’clock ser 
1 (15) las seis 


171 






sle 


VOCABULARIES 


sum 


sobre about, upon, on; concern¬ 
ing; above; — cubierta on 
deck; — todo especially 
sobresaliente excellent 
sol m. sun; del —, solar; ponerse 
el —, sunset; puesta de —, 
sunset 
solo alone 
solo only 
sombra /. shade 
sombrero m. hat 
sorprendente surprising 


sorprender surprise 
sorpresa /. surprise 
su(s) his; her; its; their; your 
{formal) 

subir climb, go up; get in (on) 
subjuntivo m, subjunctive 
subyugar subjugate, conquer 
suceder happen 

sudamericano, -a South American 
suelo m. soil 

suficiente sufficient, enough 
sufrir suffer 


sleep dormir (ue) 155; go to —, 
dormirse 

sleepy: be —, tener (7) sueno 
slowly despacio > 

small pequeno, -a 
smell oler 174 

so tan; asi, por consiguiente; 
poco mas o menos; — many 
tantos, -as; — much tanto; 

— that para que 
soldier soldado m. 
some unos, -as; alguno(s), -a(s); 

— time algun dia 
something algo 

sometimes a veces, algunas veces 
soon pronto; as — as luego que, 
asi que, tan pronto como; as — 
as possible tan pronto como sea 
posible 

sorry: be —, sentir (ie) 102 
sort especie/., clase/. 
south sur m.; South America la 
America del Sur; — of al sur de 
South American suramericano, -a 
souvenir recuerdo m. 

Spain Espana/. 

Spanish espanol, -a 
Spanish espanol m. 
speak hablar 
spend pasar 

spider: — lace encaje (m.) de 
nanduti 

spite: in — of a pesar de 
spring primavera — exami- 

172 


nation examen (m.) de prima¬ 
vera 

stand estar (16) parado, -a, estar 
de pie; can — no more no 
poder (66) mas 
station estacion/. 
statue estatua/, 
stay quedarse 
steamboat vapor m. 
steamer vapor m. 
still todavia 
stone piedra/. 

stop parar(se), {cease) dejar de 

store tienda/. 

story historia/. 

street calle/. 

street car tranvia m. 

stretch estirarse 

student alumno (m.), alumna (/.), 
estudiante m. & f. 
study estudiar 
studying (el) estudiar 
subjunctive subjuntivo m. 
succeed lograr (a) 
such (a) tal; — an interesting 
country un pais tan interesante 
suddenly de repente 
sugar azucar m.; — cane cana 
(/.) de azucar; — mill ingenio 
m., trapiche m.; — plantation 
Canaveral m. 
suitcase maleta/. 
summer verano m.; — school 

sesion (f.) de verano 





sun 


VOCABULARIES 


the 


superficie /. surface 
supuesto: por —, of course 
sustantivo m. noun 
suyo, -a his, of his 

tagua /. vegetable ivory , 
tal such (a) 
tamano m. size 
tambien also 
tampoco neither 
tan adv. as, so 
tanino m. tannin 
tan to, -a as (so) much; pi. so 
(as) many; as well; por lo —, 
accordingly 

taquilla /. ticket window 
tardar delay; — en be long in; 

sin —, at once 
tarde late 

tarde /. afternoon; por la —, in 
the afternoon 
te m. tea 


teatro m. theater 
tejer weave 

tela /. web; — de arana spider 
web 

temer fear 

temperatura /. temperature 
templado, -a temperate 
templo m. temple 
temprano early 

tener 7 have; — ... anos be . . . 
years old; — cuidado de be 
careful of; — gana(s) de be 
desirous of; — lugar take place; 

— miedo (de) be afraid (of); 

— muchas ganas (de) be very 
desirous (of); — que have to, 
must; — razon be right; tenga 
la bondad de please 

tercero, -a third 
terreno m. land, field; earth 
territorio m. territory 
tesoro m. treasure 


sunny: be —, haber (6) (hacer 
27) sol 

surprise sorprender 
suspect sospechar 
swim nadar 

table mesa/.; little —, mesita/. 
take tomar; (from one place to 
another) llevar; — a ride (walk) 
dar (77) un paseo, pasearse; — 
courses at haberse matriculado, 
-a en 

talk hablar 

talking (el) hablar 

tarantula tarantula /. 

teach ensenar, dar 77 

tear (out) romper, sacar (App. B, 

III, 1, 1) 

tell decir 28; contar (ue) 134; 
— about contar de; I was told 
se me dijo; they have been told 
se les ha dicho 
temple templo m. 

Texas Tejas 


than que; (before numerals) de; 
del (de la, de los, de las) que; 
de lo que (for discussion see 84); 
not do less —, no poder (66) 
menos de 

thanks (thank you) gracias/. pi.-, 
— very much muchas gracias 
that adj. (near person addressed) 
ese, -a, -os, -as; (remote from 
speaker and person addressed) 
aquel, -11a, -llos, -lias 
that (one) pron. (near person ad¬ 
dressed) ese, -a, -os, -as, (neut.) 
eso; (remote from speaker and 
person addressed) aqliel, -lla, 
-llos, -lias, (neut.) aquello; — 
one who el (la) que; those who 
los (las) que 

that conj. que; so —, para que 
the el, la, (neut.) lo, los, las 
their su(s) 

theirs el suyo, etc.; el de ellos, etc. 
them los, las; (after Spanish prep.) 
ellos, -as 


173 






the 


VOCABULARIES 


two 


tiempo m. time; tense; weather; 
age; por mucho —, for a long 
time 

tierra /. land 

tinte m. dye; madera de —, dye- 
wood 

tocar (App. B, III, 1, 1) touch; 
play 

todavia still 

todito, -a all {emphatid) 

todo, -a all; — el mundo every¬ 
body; sobre —, above all, es¬ 
pecially 
tomar take 

toquilla/.: paja —, straw used in 
making Panama hats 
trabajador m. workman 
trabajar work 


trabajo m. work 
traducir 136 translate 
traer 89 bring 
traje m. suit 
tranvia m. street car 
tratar: — de try to; — se be a 
question of; be treated 
traves: a — de across 
travesia /. crossing, voyage 
treinta thirty 

tren m. train; — de carga freight 
train 

tres three 
trigo m. wheat 
triunfo m. triumph 
tronco m. trunk 
tropical tropical 
tropico m. tropic 


then entonces; now and —, de 
cuando (vez) en cuando 
there alll; {after verbs of motion) 
alia; — is (are) hay; — is a 
knock se llama; — will be habra 
therefore por consiguiente, por 
eso, por lo tanto 
thing cosa/. 

think pensar (ie) 88; {believe) 
creer (App. B, III, 4); — of 
pensar en 
third tercer(o), -a 
• thirsty: be —, tener (7) sed 
this adj. este, -a, -os, -as 
this (one) pron. este, -a, -os, -as, 
{neut.) esto 
thousand mil 
three tres 
through por 
Thursday jueves m. 
time tiempo w., {time that may be 
^repeated) vez/.; at the same —, 
al mismo tiempo, a la vez; from 
— to —, de cuando (vez) en 
cuando; have a good — , diver- 
tirse (ie) 102; a long — , mucho 
tiempo 

tiny chiquito, -a 


tired cansado, -a; be —, estar 
(16) cansado, -a; my eyes are 
—, tengo los ojos cansados 
to a; para; hasta 
together: join —, juntar 
to-morrow manana /.; — morn¬ 
ing manana por la manana 
too (much) demasiado, -a; (also) 
tambien 
town pueblo m. 
train tren m.; by —, por tren 
travel viajar; — in viajar por 
traveler viajero m. 
traveling (el) viajar 
tree arbol m. 

trip viaje m.; — expenses gastos 
{m. pi.) de viaje 

true verdadero, -a; it is —, es 
verdad 

truth verdad/. 
try tratar de 

Tuesday martes m.; on —s los 
martes 

twenty-five veinticinco 
twenty-one veintiuno 
twenty-two veintidos 
twice dos veces 
two dos 


174 





Ufa 


VOCABULARIES 


vol 


ufano, -a proud 
unir unite 

un(o), -a a, an; one; unos, -as 
a few, some 
universal universal 
universidad /. university 
uruguayo, -a Uruguayan 
usar use 
usual usual 

vaca/. cow; came de —, beef 
vacuno, -a: ganado —, cows 
vainilla /. vanilla 
valer 144 be worth; — la pena 
be worth while; — un Potosi 
be as rich as Croesus 
valerosamente bravely 
valor m. value 
valle m. valley 
vapor m. steamer, boat 
variedad /. variety 
varios, -as several 
vaso m. glass 
vecina /. neighbor {female) 
vecino m. neighbor {male) 
vega /. plain 
vegetacion /. vegetation 
veinte twenty 
veintidos twenty-two 
veintiuno twenty-one 
veneer (App. B, III, 2, 1) conquer 
vender sell 
Venecia /. Venice 
venir 67 come 


ventana /. window 
ventilacion /. ventilation 
Venus m. Venus {star) 
venusiano, -a of Venus 
ver 87 see 
verano summer 
verbo m. verb 

verdaderamente, truly; really 
verdadero, -a real, true 
verde green 
verdura /. verdure 
vestido m. dress, suit; pi. clothes 
vestir(se) (i) 116 dress 
vez /. time; a la —, at the same 
time; de — en cuando from 
time to time; en — de instead 
of; otra —, again; muchas 
veces often 

via/, track; route, way 
viajar travel 
viajar m. traveling 
viaje m. voyage, trip; travel 
yiajero m. traveler 
viernes m. Friday 
vida /. life; living 
viento m. wind; hacer (27) —, be 
windy 

vina /. vineyard 
visible visible, evident 
visitar visit 
vivir live 

volcan m. volcano 
volver 78 return; volvio a salir 
de he left again 


uncle tio m.; — and aunt tios 
m. pi. 

unfortunately por desgracia 
uniform uniforme m. 

United States Estados Unidos 
university universidad /. 
unless a menos que 
until hasta (+ infin.), hasta que 
(-h clause) 

unwillingly de mala gana 
up: hurry —, apurarse, darse (77) 
prisa; get —, levantarse 


upon al (-{- infin.)', en 
us nos, {after Spanish prep.) noso- 
tros, -as 

use emplear, usar; — d to {use 
imperfect tense of the main verb) 
usually generalmente 

value valor m. 
various varios, -as 
Venezuela Venezuela/, 
very muy; — much muchisimo 
visit visitar 






wai 


VOCABULARIES 


zum 


y and 

ya already; — no no longer 
yacimiento m. layer 
yerba /.: — mate Paraguayan tea 
yo I 


zafra /. sugar crop 
zigzag m. zigzag road 
zona /. zone 
zumo m. juice 


wait esperar 

walk: go — ing (take a —) dar 
(77) un paseo, pasearse 
want querer 39, desear; be in — 
of hacer (27) falta a 
warm: be — , tener (7) calor 
wash lavar; — one’s face lavarse 
la cara 

water agua/. 
wave agitar 

way manera/., modo m.; (road) ca- 
mino m.; in that —, de ese modo 
wear llevar, traer 89 
weather tiempo m.; it is bad (fine) 
—, hace mal (buen) tiempo 
week semana ocho dias; two 
—S dos semanas, quince dias 
well bien; (exclamation) i pues 
bien ! as — as lo mismo que; 
(in addition to) ademas de 
West Indies las Antillas/. pZ. 
what rel. pron. lo que 
what ? ^ que ? — is the matter 
with you ? (J que le pasa ? 
what (a) ! \ que ! — a pity ! \ que 
lastima ! 
when cuando 

whenever cuando quiera que 
where donde 
where ? donde ? 
wherever (a) dondequiera (que) 
which rel. pron. que, el cual, el 
que; in —, (en) donde 
which (one) ? j cual, -es ? 
while mientras (que); be worth 
—, valer (144) la pena 
white bianco, -a 

who rel. pron. que, quien, el cual, 
etc., el que, etc. (see 122 ) 
who ? (J quien ? 
whoever quienquiera 


wholesale al por mayor 

whose cuyo, -a 

why ? ^ por que ? 

willingly de buena gana 

window ventana /.; ventanilla /. 

windy: be — , hacer (27) viento 

winter invierno m. 

wish querer 39 

with con; — me conmigo 

without prep, sin; conj. sin que 

woman mujer/. 

wonderful maravilloso, -a 

word palabra /. 

work trabajar 

world mundo m. 

worn: be — out no poder (66) mas 
worth: be — , valer 144; be — 
while valer la pena 
would that ! j ojala ! 
write (down) escribir 
written escrito, -a 
wrong: be —, no tener (7) razon 

yawn bostezar (App. B, III, 1, 4) 
year ano m.; last —, el ano pa- 
sado 

yellow amarillo, -a 
yes si 

yesterday ayer 

yet todavia, aun, (after verb) aun 
you (form.) usted (Vd.), ustedes 
(Yds.); (fam.) tu, vosotros, -as; 
(dir. obj ) (form.) le, la, los, las, 
(fam.) te, os; (ind. obj.) (form.) 
le, les, (fam.) te, os 
young joven; — lady senorita/. 
your (form.) su(s), el de Vd., etc., 
(fam.) tu(s) 

yours (form.) el suyo, etc., el de 
Vd., etc., (fam.) el tuyo, etc. 
yourself (form.) Vd. mismo, -a 





INDEX 


[The numbers below refer to paragraphs.] 


A 

a, al (a -f el), i (a); before direct 
object, 38 , 38 , footnotes 3 and 4, 
120 , footnote, 149 , footnote; be¬ 
fore infinitive, 166 , and Appendix 

D. 

aca, 108 , footnote, 
acabar, acabar de, 17 , 17 , footnote, 
accentuation. Appendix A, I, diph¬ 
thongs and triphthongs, II. 
acostarse, conjugation, 134 . 
address, forms of, 72 , 73 . 
adjectives, absolute superlative, 82 , 
footnote; agreement, 23 ; apoco- 
pation, 25 , 25 , footnote; compari¬ 
son, 82 - 85 , inequality, 82 - 84 , 
equality, 85 , irregular, 83 ; re¬ 
places demonstrative pronoun, 
iii; with estar, 14 ; feminine, 
22 ; used as nouns, 26 ; plural, 21 ; 
position, 24 ; with ser, 13 ; both 
with ser and estar, 14 , footnote; 
sentence position of superlatives, 
82 , footnote; de for in after super¬ 
latives, 82 , footnote; see also 
possessive, demonstrative, etc. 
adverbs, comparison, 82 - 85 , in¬ 
equality, 82 - 84 , equality, 85 , ir¬ 
regular, 83 ; formed from adjec¬ 
tives, 86 ; lo used, 82 , 3; aqui, 
aca, ahi, alli, alia, 108 , footnote; 
mucho, 82-83 ; superlative, 
mucho, muy, 82 , footnote; tan, 
85 , 92 . 

aficionado, ser aficionado a, 91 . 
ahi, 108 , footnote, 
al = a + el, 1 (a); followed by in¬ 
finitive, 162 , footnote; al contado, 
176 ; al por mayor (menor), 177 . 
alguno, apocopation, 25 ; with 
negative value, 36 , 1 , footnote; 
algunos for unos, 1 , footnote, 
alia, 108 , footnote, 
alii, 108 , footnote, 
andar, conjugation, 54 ; with present 
participle, 169 (a). 


antemano, de antemano, 147 . 
antes, cuanto antes, 92 . 

apocopation, 25 , 25 , footnote, 
aquel, declension, 106 , agreement 
and repetition, 107 ; meaning, 
108 . 

aquel, declension, 106 ; use, 109 ; 
the former, no; replaced by 
definite article, in. 
aqui, 108 , footnote, 
arithmetical signs, 62 . 
article, see definite and indefinite, 
asir, conjugation, 173 . 
atencion, prestar atencion a, 138 . 
auxiliary verbs, see estar, haber, ser, 
tener. 

B 

bien, for bueno, 14 , 1 , footnote; 
comparison, 83 ; mas bien, rather, 
83 , footnote. 

bondad, tener la bondad de, 29 . 
bueno, apocopation, 25 ; compari¬ 
son, 83 ; different meaning with 
ser or estar, 14 , 1 , footnote; de 
buena gana, 139 . 

hut, pero, mas, sino, 36 , 2 ; sino que, 
36 , 2 , footnote; no . . . sino or 
no . . . mas que, 36 , 2 (a). 
hy, por, 113 ; de, 133 , footnote. 

C 

caber, conjugation, 154 . 
caer, conjugation, 142 . 
can, poder and saber, 76 , footnote, 
-car verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B ; Appen¬ 
dix B, III, 1. 

cardinals, table, 58 ; uses, 60 ; apoc¬ 
opation of uno, 25 , of ciento, 25 , 
footnote. 

cargo, hacerse cargo de, 158 . 
Castellano (el), used for Spanish 
language, 3 , 6 , footnote. 

-cer verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B; Appen¬ 
dix B, III, 2. 


177 




178 


INDEX 


[The numbers below refer to paragraphs.] 


cerca, cerca de, 19 . 
ciento, table of cardinals, 58 ; omis¬ 
sion of indefinite article, 12 , 2 ; 
apocopation, 25 , footnote, 
cierto, omission of indefinite article, 
12 , 2 ; position and meaning, 24 , 2 . 
-cir verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B; Appen¬ 
dix B, III, 2 . 

I como ? 121 , 123 . 
comparison of adjectives and ad¬ 
verbs, 82 - 85 ; inequality, 82 - 84 ; 
equality, 85 ; irregular, 83 ; ab¬ 
solute superlative, 82 , footnote; 
de for zn, after superlatives, 82 , 
footnote; sentence position of 
superlative adjectives, 82 , foot¬ 
note; Spanish equivalents of 
than, 84 . 

compound tenses, with haber, 4 , 1 ; 
with e star, 14 , 4; with ser, 14 , 1, 
footnote; with tener, 5 , footnote; 
forms of regular conjugations. 
Appendix B, II. 

con, conmigo, contigo, consigo, 71 , 
footnote; before infinitive, list 
verbs, Appendix D; dar con, 128 . 
conditional, expressed by should or 
would, 44 , 44 , footnote; of pro¬ 
bability, 45 ; subjunctive in con¬ 
ditional sentences, 151 . 
conducir, conjugation, 135 . 
conjugations, regular verbs. Appen¬ 
dix B, I, II; irregular verbs, see 
reference list. Appendix C. 
conjunctive pronouns, table, 71 ; 
omission, 72 ; ello, lo, use, 71 , 
footnote; familiar and formal 
use, 73 ; position, 74 . 
conmigo, etc., 72 , footnote, 
conocer, saber, poder, 76 , footnote; 

conjugation, 126 . 
contado, al contado, 176 . 
cosa, cosa de, 81 . 
cual, el cual, table, 120 ; use, 122 , 
3; lo cual, 122 , 4. 
i cual ? table, 121 ; use, 123 . 
cuando, 120 , 122 , 7; de vez (cuando) 
en cuando, 80 . 

I cuando ? 121 , 123 . 
cuanto, table, 120 ; use, agreement, 
122 , 6 ; cuanto mas (menos) .. . 


tanto mas (menos), 85 , 3; cuanto 
antes, 92 ; en cuanto a, 104 . 
i cuanto ? table, 121 ; use, 123 . 
i cuanto ! 121 , footnote, 
cuenta, darse cuenta de, 158 . 
cuyo, table, 120 ; agreement, posi¬ 
tion, 122 , 5. 

D 

dar, conjugation, 77 ; dar con, 128 ; 
darse cuenta de, 158 . 

days, of week, names, 63 , 3; article 
with, 3 , 3; omission of on before, 
3 , 3, footnote, 60 , footnote; 

time of day, 64 ; days of month 
expressed by cardinals except 
first, 60 . 

de, del (de + el), i (a); before name 
of language, 3 , 6 ; before infini¬ 
tives, 165 , and Appendix D; be¬ 
fore cardinals = than, 84 , 2 ; with 
mental action, 133 , footnote; 
after superlatives = in, 82 , foot¬ 
note. 

deber = should, 44 , footnote, 
decir, conjugation, 28 ; with indica¬ 
tive or subjunctive, 140 , 1 , foot¬ 
note; querer decir, 41 . 
definite article, table, i; contrac¬ 
tion (del, al), I (a); agreement 
and repetition, 2 ; el instead of 
la, I, footnote; use of neuter lo, 
I, footnote; before nouns used in 
a general sense, 3 , 1 ; before in¬ 
finitives, 3 , 2 ; before names of 
days, seasons, modified time, 3 , 
3; before titles, 3 , 4; before 
geographical divisions, 3 , 5; be¬ 
fore certain countries and cities, 
3 » 5> 3 > 5, footnote; before names 
of languages, 3 , 6 ; before nouns 
of quantity and measure, 3 , 7; 
before appositive nouns, ii, ii, 
footnote; instead of demonstra¬ 
tive pronoun, in; with relative 
pronouns, 120 , 122 ; instead of 
possessive adjectives, 97 ; omitted 
before possessive pronouns with 
ser, 93 , 2 , footnote, 
dejar, dejar de, 103 . 



INDEX 


179 


CThe numbers below refer to paragraphs.] 


demonstrative adjectives, table, 
io6; agreement and repetition, 
107; meaning of este, ese, aquel, 
108. 

demonstrative pronouns, table, 106; 
replaced by definite article, in; 
esto, eso, aquello, 109; este, 
latter, aquel, former, no. 
deshacerse de, 157. 
diphthongs, accentuation. Appendix 
A, II. 

direct object, with a, 38, 38, foot¬ 
notes 3 and 4 ; pronoun position, 

74. 

disjunctive pronouns, table, 71; 
uses, 75; familiar and formal use, 
73; mi, ti, si, with con, 71, foot¬ 
note. 

don, dona, no article preceding, 3, 

4 , footnote. 

donde, table, 120; use, 122, 7 . 
i donde ? table, 121, use, 123. 
dormir, conjugation, 155. 

E 

e, used for y. Exercise V, C, footnote 

5 . 

echar, echar de menos, 127. 
efectivo, hacer efectivo, 175. 

el, see definite article; used instead 
of la, I, footnote. 

el, ella, ello, see personal pronouns, 
en, before name of language, 3, 6; 
before infinitive, 167, and Appen¬ 
dix D. 

entretanto, 129. 
enviar, conjugation, 156. 
escribir, with indicative or subjunc¬ 
tive, 140, 1, footnote, 
ese, declension, 106; agreement and 
repetition, 107; meaning, 108. 
ese, declension, 106, use, 109; re¬ 
placed by definite article, iii. 
estar, conjugation, 16; used with 
adjective, 14, 1 , I 4 » 1 » footnote; 
to express location, 14, 2; with 
present participle, 14, 3 , 169; 

with past participle, 14, 4 . 
este, declension, 106; agreement and 
repetition, 107; meaning 108. 


este, declension, 106;' use, 109; the 
latter, no; replaced by definite 
article, in. 

exclamations, omission of article 
with que, 12, 2. 


F 

falta, hacer falta a, 145. 
favor, hacer el favor de, 29. 
for, para, 112; por, 113. 
former, aquel, etc., no. 
fractions, 61. 

future, indicative, ordinary use, 44, 
of probability, 45; suggestions 
for formation, Suppl. Ex. I, C, V; 
subjunctive, use, 141 ; suggestions 
for formation, Suppl. Ex. I, C, 
VII. 

G 

gana, de buena (mala) gana, 139. 
-gar verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B; 

Appendix B, III. 1 . 
gender, adjectives, 22; articles, i, 
2; masculine nouns, 34; feminine 
nouns, 35; nouns with two gen¬ 
ders, 34, footnote. 

-ger verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B; Appen¬ 
dix B, III, 2 . 

-gir verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B; Appen¬ 
dix B, III, 2 . 

grande, apocopation, 25, footnote; 
comparison, 83; position, mean¬ 
ing, 24, 2. 

-guar verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B; Ap¬ 
pendix B, III, 1 . 

-guir verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B; Ap¬ 
pendix B, III, 2 . 
gustar, gustar a (uno), 43. 


H 

haber, as an auxiliary, 4, 1; as an 
impersonal verb, 4, 2; conjuga¬ 
tion, 6; haber que, 8; haber 
polvo, luna, etc., 32. 
hacer, conjugation, 27; hacer (+ 
period of time), 30; hacer calor, 
frio, viento, etc., 31, 33; hacer 



ISO 


INDEX 


[The numbers below refer to paragraphs.] 


efectivo, 175; hacer falta a, 145; 
hacer el favor de, 29; hacerse 
cargo de, 158. 

huir, conjugation, 172. 

I 

i, changed to y in verbs, Suppl. Ex. 
I, B, II, Appendix B, III, 4 ; 
omitted after 11 , n or j, Suppl. 
Ex. I, B, II, ( 3 ), Appendix B, 
III, 5 . 

-iar verbs. Appendix B, III, 3 . 

imperative mood, use, 52; sugges¬ 
tions for formation, Suppl. Ex. 

. I- 

imperfect, indicative, ordinary use, 
47; with hacia .. . que or desde 
hacia, 48 ; suggestions for for¬ 
mation, Suppl. Ex. I, C, IV; 
subjunctive, use, 151-153; sug¬ 
gestions for formation, Suppl. Ex. 
I, C, VII. 

impersonal expressions and verbs, 
haber as impersonal, 4, 2 ; with 
ser, 13, 3 ; with subjunctive, 140, 
( 3 ); with indicative, 140, 4 . 

in, de after superlative, 82, footnote. 

indefinite article, table, 1 ; agree¬ 
ment and repetition, 2; before 
appositive noun, ii; before a 
predicate noun, 12, 1; before 
ciento, mil, otro, cierto, and after 
que and tal, 12, 2 . 

indicative mood, use of tenses, 
44-51; suggestions for formation, 
Suppl. Ex. I, C; —present (I), 
imperfect (IV), future and con¬ 
ditional (V), preterite (VI); with 
decir, escribir, 140, 1, footnote; 
esperar, 140, 2, footnote; nega¬ 
tive doubt, affirmative belief, 140, 
3 (a); after questions with cer¬ 
tainty, 140, 3 (6); impersonal 
expressions with certainty, 140, 
4 ; in simple conditions, 151 (a); 
conditional in softened assertions, 
I53> lootnote. 

infinitive, as verbal noun, 3, 2, 162; 
with two consecutive verbs with 
same subject, 140, footnote; 


three conjugations, 160; used 
after all prepositions, 161; after 
impersonal expressions, 140, 4 (a), 
163; preceded by verb without 
preposition, 164; with de, 165; 
with a, 166; with en, 167; with a, 
de, en, por, and con. Appendix D. 
instante (al), 117. 
interrogative sentence order, 37. 
interrogatives, table of pronouns, 
adjectives, adverbs, 121; direct 
object with a, 121, footnote; uses 
123. 

ir, conjugation, 53; with present 
participle, 169 (a), 
irregular verbs, reference list. 
Appendix C; see, also, verb for¬ 
mation, Suppl. Ex. I. 

-isimo, absolute superlative, 82, 
footnote. 

J 

jamas, use with no or alone, 36, 1. 
jugar, 136. 

K 

know, conocer or saber, 76, footnote. 

L 

language, article with name of, 3, 6; 
el Castellano, meaning Spanish 
language, 3, 6, footnote, 
latter, este, etc., no. 
levantarse, conjugation, 130 . 
lo, neuter article, i, footnote; with 
superlative adverb, 82, 3. 

M 

malo, apocopation, 25; comparison, 
83; different meaning with ser 
or estar, 14, 1, footnote, 
mas, in comparisons, 82; compara¬ 
tive of mucho, 83; no poder mas, 
68; poco mas o menos, 81; mas 
bien, rather, 83, footnote: the 
more {less) . . . the more {less), 
85, 3 . 




INDEX 


181 


CThe numbers below refer to paragraphs.] 


measures, article with, 3, 7. 
menos, al (a lo, por lo) menos, 57; 
no poder menos, 69; poco mas 
o menos, 81; echar de menos, 
127. 

-mente, to form adverbs, 86; 
omitted when in two successive 
adverbs, 86, 2. 
menudo, a menudo, 42. 
mientras, mientras mas (menos) 

... mas (menos), 85, 3; mientras 
tanto, 129. 

mil, omission of indefinite article 12, 
2; use, 58, footnote, 
mismo, for emphasis, 132; meaning 
same 132, footnote, 
money, values, 65. 
months, names of, 63, 2; article 
with, 3, 3. 

mood, see indicative, imperative, 
subjunctive, etc. 
morir, conjugation, 125. 
mucho, comparison, 83; superlative, 
82, footnote. 

muy, absolute superlative, 82, 
footnote. 

N 

nada, with no or alone, 36. 1- 
nadie, with no or alone, 36, 1. 
negation, negative pronouns and 
adverbs, 36. 

neuter, article lo, 1, footnote; pro¬ 
nouns ello, lo, forms, 71, use 71, 
footnote, position, 74. 
ni, with no or alone, 36, 1. 
ninguno, apocopation, 25; with no 
or alone, 36, 1. 

nosotros, see personal pronouns, 
nouns, adjectives used as, 26; 
gender, masculine, 34, feminine, 
35, with two genders, 34, footnote; 
personal direct object with a, 38; 
plural of, 20; predicate with ser, 
13, 2; origin, ownership, material, 
with ser, 13, 4. 

number, apocopation of uno, pri- 
mero, tercero, 25, of ciento, 25, 
footnote; arithmetical signs, 62; 
fractions, 61; table of cardinals, 
S8; ordinals, 59; uses of cardinals • 


and ordinals, 60; plural of ad¬ 
jectives, 21; plural of nouns, 20. 
numerals, see number, above. 
nunca, with no or alone, 36, 1. 

O 

oir, conjugation, 143. 
ojala, 152. 

oler, conjugation, 174. 
on, omitted, 60, 1, footnote. 
one, see number; omitted after an 
adjective, 26, footnote. 
only, no ... sino, no ... mas que, 
36, 2 (a); solo, solamente, 36, 
2 (a), footnote. 

ordinals, through tenth, 59; uses, 
60; apocopation of primero, ter¬ 
cero, 25. 

orthographic changing verbs, Suppl. 

Ex. I, B; Appendix B, III. 

•otro, omission of indefinite article, 

12, 2. 

P 

para, uses, 112. 

parte, in fractions, 61, footnote, 
participles, see present participle and 
past participle. 

passive voice, formation and use in 
Spanish, 133; English passive 
becomes reflexive in Spanish, 131, 
4; followed by por and de, 133, 
footnote. 

past anterior, ordinary use, 51. 
past participle, with haber, 4, 1; 
with estar, 14, 4; with tener, 5, 
footnote; endings, uses, agree¬ 
ment, 170; absolute construction, 

171; suggestions for formation, 
Suppl. Ex. I, C, VIII. 
pedir, 114. 

pena, valer la pena, 146. 
pensar, conjugation, 87. 
perfect indicative, 50. 
pero, 36, 2. 

personal a, 38, 38, footnotes 1 and 
2; 120, footnote. 

personal pronouns, table of conjunc¬ 
tive and disjunctive pronouns, 71; 
omission, 72; familiar and formal 





182 


INDEX 


[The numbers below refer to paragraphs.] 


use, 73; position of conjunctive 
object pronouns, 74; se for le, 
les, 74, 3 (a); use of ello, lo, 71, 
footnote; usted, ustedes used 
only once in same sentence, 72; 
uses of disjunctive pronouns, 75; 
mi, ti, si with con, 71, footnote, 
pesar, a pesar de, 119. 
pluperfect, use, 51. 
plural, of nouns, 20; of adjectives, 
21. 

pobre, position and meaning, 24, 2. 
poco, comparison, 83; poco a poco, 
55; poco mas o menos, 81. 
poder, conjugation, 66; no poder 
mas, 68; no poder menos, 69; 
poder, saber, conocer, 76, foot¬ 
note. 

poner, conjugation, 40. 
por, uses, 113; replaced by de in 
passive, 133, footnote; before 
infinitive, list of verbs, Appendix* 
D; por la manana, etc., 64, foot¬ 
note; por eso (lo tanto, consi- 
guiente) 70; al por mayor (ma¬ 
nor), 177. 

possessive adjectives, table, 93, 1; 
agreement, 94; repetition, 95; 
before or after noun, 96; replaced 
by definite article, 97, 97 (a); 
forms to replace su, sus, in case of 
uncertainty, 98. 

possessive pronouns, table, 93, 2; 
agreement, 94; omits article with 
ser, 93, 2, footnote; forms to 
replace el suyo, etc., in case of 
uncertainty, 99. 
postrero, apocopation, 25. 
predicate noun or pronoun with ser, 

13, 2 . 

prepositions, see a, de, en, por, para, 
etc. ; list of verbs governing direct 
infinitive, or requiring preposi¬ 
tions a, de, en, por, or con. Ap¬ 
pendix D. 

present, indicative, ordinary use, 44; 
with hace ... que or desde hace, 
46; suggestions for formation, 
Suppl. Ex. I, C, I; present sub¬ 
junctive, suggestions for forma¬ 
tion, Suppl. Ex. I, C, 11 . 


present participle, with estar 14, 
3, 169; equivalents in English, 
168; with ir, venir, andar, quedar, 
169 (a). 

present perfect, use 50. 
prestar atencidn a, 138. 
preterite, use, 49. 
primero, apocopation, 25; uses, 59» 
60. 

progressive construction, 14, 3, 169. 
pronouns, see personal, possessive, 
etc. 1 

pronto, tan pronto como posible, 
92. 

proposito, de proposito, 159. 
proximo, article with, 3, 3 . 

0 

que, conjunction, 140, footnote, 
que, relative, table, 120; use, 122, 
1; never omitted, 122, footnote; 
el que, 122, 3 ; lo que, 122, 4 ; el 
que and lo que as demonstrative 
pronouns, in. 

I que? table, 121; use, 123; i que! 
121, footnote; omission of article 
after, 12, 2. 

quedar, with present participle, 169 
(a). 

querer, conjugation, 39; equals 
will, would, 44, footnote; querer 
deck, 41. 

quien, relative, table, 120; use, 122, 

1 , 2 . 

I quien? table, 121; use, 123. 

-quir verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B; Ap¬ 
pendix B, III, 2. 

R 

radical changing verbs, Suppl. Ex. 

I, A; Appendix B, IV. 
reciprocal verbs, use, 131, 2; el uno 
al otro, 131, 2, footnote, 
reflexive construction, model re¬ 
flexive verb, levantarse, 130; 
equivalent of English reflexives, 
131, 1, of reciprocal verbs, 131, 
2; of simple verbs, 131, 3; of 
passive voice, 131, 4; el uno al 
otro, 131, 2, footnote. 



INDEX 


183 


CThe numbers below refer to paragraphs.] 


regular verbs, conjugations, Appen¬ 
dix B; suggestions for verb for¬ 
mation, Suppl. Ex. I. 
reir, conjugation, loi. 
relatives, table of pronouns, adjec¬ 
tives, adverbs, 120; uses, 122, 
123; direct object with a, 120, 
footnote; followed by subjunc¬ 
tive, 149. 
repente (de), 105. 

S 

saber, conjugation, 76; saber, cono- 
cer, poder, 76, footnote, 
salir, conjugation, 100. 
santo, apocopation, 25, footnote, 
se and si, see personal pronouns, 
seasons, names of, 63, 1; article 
with, 3, 3. 
seguida (en), 117. 
seguir, conjugation, 124. 
sentence, interrogative order, 37; 
negative order, 36; sentence 
position of superlative, 82, foot¬ 
note; pronoun order, 74, 75; 
conditional sentences 151. 
sentir, conjugation, 102. 
sequence of tenses, table, illustra¬ 
tions, 148. 

ser, conjugation, 15; uses, with 
adjectives, 13, 1, 14, 1, footnote; 
with predicate noun or pronoun, 
13, 2; in impersonal expressions, 
13, 3; origin, ownership, material, 
13, 4; time of day, 13, 5; ser 
aficionado a, 91. 

servir, conjugation, 115; sirvase 
Vd., 29. 

should, 44, 44, footnote. 

sino, 36, 2; sino que, 36, 2, footnote; 

no ... sino que, 36, 2 (a), 
su, sus, declension, 93, 1; forms to 
replace su, sus, in case of un¬ 
certainty, 98. 

subjunctive mood, suggestions for 
formation, Suppl. Ex. I, C; se¬ 
quence of tenses, table, illustra¬ 
tions, 148; noun clauses: — 
volitional verbs, 140, (1), emo¬ 
tional, 140, (2), doubt, denial. 


interrogation, 140, (3), impersonal 
expressions, 140, (4); use of 

future, 141; infinitive for sub¬ 
junctive, 140, footnote; with 
decir, escribir, 140, 1, footnote; 
with esperar, 140, 2, footnote; 
adjective clauses, 149; adverbial 
clauses: — indefinite future time, 
150, (1), indefinite place, manner, 
amount, 150, (1), footnote, pur¬ 
pose and result, 150, (2), conces¬ 
sion and restriction, 150, (3); in 
conditional sentences, 151; less 
vivid future, 151, 151, footnote; 
hortatory or optative. 152; 
softened assertions, 153. 
suyo (el) etc., declension, 93, 2; 
forms to replace el suyo, etc. in 
case of uncertainty, 99. 
syllabication. Appendix A, III. 

T 

tal, omission of article, 12, 2. 
tampoco, with no or alone, 36, 1. 
tanto, tan ... como, 85, 1; tanto 
,.. como, 85, 2; tan pronto como 
posible, 92; mientras tanto, 129. 
tardar en, 118. 

teaching methods, see Preface, 
tener, conjugation, 7; meaning to 
have (possess), 5; followed by past 
participle, 5, footnote; tener que, 
9; tener calor, frio, etc., 10; tener 
la bondad de, 29. 

tenses, of indicative: — suggestions 
for formation, Suppl. Ex. 1, C; 
uses, 44-51; of subjunctive: — 
suggestions for formation, Suppl. 
Ex. I, C; uses, 140-153; sequence 
of tenses, table, illustrations, 148; 
simple and compound tenses of 
regular conjugations. Appendix 
B, I, II. 

tercero, apocopation, 25; use, see 
number. 

than, Spanish equivalents, 84, 1, 2, 3. 
time, of day, 64; with por, 64, 
footnote; with article when modi¬ 
fied, 3, 3; with ser, 13, 5; hacer 
(-{- ‘period of time) 30. 



184 


INDEX 


CThe numbers below refer to paragraphs.] 


titles, articles with, 3, 4 ; numerals 
with, 60, 2. 

traer, conjugation, 89. 
tratar, tratar de, 18; tratarse de, 
137- 

triphthongs, Appendix A, II. 

tu, 71-73- 

U 

“uar verbs. Appendix B, III, 3 , 
-mr verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B; Appen¬ 
dix B, III, 6. 

un, uno (-a), i; see indefinite article; 
apocopation, 25; see number; el 
uno al otro, 131, 2, footnote; 
unos, some, i, footnote, 
usted, ustedes, see personal pro¬ 
nouns. 

V 

valer, conjugation, 144; valer la 
pena, 146. 

venir, conjugation, 67; with present 
participle, 169 (a), 
ver, conjugation, 87. 
verbs, verb formation, Suppl. Ex. I; 
regular conjugations. Appendix 
B, I; compound tenses. Appen¬ 
dix B, II; orthographic-changing, 
Suppl. Ex. I, B, Appendix B, III; 
radical-changing, Suppl. Ex. I, 
A, Appendix B, IV; reference 
list irregular verbs. Appendix C; 
uses of indicative mood, 44-51; 
use of imperative, 52; uses of 


subjunctive, 140-153; governing 
infinitive without preposition, 164, 
with de, 165, with a, 166, with en, 
167, see, also, list of verbs with 
prepositions. Appendix D; model 
tenses of reflexive verb, levan- 
tarse, 130; uses of reflexives, 131; 
reciprocal verbs, 131, 2; simple 
verbs with change of meaning 
when reflexive, 131, 3 , footnote; 
of motion with present participle, 
169 (a). 

vestir, conjugation, 116. 
vez, a la vez, 56; de vez en cuando, 
80; en vez (lugar) de, 90. 
volver, conjugation, 78; volver a 
79 * 

vosotros, see personal pronouns. 

W 

weather, 31, 32, 33. 
weights, article with, 3, 7. 
will, 44, footnote. 
would, 44, 44, footnote. 

Y 

yo, see personal pronouns, 71, etc. 
you, tu, usted, etc., 71-73. 

Z 

-zar verbs, Suppl. Ex. I, B, 
Appendix B, III, 3 . 



i 





7^ 




-■ *'■ ,, 






' 'i. -'f 

. N-''-o' ■ f s 

-r'.f 


¥ ■' 


’ *' 

■ • -i.l 


f/ 


>■- 

'J L 

■ » I*' 




V: 













%:- : 
X ' 


■•.f 

.> 


■; ;' v'-v ■;^.. - 


,?V’j - ‘ <i >•■ '• ■••■ • - 


<v 


f ■ 






? 


>» 

I 


A 


%A' 




• «• 
I 

:'r^ 




^ . > ■ 






. J ' 'V ' 

• ^. ^ ■< ■■ 4 / '' r f^t 1 < 

!.»■•-• I .'' ^ J' •» 

•' : .' » ,-- : 


, .'■ ;4vV=f.‘i 

. , i-’v'' ' ,'yy'^'''' 


7 .-,vfi:''.:V''.', • . . " n 








A 







*. ■ . ' 1 



; 




• 1' .* 

’. '"'V 


'/. ■, 


) 

. t , ' 

' • w 

» 



*• 






. ') ^ 

•4 

'■ -.t' 


*' y- -.y 


■ ' ■ ;yA..J':.':.'yy.-#;,, 


..',. 7 , 


.< p 

, . t 


• .;*'■ 


r. 



.;:V< , y^. 


•' ' : .'■ -.' '• yy 


\" 


■ ^ 

t • 


':• '< '■. • 

■ *• . ■ p ■ 


' ’'.y'M; 


. . • '■'■■ -■■!; '■ -,!• y ■ y 
' V'/- ■' '■•'vr, 

'' ' '■: f _ „.v ; . „ ' 


' ,") >■•,■.■ • "y^-.," .’ . V V'';' 




.. .y 


‘ti 




W: :■ ■:■ .. 


' ., • 

.. .*' 


"J . 

, -k ^ * ■ ' 



•. ■'V* 





i ^ t \ V 

1 '5^'- y 


^ ■/. 


U:: 'XMm^W " . -M 

'-■• ‘ ^ ^ lA, .ifi*'siu V,. ;v, 

7 ■ , ■ y; 

••'"./, J ,-i’ ' 

'' 1 i ''''•" '( 'i.'' i''* 

' y.;‘u.v 


: . . . . . 


■j. r.v ; 


'. »• , 


■ ■ 4 ■v-'??;;: y m 

•■ 51-,' ■ ■:>■*• :i-- ■' viftty 

*■ 'H^$4pfK .. 




f 


•'k 


•■ ”^.4 Pi'" 


/ 


' ■'. .■ ‘i '.■ ■ ' •'•. ,‘r' 4' .7*p'; ‘i" 

'* (■ f'., '’ 'V. ’ . '’’■‘•’'k 

vv| 7 '.i'■;■(': V 

- ’.• ’■• I A' 


. V.- 


■V 
















































